JP5443550B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a revolving type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”), in particular, using a display means, The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays effects related to a lottery such as a variation of a decorative symbol sequence.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known in which a display means is provided on a game board and a decorative symbol sequence including decorative symbols such as numbers and symbols is displayed. In this type of gaming machine, a plurality of decorative symbol sequences fluctuate on the display means based on the winning of the game medium at the start opening, and the variation is stopped at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result. It has become. That is, the presence / absence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit) is displayed by a combination of decorative symbols that stop on the active line. In addition, in the decorative symbol sequence, a plurality of normal symbols and a plurality of probability variation symbols (probability variation symbols) are provided as decorative symbols. On the other hand, if a jackpot combination is established by the probability variation symbol, then a probability variation jackpot is generated. In the probability variation big hit, after the big hit state is finished, the probability of the next big hit will be set higher than usual, and the probability of winning the start opening will be increased more than usual. A game state is generated.

  In recent years, gaming machines equipped with a time-saving function are also known. In this type of game machine, after the end of the big hit state, until the decorative symbol sequence fluctuates a predetermined number of times, the variation time of the decorative symbol sequence is shortened and the ease of winning a prize at the starting port is increased more than usual. For example, a short-time gaming state is generated.

  Note that these gaming machines are provided with a movable piece that increases the ease of winning a prize at the starting port, and a passage gate through which game media can pass, and the game media passes through the passage gate. When the lottery (normal lottery) is performed and the lottery result is a win, the movable piece is opened for a short time. And in the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state, by increasing the probability that the lottery result is a win, that is, the probability that the movable piece will be released, or by increasing the opening time of the movable piece, The ease of winning a prize is increased compared to the normal time.

JP 2005-6742 A Patent 3039765

However, in the above game machine, after the large per the end, it is not possible to sustain the expectations of Yu technique's, there was often also the case that if you quit the game at that point.

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in gaming motivation after the end of jackpot as much as possible.

Means 1: “An effect display means for displaying an effect accompanying the game;
A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the detection of the game medium by the winning state detection means;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
A decorative movable body that appears in front of the effect display means and is movable based on the display mode by the display control means;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability that at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is higher than usual. A first advantageous gaming state control means for imparting an advantageous gaming state with a probability variation state set to a higher value,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and thereafter, an advantageous gaming state that does not cause the probability fluctuation state is given. Two advantageous gaming state control means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result, the third advantageous gaming state in which the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and thereafter the advantageous gaming state is set to the probability variation state Control means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the fourth advantageous gaming state control means that gives the player the predetermined profit by the predetermined profit giving means, but does not cause an advantageous gaming state;
Comprising
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
High probability expectation small effect indicating that a probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means,
In addition, it is an effect that can appear when a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected small effect, and it is highly possible that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means A common production execution means capable of executing the high-probability expected production shown in FIG.
As the display mode unique to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is established in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, The game machine is characterized by having a third specific performance execution means that can execute "."

  Here, examples of the “effect display means” include a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, a plasma display device, or a CRT. In addition, as the “opening / closing winning device”, there can be mentioned a big winning opening that is opened at the time of a big hit and from which a game medium can be won.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, at least a start opening is provided in the game area, and when it is detected that a game medium is won in the start opening, a lottery is performed by the lottery means. Moreover, the display mode regarding the lottery is specified based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and the display mode is derived to the effect display unit. A specific display mode will be described later.

By the way, in the lottery means of the present invention, it is possible to generate at least four kinds of advantageous gaming states as “winning”.
The first advantageous gaming state is a so-called “probability variation jackpot”, and occurs when the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result. When this hits, a specific profit is first given to the player. Specifically, the opening / closing operation of the open / close winning device is repeated a plurality of times, and the opening time per time in the open state is set to a time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, so that the player A specific benefit. In addition, for the subsequent lottery, at least the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than normal (so-called “probability fluctuation state”). Thereby, the player can obtain a lot of profits, and the expectation for the next big hit is greatly enhanced. In other words, a jackpot ream can be made, and the real thrill of the jackpot can be given to the player. In the probability variation state, in addition to increasing the probability that a specific profit is given, the probability that a predetermined profit is given may be increased.

  The second advantageous gaming state is a so-called “normal big hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result. At this time, a specific profit is given to the player as in the “first advantageous gaming state”. However, for the subsequent lottery, the probability variation state is not entered, and the normal probability (low probability) is obtained.

  The third advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result. In this win, first, a predetermined profit (a profit less advantageous than the “specific profit”) is given to the player. Specifically, the opening / closing operation of the open / close prize-winning device is performed a smaller number of times than in the case of “specific profit”, and the opening time per time is set to a time that allows several game media to barely win. Thus, the profit given to the player is limited. Further, for the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than the normal time (so-called “probability fluctuation state”).

  The fourth advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result. In this win, as in the “third advantageous gaming state”, a predetermined profit is given to the player. However, a new probability fluctuation state is not generated for the subsequent lottery. That is, since the gaming state does not change before and after winning, the player's mood cannot be raised. Therefore, in the following, such “low hit” with low advantage (in other words, “win with no advantageous gaming state”) will be referred to as “small hit” for convenience and referred to as “big hit” with high advantage. I will make a distinction.

  By the way, in the “third advantageous gaming state”, since a probability fluctuation state occurs after a predetermined profit is given, if the gaming state is suggested to the player, the expectation for the lottery is greatly increased. It becomes possible to raise the player's mood. However, in this way, if the player is informed that the probability variation state has occurred, the “third advantageous game state” and the “fourth advantageous game state” are clearly distinguished and recognized. In other words, a state in which the “fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit)” in which a probability change state does not newly occur and the highly advantageous “third advantageous gaming state (big hit)” can be visually discriminated. It becomes. For this reason, it is recognized that when the “fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit)” is reached, a predetermined profit with a low advantage is given, but immediately after that, it becomes a value that has no value. Therefore, the expectation for the lottery is lowered, and there is a concern that it may cause irritation. In particular, if the probability of becoming the “fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit)” is extremely higher than the probability of becoming the “third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, the “fourth advantageous gaming state” is frequently There is a risk that the willingness to play may be impaired due to the dissatisfaction raised each time, that is, the dissatisfaction with not being a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the present invention, the display mode on the effect display means in the case of the third advantageous gaming state and the display mode in the case of the fourth advantageous gaming state cannot be visually distinguished. When the probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation to the player. Specifically, when the lottery result is the third result, that is, as the display mode that can appear when the third advantageous gaming state (big hit), the normal state effect indicating the normal gaming state, and the third High probability expectation small effect indicating that there is a possibility that the probability variation state is generated by the advantageous gaming state control means, and that there is a high possibility that the probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. And a high probability state effect indicating that a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. On the other hand, when the lottery result is the fourth result, that is, as a display mode that can appear when the fourth advantageous game state (small hit), the normal state effect, the high probability expectation small effect, and the high probability expectation large It has directing. That is, in the fourth advantageous gaming state, although the high probability state effect (the effect indicating that the probability variation state has occurred) cannot appear, the other effects appear in the same manner as the third advantageous game state. It is possible.

  In addition, the high probability state effect that appears only in the third advantageous gaming state is an effect that appears after the stage of the high probability expectation small effect and the high probability expectation large effect, and the high probability expectation small effect is high. The transition to the probabilistic expectation production requires the establishment of the first condition, and the transition from the high probability expectation production to the high probability state production requires the establishment of the second condition. Even if the probability variation state occurs, the “high probability state effect” does not appear immediately. In other words, the third advantageous gaming state and the fourth advantageous gaming state cannot be distinguished for a while from when the predetermined profit is given until the “high probability state effect” appears. . For this reason, even if the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit) occurs, “may be the third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, that is, “probability fluctuation state may have entered. It is possible to increase the player's expectation. Therefore, the willingness to play is increased, and the end of the game due to dissatisfaction can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In both advantageous gaming states, as a normal development pattern, the transition from the normal state production to the high probability expectation small production and the high probability expectation small production to the high probability expectation large production, Expectations can be raised step by step. For this reason, the willingness to game is improved, and it is possible to prevent the game from being ended as much as possible.

  In particular, when a predetermined effect state is reached, a decorative movable body appears in front of the effect display means, and is moved according to the display mode (each effect). For this reason, it is possible to visually recognize the combination of the image by the effect display means and the effect by the three-dimensional ornament, and it is possible to greatly enhance the visual interest. In other words, the collaboration between the image and the decoration can enhance the production and further increase the player's expectation. In addition, this decorative movable body can appear and appear suddenly when it reaches a predetermined production state, so that the player can be surprised and excited, and the motivation for playing can be increased.

  In the case of the third advantageous gaming state, a high-probability state effect indicating “being in a probability variation state” will eventually appear, which gives the player a sense of security and draws lottery. It is possible to drastically increase the expectation of the user, that is, the expectation that a specific profit will be given.

Means 2: “An effect display means for displaying an effect accompanying the game;
A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the detection of the game medium by the winning state detection means;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
A decorative movable body that appears in front of the effect display means and is movable based on the display mode by the display control means;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
A predetermined profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by making the opening / closing prize winning device within 2 seconds in total and performing the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing prize winning device at least once;
The opening and closing winning device per opening time is 6 seconds or more, and the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing winning device is performed more than the number of opening and closing operations when the predetermined profit is given. Specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to a person,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability that at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is higher than usual. A first advantageous gaming state control means for imparting an advantageous gaming state with a probability variation state set to a higher value,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and thereafter, an advantageous gaming state that does not cause the probability fluctuation state is given. Two advantageous gaming state control means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result, the third advantageous gaming state in which the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and thereafter the advantageous gaming state is set to the probability variation state Control means;
If the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit, but the fourth advantageous game state control means does not cause an advantageous gaming state. Equipped,
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
High probability expectation small effect indicating that a probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means,
In addition, it is an effect that can appear when a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected small effect, and it is highly possible that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means A common production execution means capable of executing the high-probability expected production shown in FIG.
As the display mode unique to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is established in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, The game machine is characterized by having a third specific performance execution means that can execute "."

  According to the configuration of the means 2, it is possible to achieve the same operations and effects as the means 1. In particular, in the configuration of the means 2, the time for which the opening / closing prize winning device is opened by the predetermined profit granting means is set to "generally within 2 seconds". Thus, it becomes possible to barely win several game media by opening the open / close winning device. In other words, it is possible to give a predetermined profit to the player and limit the profit to a less advantageous than the specific profit. Further, in the configuration of the means 2, the opening time per opening when the opening / closing prize winning device is opened by the specific profit granting means is set to “6 seconds or more”. Thus, each time the open / close winning device is opened, a plurality of game media can be awarded with a margin. That is, it is possible to give a specific profit that is highly advantageous to the player.

Means 3: “An effect display means for displaying an effect accompanying the game;
A launching device for launching a game ball to the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle;
An obstacle member disposed in the game area and changing a rolling direction of the game ball;
A start opening arranged in the game area and capable of winning a game ball;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game ball has won the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of the game ball by the winning state detection means;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
A decorative movable body that appears in front of the effect display means and is movable based on the display mode by the display control means;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation, and allows the game ball to win by changing from a closed state to an open state;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set as a first predetermined time that allows several game balls to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to
The opening / closing time of the opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game balls to win in a relaxed manner, and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing prize-winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for giving a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of,
A payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the start opening or the open / close winning device;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability that at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is higher than usual. A first advantageous gaming state control means for imparting an advantageous gaming state with a probability variation state set to a higher value,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and thereafter, an advantageous gaming state that does not cause the probability fluctuation state is given. Two advantageous gaming state control means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result, the third advantageous gaming state in which the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and thereafter the advantageous gaming state is set to the probability variation state Control means;
If the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit, but the fourth advantageous game state control means does not cause an advantageous gaming state. Equipped,
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
High probability expectation small effect indicating that a probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means,
In addition, it is an effect that can appear when a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected small effect, and it is highly possible that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means A common production execution means capable of executing the high-probability expected production shown in FIG.
As the display mode unique to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is established in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, The game machine is characterized by having a third specific performance execution means that can execute "."

  According to the configuration of the means 3, when a game ball is launched from the launching device in response to the operation of the operation handle, the game ball is a game in which a number of obstacle members, a starting port, a special symbol display, and the like are incorporated. Guided to the area. Then, when it is detected that a game ball has won at the start opening, a lottery by a lottery means is performed based on that. When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player occurs.

  The advantageous gaming state is the same as that of the means 1, and “first advantageous gaming state” to “fourth advantageous gaming state” are preset. That is, in the “first advantageous game state”, the opening / closing operation of the open / close winning device is repeated a plurality of times, and the opening time per time in the open state is a time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin. By doing so, a specific benefit is given to the player. The probability variation state is set for subsequent lotteries.

  Like the “first advantageous game state”, the “second advantageous game state” gives a specific benefit to the player but does not change the probability variation state.

  In the “third advantageous game state”, the opening / closing operation of the open / close prize-winning device is performed a smaller number of times than in the case of “specific profit”, and the opening time per time is such that several game balls can barely win. By giving time, a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, for the subsequent lottery, the probability variation state is set.

  Like the “third advantageous game state”, the “fourth advantageous game state” gives a predetermined profit to the player, but does not newly generate a probability fluctuation state for the subsequent lottery.

  As described above, in the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, both are given a predetermined profit. However, in the “third advantageous gaming state”, the probability variation state thereafter, and a probability that at least a specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery (ie, “first advantageous gaming state” or “second advantageous gaming state” may occur). The probability variation state is not generated in the “fourth advantageous game state”. Accordingly, the willingness to play is greatly different between the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state”. However, in the present invention, since the similar effect is performed by the effect display means, the third advantageous game state and the fourth advantageous effect are given for a while from when the predetermined profit is given until the high probability state effect appears. Even if the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit) occurs, it is possible to make a guess that "there may be a probability fluctuation state" even if the gaming state cannot be distinguished and recognized. .

  In both advantageous gaming states, as a normal development pattern, the transition from the normal state production to the high probability expectation small production and the high probability expectation small production to the high probability expectation large production, Expectations can be raised step by step. For this reason, the willingness to game is improved, and it is possible to prevent the game from being ended as much as possible.

  In particular, in the case of a predetermined effect state, a decorative movable body appears in front of the effect display means, and moves based on the display mode. Therefore, the image displayed by the effect display means and a three-dimensional decorative object are visually recognized. It is possible to greatly enhance visual interest. In other words, the collaboration between the image and the decoration can enhance the production and further increase the player's expectation. In addition, this decorative movable body can appear and appear suddenly when it reaches a predetermined production state, so that the player can be surprised and excited, and the motivation for playing can be increased.

  Means 4: In any one of the constitutions of means 1 to 3, “the ornamental movable body is immersed in the normal state effect and the high probability expectation small effect, the high probability expectation large effect and the high probability It has a decorative movable body operation control means that appears at the time of a state effect.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the normal development pattern shifts from the normal state effect to the high probability expectation small effect and from the high probability expectation small effect to the high probability expectation large effect. It becomes possible to increase in stages. In particular, in the present invention, in order to make a decorative movable body appear in a high-probability expectation production with a high expected value and a high-probability state production that can be developed thereafter, the expectation for high probability is greatly increased in the high-probability expectation production. Can do. In other words, since a combination effect that could not be visually recognized in a normal state effect or a high-probability expected small effect becomes suddenly visible when the high-probability expected large effect is made, it is possible to make the player excited. . For this reason, it is possible to further improve the motivation for the game and to prevent the game from being ended halfway.

  Means 5: In any one of the constitutions of means 1 to 4, “the decorative movable body has a shape of a character's face having an openable / closable mouth”.

  Here, as the “character”, characters, novels, comics, movies, plays, etc., animals, plants, or props, or virtual characters, animals, plants, or props created for this game machine And the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, since the character's mouth opens and closes, an effect related to the character can be realized by performing an effect related to the mouth, for example, an effect of scolding or crushing an object. . In addition, the effect mode displayed on the effect display means can be viewed through the mouth (opening portion), and the design of the effect screen can be enhanced.

Means 6: In the constitution of means 5, “the display control means can display“ word ”on the effect display means,
The decoration movable body operation control means opens and closes the mouth of the decoration movable body in accordance with the display of the “word” on the effect display means.

  Here, examples of the “words” include dialogues such as game state guidance, greetings, messages, or ilustrations.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the mouth of the decorative movable body that appears in front of the effect display means opens and closes in accordance with the “word” displayed on the effect display means, so that the character is also speaking. Can be recognized. For this reason, a sense of reality can be enhanced, and the fun of the production can be greatly enhanced. In addition, when displaying the “word” on the effect display means, if it is displayed on the inner part of the mouth (opening portion) (that is, if the “word” is made visible through the mouth as a window), The “word” can be recognized without being blocked by the decorative movable body, and the impression that the “word” is popped out of the mouth of the character can be given.

  Means 7: The constitution of means 6 is characterized by further comprising: “a voice output means for outputting the“ word ”displayed on the effect display means by voice”.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the “word” is output by voice and can be recognized auditorily. For this reason, it becomes possible to give reality to the operation | movement of a decoration movable body, and can further enhance the interest of production.

Means 8: In any one of the constitutions of Means 1 to 7, “a game board having a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
A drive unit that cantilever-supports the decorative movable body on an axis substantially along the surface of the game board from the left or right outside of the effect display means, and moves up and down;
When the substantially elongate main body is disposed in the first horizontal arrangement state, the decorative movable body can be shielded, and the main body is substantially vertical. When arranged in the arrangement state, it comprises a front decoration movable body that can shield between the decoration movable body and the drive unit. "

  Here, the “decorative movable body” and the “front decorative movable body” include “an accessory decorative movable body that is arranged so as to come into contact with the game medium and can change the movement of the game medium”, “ Are arranged so as not to contact each other, and a decorative movable body capable of producing an effect by movement is included.

  Furthermore, the “driving unit” may be any unit that can move the decorative movable body in the vertical direction. For example, the “driving member extending in the vertical direction and guided and guided by the guide member to hold the decorative movable body. The thing provided with the to-be-guided member and the moving means to move a to-be-guided member "is mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the decorative movable body that moves up and down by the drive unit is provided on the front side of the effect display means. The front side of the decorative movable body is provided with a front decorative movable body capable of shifting between the first arrangement state and the second arrangement state, and the front decorative movable body is in a substantially horizontal first arrangement state. The decorative movable body can be shielded by being positioned on the rear side thereof, and the decorative movable body and the drive unit can be shielded in the substantially vertical second arrangement state.

  Thereby, it is possible to perform a novel effect as if the decorative movable body suddenly appears and appears on the front side of the effect display means from the state where the decorative movable body is shielded in the substantially horizontal first arrangement state. In addition, by switching the effect of exposing the decorative movable body so as to be visible or shielding it so that it is difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to make the player clear and attract attention. Specifically, the decorative movable body is released from the state in which the decorative movable body is shielded on the rear side of the front decorative movable body, for example, when the front decorative movable body is shifted to the second arrangement state and the shielding state is released. Shifts to an exposed state. Thereby, it is possible to produce a sharp effect as if the decorative movable body suddenly appeared from the rear side of the front decorative movable body. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that attracts the interest of the player and does not get bored.

  In addition, the front decoration movable body is arranged in the first arrangement state and the decoration movable body is shielded behind the front decoration movable body, the front decoration movable body moves to the second arrangement state, and the decoration movable body moves up and down. When performing various effects, an effect of showing a large amount of movement of the decorative movable body can be expected. Specifically, when the front decorative movable body shifts from the substantially vertical first arrangement state to the substantially horizontal second arrangement state, the space developed on the rear side is produced as if it was developed widely. Since a visual effect can be expected, an effect of giving an impression as if the amount of movement of the decorative movable body that moves in the vertical direction in the rear space as well increases can be expected. As a result, an effect that the amount of movement of the decorative movable body can be expected to be large can be expected, so that the player can be aware of the movement of the decorative movable body, attract attention, and prevent the interest from decreasing.

  Furthermore, in addition to being able to produce the decorative movable body from the shielded state to the visible state by the front decorative movable body, that is, to be able to appear freely, in addition, when the effect and the movement of the effect image by the effect display means are associated, It is possible to produce a novel and interesting production. In addition, since the decorative movable body can be moved freely, it is possible to shift the decorative movable body from the front side of the effect display means so that the effect image by the effect display means can be easily seen. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the eye fatigue of the player who wants to see the effect image, and it is possible to attract more interest for a longer time and to be absorbed.

  Further, not only the decorative movable body but also the front decorative movable body may be attached to the front side of the effect display means so as to be able to appear and disappear, and may be immersed above or below the effect display means. As a result, a novel effect can be added to the front decorative movable body, and an effect that attracts the player's eyes can be expected.

  Furthermore, since a separate decorative movable body (front decorative movable body) is attached to the front side of the decorative movable body that moves up and down, it is easy to move the front decorative movable body without contacting the decorative movable body. In other words, since the front decorative movable body can be moved without being limited to the movable range of the decorative movable body, it is easy to widen the movable range of the front decorative movable body as much as possible or to increase the size. Thus, a more prominent decorative movable body can be provided, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  By the way, as a method for supporting the decorative movable body to move, it is supported and moved at the center of the decorative movable body (for example, the center in the left-right direction), or supported and moved at the left and right ends of the decorative movable body. Can be considered. However, if it is supported at the center of the decorative movable body, the drive unit for moving the decorative movable body will be arranged in the center, and the drive unit can be seen and give a complicated impression. There is a problem of obstructing the installation of display means and the like.

  On the other hand, when it is supported at both ends of the decorative movable body, the drive unit is dispersed on both sides with respect to one decorative movable body, and the drive unit is enlarged, and both sides of the decorative movable body are supported. Must be moved in synchronism with each other, resulting in a complicated configuration, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom of installation in a gaming machine is reduced and the cost is increased.

  In general, the length of the drive unit that moves the decorative movable body tends to increase as the amount of movement of the decorative movable body increases. Therefore, when the drive unit is arranged above or below the effect display means so that the decorative movable body moves on the front side of the effect display means, the installation space above or below the effect display means is relatively small. Since only a narrow and short drive unit can be installed, the amount of movement of the decorative movable body is reduced, and it is difficult to make the movement impressed by the player.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of this means, the drive unit cantilever-supports the decorative movable body, and the drive unit is arranged on either the left or right side of the effect display means.

  As a result, the decorative movable body is supported in a cantilevered manner, so that the configuration of the drive unit can be simplified and the drive unit can be enlarged compared to the case where both ends are supported. The decorative movable body can be made relatively large, and the decorative movable body can be made larger so that the player can stand out and make the recognizing action easier to recognize. Can be entertained.

  In addition, since the decorative movable body is cantilevered, for example, the drive unit is arranged at the end of the game board (on the left and right outer sides of the effect display means), and the decorative movable body supported by the support shaft is connected to the game board. It is also possible to move in the vertical direction at substantially the center (front side of the effect display means), and the decorative movable body can be arranged in a more conspicuous position, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. .

  Furthermore, since the drive unit is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the effect display means, it is possible to prevent the effect form displayed on the effect display means by the drive unit from being obstructed, and to ensure that the player has the entire effect aspect. While being able to be visually recognized, it can prevent that a drive unit and an effect display means interfere, and it can be set as the game machine with which excitement provided with them can be heightened.

  Further, since the drive unit is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the effect display means, it is possible to secure at least the length of the drive display unit in the vertical direction of the effect display means. Compared to the case where it is placed on the upper side or the lower side, it can be longer, and the amount of movement of the decorative movable body can be increased to make it stand out to the player, and the decorative movable body can be enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  By the way, when the decorative movable body is cantilevered, it is necessary to transmit the power of the drive unit by connecting the decorative movable body and the drive unit to the drive unit using, for example, a support shaft. is there. At this time, since the decorative movable body is arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized by the player, the support shaft and the like connected to the movable movable body are exposed to be visible to the player, and the appearance is impaired. There was a risk that it would awaken the interest.

  On the other hand, according to the structure of this means, the front decoration movable body can shield between a 1st drive unit and a decoration movable body in the 2nd arrangement | positioning state arrange | positioned substantially perpendicularly. Thereby, since a connection part can be shielded between a decoration movable body and a drive unit, a support shaft etc. can be concealed (in the above-mentioned example), and appearance can be improved.

  Also, a method of concealing the support shaft and the like by attaching an appropriate decorative member to the front side of the connecting portion can be considered. However, according to this method, the decorative member and the decorative movable body move at the same time. It is easy to understand the relationship between the decorative movable body and the decorative movable body (connected by a support shaft or the like). On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 8, since the connecting portion can be shielded by the front decorative movable body that moves differently from the decorative movable body, it is difficult to understand the relationship between the drive unit and the decorative movable body. it can. This makes it difficult to understand how the decorative movable body is moved, so it can produce an unexpected performance as if it is floating in the air, attracting the player's attention and enhancing the interest it can.

  In addition, the decorative movable body may be a part of the predetermined character, so that the predetermined character can be moved by moving the decorative movable body, particularly if the character is recognized by the player. By moving the character, it can be strongly impressed, and the player can be entertained and more interesting.

  Furthermore, since the decorative movable body is moved in the vertical direction, this moves in the vertical direction substantially the same as the flow direction of the game medium flowing down the game area, and between the game medium and the decorative movable body. It is easy to move the player's line of sight, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

Means 9: In the constitution of means 8, "the decorative movable body is a first decorative movable body that is disposed so as to be visible from the player, and a second decorative movable body disposed below the first decorative movable body. And configured with
The drive unit includes a first drive unit that moves the first decorative movable body and a second drive unit that drives the second decorative movable body. ''
It is characterized by that.

  Here, “first decoration movable body” and “second decoration movable body” are “first decoration movable body and second decoration movable body”, such as predetermined characters such as dolls and animal shapes, buildings, vehicles, etc. For example, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body may be expressed as “upper side from upper jaw and lower side from lower jaw”, “ `` Head and torso of a given character '', `` A torso and limbs of a given character '', `` What is separated and docked as a rocket or space '', `` Multiple elevators and escalators, or people on elevators and escalators '', `` Building and It may be moved up and down or extended like "plant, volcano".

  In addition, as a position where the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are sunk with respect to the effect display means, both the decorative movable bodies may be sunk on the upper side or the lower side. The movable body may be sunk on the upper side and the second decorative movable body may be sunk on the lower side.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, except for a variable prize device such as an electric tulip or an attacker device, there is only one movable decorative movable body, and the production operation by the movement of the decorative movable body is monotonous. It was easy to become a thing, and there was a fear that some players might get tired and reduce interest.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body that are moved up and down by the first drive unit and the second drive unit are provided so as to be visible so as to cover the game area of the game board. is there.

  As a result, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body that move in the vertical direction can be moved closer to or away from each other, only one of them can be moved up and down, or both can be moved up and down in the same direction. Since the two decorative movable bodies perform various performance operations, the decorative movable bodies become conspicuous in the gaming machine, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to those decorative movable bodies. It is possible to entertain the production operation by the two decorative movable bodies and prevent the interest from deteriorating. Moreover, since the two decorative movable bodies, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body, are provided, the types (variations) of the directing operation can be increased by combining the respective movements, making the directing operation more enjoyable. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating due to the production operation.

  Means 10: In the constitution of means 8 or 9, “the front decorative movable body is rotatably supported at the end portion side on which the decorative movable body is cantilevered, and the supported rotating By rotating about the moving axis, it is possible to shift between the first arrangement state and the second arrangement state.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, since the movement of the decorative movable body is only a movement in the vertical direction or only the movement rotating in the front-rear direction, the movement direction is one direction. The movement becomes a simple movement, and by getting used to the production by the movement of the decorative movable body, some players may get bored with the movement of the decorative movable body and reduce the interest in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 10, the front decorative movable body is supported so that the end portion thereof is pivotable, and the first decorative movable body is rotated substantially around the supported rotation shaft, thereby being substantially horizontal first. Transition between the arrangement state and the substantially vertical second arrangement state is possible.

  As a result, the front decoration movable body can be moved using a separate movement (turning) that is different from the vertical movement of the decoration movable body, thereby increasing variations in movement within the game area and providing more effects. It is possible to increase the effect and enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, among the front decorative movable bodies having a substantially long main body portion, a substantially vertical second arrangement state is obtained by rotating around the same end side as the side on which the decorative movable body is cantilevered. At the time, the main body portion extending toward the other end side inevitably shields between the decorative movable body and the drive unit. Thereby, since the connection part of a decoration movable body and a drive unit can be shielded naturally, it can improve appearance more smoothly and skillfully.

  Further, since the end side of the front decoration movable body is rotatably supported, the rotation means for rotating the front decoration movable body is compared with the case where the front decoration movable body is supported near the center. Easy to place on the end side. Thereby, since it is difficult to shield a decoration movable body, an effect display means, etc. with the said rotation means, it can make it easy to see the effect aspect which these represent, and can prevent the fall of an interest.

  Means 11: In any one of the means 8 to 10, it is possible that “at least two or more front decorative movable bodies are provided”.

  According to the structure of the means 11, at least two or more front side movable movable bodies, that is, a plurality are provided. Thereby, compared with the case where only one is provided, since it can give a more gorgeous and lively impression, a gaming machine that can attract more interest can be provided. Note that the plurality of front decorative movable bodies may move at the same timing and at the same time, or may move at different times. Moreover, it may move in conjunction with each other or may move in conjunction with the movement of the decorative movable body, and can express various production variations.

  Means 12: In the constitution of means 11, it can be assumed that "the front decorative movable bodies are arranged in pairs at substantially the same height on the left and right".

  Here, “a set of two” means that the two front decorative movable bodies arranged at substantially the same height on the left and right have relevance and a sense of unity. For example, two front decorative movable bodies Combining two front decorative movable bodies that have similar body sizes, similar shapes, patterns, and colors of the two front decorative movable bodies causes a unified idea (becomes an alphabet, Examples of the configuration include a shape imitating a word or a slogan).

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the means 12, the front decorative movable bodies are arranged in pairs at the same height on the left and right. In other words, since one front decorative movable body is divided into two, the length in the left-right direction of one front decorative movable body can be reduced to about half. Thereby, since the size per front decoration movable body can be made small, the drive load which each drive unit bears becomes light, and it becomes possible to drive a front decoration movable body at a faster speed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a speedy and dynamic effect by the front decoration movable body, and it is possible to enjoy the performance operation of the front decoration movable body and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, two front decorative movable bodies arranged at substantially the same height on the left and right are formed as a set, that is, in a shape and pattern reminiscent of unity, so that the substantially horizontal second arrangement state is substantially horizontal. When transitioning to a state, it is possible to produce a united shape that causes one unified idea. For example, a decorative member that is shaped like a character is attached to the front decorative movable body arranged on the right side and the front decorative movable body arranged on the left side, and the two front decorative movable bodies are the same by moving to the first arrangement state. When placed at a height, it is possible to produce an effect in which two words become one continuous meaningful word. In this way, by performing an unexpected performance, it is possible to provide an interesting gaming machine that attracts the attention of the player and other spectators and has a strong ability to attract customers.

  In addition, as a place where two front decoration movable bodies arrange | positioned on the right and left same height are rotationally supported, the edge part of each main-body part may be sufficient, and the center vicinity may be sufficient. Moreover, as a case where it equips with the edge part of a main-body part, the structure provided in the edge part side (for example, the right edge part side etc.) of the same direction may respectively be sufficient, but the right side front decoration movable body (henceforth "right front side decoration movable body"). And the left front decorative movable body (hereinafter referred to as “left front decorative movable body”) are arranged in the substantially vertical direction in the second arrangement state. A relatively wide space can be formed between the right front decorative movable body and the left front decorative movable body. As a result, it is easy to see the effect forms of the decorative body and the effect display means arranged on the rear side of the front decorative movable body, and these effects can be further enhanced.

Means 13: In any one of the means 8 to 12, the game board further includes a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in the game area,
The decorative movable body can be visually recognized from the player through the through-hole, and the drive unit is attached and fixed to the rear side of the game board.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the decorative movable body is disposed in the game area where the game medium is driven and flows down (front side of the game board), and the decorative movable body does not particularly contact the game medium, In the case where the movement of the game medium is not affected, the size and the movable range are small because the arrangement must be made so as not to come into contact with the game medium. The movement is small and difficult to understand, and depending on the player, the movement of the decorative movable body itself cannot be enjoyed.

  Further, as a part for mounting and fixing the drive unit to the game board, the front side and the rear side of the game board can be considered. For example, when the drive unit is mounted and fixed to the front side of the game board, the drive unit It is necessary to secure a mounting space for mounting and fixing the game unit on the front side of the game board, but normally, a game area where game media is driven and flowed down is formed on the front side of the game board. If the installation space is secured, there is a problem that the game area becomes narrow. As a result, the flow range of the game medium is narrowed, so that the movement of the game medium is likely to be monotonous, and some players may get bored with the movement of the game medium and reduce the interest.

  Furthermore, the drive unit is only for moving the decorative movable body, and when the player visually recognizes the drive unit, there is a possibility that a complicated impression is given and the interest in the game is lowered. For this reason, it is conceivable to cover the drive unit with a decorative body, etc., but in this case, the decorative body that covers them is an essential member, which restricts the overall design of the gaming machine and discriminates from other gaming machines. There is a risk that it will be difficult to achieve.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 13, the drive unit is fixedly attached to the rear side of the game board, and a through hole is provided in the game board so that the decorative movable body can be visually recognized by the player through the through hole. It is a thing.

  As a result, the decorative movable body is arranged on the side opposite to the side (front side) where the game area of the game board is provided, so that the size and size of the decorative movable body can be compared with the case where the decorative movable body is arranged in the game area. The restriction of the movable range is reduced, the size of the decorative movable body can be made as large as possible, or the movable range of the decorative movable body can be made as large as possible. It is possible to easily recognize the performance operation of the body and to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by the performance operation.

  In addition, since the drive unit is mounted and fixed on the rear side of the game board, the game area is not narrowed for mounting and fixing the drive unit, and a sufficient game area can be secured. It is possible to prevent the movement from becoming a monotonous movement and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is desirable that the drive unit is attached and fixed to the game board so that it does not reach the through hole, and this makes it difficult for the player to see the drive unit, so that it is difficult to see the drive unit, and a complicated impression Can be prevented, and interest can be prevented from decreasing.

  In addition, since the game board has a through-hole, when the effect display means is arranged behind it, the effect image is easy to see, and peripheral parts and wiring that drive the effect display means are used as the through-hole. By fixing so as not to be applied, it is possible to prevent the appearance from deteriorating and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

Means 14: In any one of the constitutions of means 8 to 13, “further comprises a frame-shaped main character provided so as to cover the through hole of the game board from the front of the game board,
The main character includes the front decoration movable body provided on the inner side of the frame shape, and a stage provided with a flow-down port through which the game medium flows down from the predetermined position onto the game board,
The first decorative movable body, the second decorative movable body, and the effect display means can be visually recognized through the inside of the main object frame.

  Here, the “stage” may be anything that allows the game medium to be given a predetermined performance action by rolling the game medium so that the player's interest is enhanced by the movement of the game medium. For example, “the rolling surface is fixed and the supplied game medium is rolled in a predetermined direction (left-right direction or front-rear direction) and then discharged from a predetermined position (for example, a fixed type stage)” "A part or all of the rolling surface is configured to move, and the supplied game medium rolls in a predetermined direction (left-right direction and front-rear direction) and then is discharged from a predetermined position (for example, Movable type stage) ”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 14, a main character having a front decoration movable body provided inside the frame shape and a stage is arranged in the game area. Thereby, not only the production operation of the first decoration movable body, the second decoration movable body, and the front decoration movable body, but also the movement of the game medium rolling on the rolling production surface (stage) of the main character Since the interest of a person can be enhanced, the interest can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the front decorative movable body is provided inside the frame shape of the main character, when the front decorative movable body is rotated on the inner side, the constituent member of the main character and the front decorative movable member do not interfere with each other. Therefore, it can be smoothly rotated and is more preferable.

  Note that the rolling effect surface may be the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body, which makes it possible to move the two rolling effect surfaces greatly or make complicated movements, respectively. Along with this, the movement of the game medium on the rolling effect surface can also be made a complicated movement, so it can be made a more impactful movement, and the player is focused on the rolling effect surface and the game medium. , Can be of interest.

  Further, according to the configuration of the means 14, the main object is arranged in a frame shape so as to cover the through hole of the game board from the front, and the first decorative movable body provided on the rear side of the game board via the base, the second The decorative movable body is made visible through the inner frame of the main character. As a result, the protagonist is arranged on the front side and the decorative movable body is arranged on the rear side, so that it can be a deep gaming machine, and can be differentiated from other gaming machines. It can be noted.

  Means 15: In the configuration of means 14, it is assumed that “the main body portion of the front decorative movable body is formed in a size that does not contact the game medium supplied on the stage”.

  By the way, the front decoration movable body is arranged so as to come into contact with the game medium, and is arranged so as not to come into contact with the accessory decoration movable body that can change the movement of the game medium or the game medium. If the front decorative movable body as the accessory decorative movable body is arranged when the main character is equipped with the stage and the front decorative movable body, It is conceivable that the movement of the game medium is changed by the front decoration movable body before the sufficient rolling effect is performed, and the game medium flows down from the flow outlet. Thereby, although the effect by the front decoration movable body can be enjoyed, there is a possibility that the movement of the game medium rolling on the stage cannot be sufficiently enjoyed. Further, when the main body portion of the decorative movable body comes into contact, there is a possibility that the game medium flows down from a place other than a predetermined flow-down port, and there is a possibility that the player will be disappointed and entertained.

On the other hand, according to the structure of the means 15, the main body part of the front decorative movable body is formed in a size that does not contact the game medium supplied on the stage. That is, since it is arranged as a decorative movable body that does not affect the game medium, there is no possibility of disturbing the rolling effect of the game medium unfolded on the stage. Thereby, in addition to the effect of the movement by the front decoration movable body, the effect of rolling the game medium rolling on the stage can be sufficiently provided, and the player's eyes can be enjoyed. Further, since the movement of the game medium is not hindered, the concern that the interest of the player is reduced by flowing the game medium down to a place other than the predetermined flow-down opening by contact is also eliminated.
Therefore, it is possible to provide an attractive gaming machine that is more interesting and lasts.

  Means 16: In any one of the means 8 to 15, it is possible that “the front decorative body is a decorative movable body capable of emitting light”.

  According to the configuration of the means 16, the front decorative movable body is a decorative movable body capable of emitting light. Thereby, the front decoration movable body not only moves between the first arrangement state and the second arrangement state, but can also emit light, so that the player notices the front decoration movable body by the light emission and attracts attention. It is possible to entertain the movement of the front decorative movable body and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Means 17: In the configuration of any one of means 8 to 16, “the first decorative movable body has an external shape in which a portion above the upper jaw in the face of the predetermined character is three-dimensionally shaped, and the second The decorative movable body can be assumed to have an external shape in which the lower jaw part of the face of the predetermined character is three-dimensionally shaped.

  Here, the “predetermined character” is an anthropomorphic of characters, animals, plants, tools (including vehicles), etc. for novels, comics, movies, theaters, etc., or created for this game machine Anthropomorphized virtual person, animal, plant, or tool (including vehicle).

  According to the configuration of the means 17, the first decorative movable body is an upper part from the upper jaw of the predetermined character, and the second decorative movable body is the lower jaw part of the predetermined character. Thereby, the face of the predetermined character is expressed by the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are expressed by the first drive unit and the second drive unit. Are moved in the same direction, the face of the predetermined character moves up and down, allowing the face of the predetermined character to freely appear and disappear, and the appearance of the face of the predetermined character has an impact on the player Can be more interesting.

  In addition, by moving the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body closer to or away from each other by the first drive unit and the second drive unit, the mouth of the predetermined character is closed or opened, It is possible to entertain the player by the movement of the mouth of the predetermined character and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Means 18: In the configuration of means 17, "the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body move relative to each other in a direction approaching or separating from each other by the first drive unit and the second drive unit". can do.

  According to the configuration of the means 18, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are moved closer to or away from each other by the first drive unit and the second drive unit. Thereby, it is possible to make the mouth of the predetermined character close and open, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained by the movement.

  Also, by moving the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body, the mouth of the predetermined character performs a movement, so if a predetermined voice or music is output in accordance with the movement, It is possible to produce a high-impact performance as if a predetermined character is speaking or singing, entertaining the player, and enhancing the interest.

  Furthermore, effects such as a design that is sandwiched between the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body as viewed from the player on the effect display means arranged behind the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body May be displayed, and the size and shape of the displayed symbol or the like may be changed in accordance with the movement of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body. That is, it is possible to produce an effect in which the symbol displayed on the effect display means is bitten or eaten by the mouth of the predetermined character expressed by the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body. , Entertaining the player and enhancing the interest.

  Further, by placing the front decorative movable body in a substantially vertical second arrangement state, or between the first decorative movable body and the first drive unit or (and) between the second decorative movable body and the second drive unit. By blocking the screen and making it difficult to see the connecting portion, it is possible to perform a novel effect as if the face of the predetermined character is floating in the air, entertaining the player and enhancing the interest.

Means 19: In any one of the structures of means 8 to 18, “the first drive unit and the second drive unit are
A guide member extending in the vertical direction;
A guided member that is guided and guided by the guide member and cantilever-holds the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body;
Moving means for reciprocating the guided member in a state guided and guided by the guiding member;
The moving means and at least the guide member are supported, and a base having a mounting contact surface on the upper side for mounting and fixing to the game board is provided.
It is characterized by being.

  Here, the “guide member” may be any member that can guide the guided member in a predetermined direction, such as “a cross-sectional shape that is circular or polygonal and continuously extending in a predetermined direction”, “a cross-sectional shape that is circular. A shape or a polygonal shape that extends discontinuously in a predetermined direction (arranged at a predetermined interval) ”, and the like. Examples of the “guidance guidance” include guidance guided when the guiding member and the guided member slide relative to each other, guidance guided when one of them rolls, and the like. Examples of the material of the “induction member” include “resin”, “metal”, “ceramics”, “composite material such as glass fiber reinforced resin and carbon fiber reinforced resin”, and the like.

  Further, as the “moving means”, “having a pulley including a sprocket arranged away from the extending direction of the guide member and a belt including a chain wound around the pulley, and moves together with the belt by the rotation of the pulley. "A thing to be moved", "A screw member extending in the extending direction of the guide member and a nut member screwed to the screw member and moved by rotating the screw member and the nut member relative to each other", "Guide Examples thereof include a solenoid having a plunger that moves forward and backward in the extending direction of the member, or a cylinder that has a piston, and a “moving by a linear motor that extends in the extending direction of the guiding member”. When a belt or chain is used as the moving means, the moving speed can be increased and the impact can be increased. Further, when a screw member or the like is used as the moving means, the positioning accuracy is high and a delicate movement can be performed.

  Furthermore, examples of the “base” material include “resin”, “metal”, “ceramics”, “composite material such as glass fiber reinforced resin and carbon fiber reinforced resin”, and the like. Note that the rigidity of the material used for the base is desirably higher than the rigidity of the material used for the first support member and the second support member. In addition, when the material is a metal, “a material using a plate material having a predetermined thickness”, “a material obtained by bending a plate material having a predetermined thickness into a predetermined shape”, “a mold material having a predetermined cross-sectional shape is used. Thing ", etc. are mentioned. In addition, when a sheet material (for example, sheet metal) is bent as the base, the base can be made to have a higher rigidity by a bent portion than a single plate base, and can be manufactured at a low cost.

  By the way, when a base for supporting a moving means for moving a decorative movable body, a guide member, or the like is attached to a game board, in general, in order to increase the attachment strength, While making it contact | abut with a base, it was trying to attach a base using a screw etc. in more positions. However, for example, the surface of the game board and the base may not match due to differences in dimensional tolerances or processing errors of the game board or base, and if the base is attached and fixed to the game board in that state, the base or game board will be There is a possibility that a problem may occur due to distortion or rattling and a decrease in mounting strength.

  In addition, there are various possible positions for the mounting contact surface on the base, but when the mounting contact surface is disposed on either the left or right side of the base, the mounting contact surface that is mounted on the game board. The center of gravity of the base is placed at a position that is greatly decentered in the left and right directions, and the mounting contact surface and screws for mounting are not only subject to the weight applied to the base but also to the rotational moment due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity. There is a problem in that a screw or the like cannot endure due to the force and the base cannot be fixed, or the base (mounting contact surface) is deformed to cause a problem.

  Further, when the mounting contact surface is arranged below the base, for example, a lateral force acts on the surface of the game board due to the transfer of the gaming machine and the center of gravity of the base from the vertical line of the mounting contact surface. If it is shifted to either the left or right side, a rotational moment acting to rotate the base around the mounting contact surface due to the weight applied to the base acts, and the base cannot be fixed satisfactorily as described above. There is a problem that a problem occurs due to deformation.

  According to the configuration of the means 19, the first drive unit and the second drive unit are cantilevered by the guide member extending in the vertical direction and guided and guided by the guide member. It includes a guided member, a moving means for moving the guided member, and a base provided with a mounting contact surface on the upper side for supporting and fixing the moving means, the guided member, etc. to the game board. .

  Accordingly, the moving means and the guide member are supported by the base, and the mounting contact surface for mounting and fixing the base to the game board is provided, and the entire base is not in contact with the game board but the mounting contact surface. The base is attached and fixed to the game board by touching only the base, preventing the base from being distorted, rattling, or the strength of the attachment from being reduced, so that the base is more firmly attached to the game board. Can be fixed.

  Then, the moving means, the guide member, and the like are attached and fixed to the game board via this base, and they can be firmly fixed, so that the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are attached by the guide member. It can be surely guided and guided in the up-down direction, and the movement of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be enjoyed to enhance the excitement.

  In addition, since the guide member is firmly fixed to the game board via the base, even if the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body is enlarged or moved at a high speed, it may be wobbled or distorted. The first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be made to have a stronger impact, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be more effective. As such, it can be more interesting.

  In addition, the mounting contact surface disposed on the upper side of the base is fixed to the game board, that is, the mounting is fixed only on one side of the base. Only one side (upper side) is required, and the labor required for mounting can be simplified.

  Further, since the position of the mounting contact surface of the base is on the upper side of the base, the force in the left-right direction acts on the surface of the game board, and the center of gravity of the base from the vertical line of the mounting contact surface is either left or right Even if it is displaced, the rotational moment applied to the center of gravity acts to return the center of gravity of the base to the vertical line of the mounting contact surface, and the base returns to its original position. The force other than the weight applied to the base can be prevented from acting, the base can be mounted and fixed satisfactorily, and the base can be prevented from being deformed to cause a malfunction.

  In addition, since the base supporting the guide member, the moving means, etc. can be firmly attached and fixed to the game board, the base does not shake, and even if the effect display means is arranged adjacent to the base, the base or base The first supported movable body and the second decorated movable body can be prevented from being damaged by the member supported by the effect display means being damaged or being unable to move the first decorated movable body or the second decorated movable body. Can be moved favorably, and an effect display means can be favorably provided.

  Furthermore, since only the mounting contact surface that is a part of the entire length of the base is in contact with the game board and fixed, even if there is a dimensional error of the game board or base, etc. It is possible to reduce the effects of errors as much as possible, and even if the base is attached and fixed to the game board, it is possible to prevent problems such as distortion from occurring, and the base is attached to the game board well. be able to. Therefore, even if the base supporting the guide member becomes long by increasing the length of the guide member that guides and guides the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body, the base is satisfactorily attached and fixed to the game board. Therefore, it is possible to increase the length of the guide member so that the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body move greatly. Can be easily recognized, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by the effect operation.

  In addition, it is desirable that “a mounting hole for inserting a screw is formed in the upper part of the mounting contact surface of the base”, so that the base can be attached to the game board with the screw through the mounting hole, By mounting and fixing with screws at the upper part of the contact surface, it is possible to make the rotational moment applied to the screw and the mounting contact surface as difficult as possible for the same reason as described above, and the base is attached to the game board well. Can be fixed. Note that the smaller the number of mounting holes, that is, the number of screws for mounting, can simplify the mounting effort, and if the mounting holes are arranged close to the vertical line of the center of gravity of the base, the mounting holes Can be as small as possible (for example, one or two).

Means 20: In the constitution of means 19, "The moving means is
A driving pulley disposed on the upper side, and a driven pulley disposed on the lower side;
A drive belt wound around the drive pulley and the driven pulley and to which the guided member is fixed;
And a rotation driving means for rotating the driving pulley in order to drive the driving belt ”.

  Here, “the driving pulley, the driven pulley, and the driving belt” are “the driving belt is a flat belt and the driving pulley and the driven pulley are flat pulleys”, “the driving belt is a toothed belt, "The driven pulley is a toothed pulley that engages with the teeth of the driving belt", "The driving belt is a toothed belt, the driving pulley is a toothed pulley that engages with the teeth of the driving belt, and the driven pulley is a flat pulley. And the like ".

  Further, examples of the “rotation drive means” include “electric motor”, “pneumatic actuator”, etc., and the drive pulley may be directly driven to rotate by the rotation drive means, or indirectly through the transmission gear. Alternatively, the drive pulley may be rotationally driven. In addition, when the drive pulley is driven to rotate indirectly, the position of the rotation drive means and the position of the drive pulley can be different from each other. It is possible to arrange and drive the drive pulley indirectly from there, and the degree of freedom of arrangement can be further increased.

  By the way, as a moving means for moving the guided member guided and guided by the guiding member, various methods are conceivable. For example, a long screw member extending in a predetermined direction and a screw member are screwed together. In the case where the nut member (movable member) and the rotation driving means for rotating the screw member are configured, the nut member can be moved in the extending direction of the screw member by rotating the screw member. However, when the nut member, that is, the decorative movable body is moved by the rotation of the screw member, the moving speed of the decorative movable body is slower than the rotational speed of the screw member, and the decorative movable body has a slow performance operation. Therefore, it was difficult to make a strong impression on the player, and it was not possible to expect an effect that could enhance interest.

  It is also conceivable to use a solenoid or a cylinder that can move the decorative movable body faster than the case of using a screw member as the moving means. However, when a solenoid or cylinder is used, the decorative movable body is moved by moving the plunger or piston rod housed in the solenoid or cylinder, so that a large space is required for installing the solenoid or cylinder. In a gaming machine with a limited installation space, there is a problem that it is difficult to install a solenoid or a cylinder depending on the amount of movement of the decorative movable body.

  Furthermore, when the guided member (the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body) is moved in the vertical direction, either one of the drive pulley and the driven pulley is disposed on the upper side, and the other is disposed on the lower side. However, when the driven pulley is arranged on the upper side and the driving pulley is arranged on the lower side, the driving belt moves downward, that is, the driving pulley due to the weight of the guided member fixed to the driving belt. The belt is pulled to the side, and the driving force of the driving belt on the driving pulley is weakened. The driving belt and the driving pulley become slippery, so that the driving belt cannot be driven sufficiently or fixed to the driving belt. There is a risk that the guided member that has been moved down. Therefore, it is conceivable that the driving pulley and the driven pulley are separated from each other by the urging means, and the winding force of the driving belt on the driving pulley is strengthened to make it difficult to slip. In this case, the urging force of the urging means is strong. In order to cope with the urging force, it is necessary to increase the strength of the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the drive belt, and the support member that supports them, and the size becomes large or expensive. Problems occur.

  According to the structure of the means 20, the moving means is separated from the extending direction of the guide member in the same direction as the driving pulley disposed on the upper side, the driven pulley disposed on the lower side, and the driven pulley fixed to the guided member. And a driven belt wound around the driven pulley, and a rotational driving means for rotationally driving the driving pulley.

  As a result, when the drive pulley is rotated by the rotation drive means, the drive belt rotates, and the decorative movable body moves through the guided member together with the drive belt. Therefore, as compared with the case of using a moving means such as a screw member. The moving speed of the guided member that holds the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be moved faster, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body that move quickly impress the player strongly. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the stage operation while paying attention to the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

  In particular, in the case where the mouth of the predetermined character is opened and closed by the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body, the movement of the mouth of the predetermined character to be packed can be made faster, so that it is tighter. It is possible to increase the player's feeling of tension by making it feel, and to expect an effect that can be attracted to the game more strongly and nailed to the game.

  Further, since the decorative movable body is moved through the guided member by driving the drive belt, the same movement amount can be further reduced as compared with the case of moving using a solenoid or a cylinder. It can be easily installed on the gaming machine and can be installed on the gaming machine even if the amount of movement of the decorative movable body is increased, so that the decorative movable body can be moved more greatly. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize the effect operation of the decorative movable body, and to prevent the interest from being lowered by the effect operation.

  Furthermore, since the guided member is guided and guided by the guiding member, the guided member can be guided and guided straight by the guiding member even if the guided member is moved using a belt that is easily bent. At this time, the guided member, that is, the decorative movable body can be favorably moved in a desired posture.

  In addition, the drive pulley is disposed on the upper side and the driven pulley is disposed on the lower side, so that the drive belt is pulled downward, that is, in a direction away from the drive pulley due to the weight of the fixed guided member or the like. The force applied to the drive pulley increases the force applied to the drive pulley, and the friction force between the drive pulley and the drive belt increases, making it difficult to slip each other. The drive belt can be driven, the drive pulley and the drive belt can be prevented from slipping and the guided member can be prevented from descending, and a desired movement can be caused to move the decorative movable body via the guided member. It is possible to enhance the interest by making the decorative movable body perform a predetermined production operation.

  Furthermore, since the wrapping force of the drive belt around the drive pulley becomes stronger due to the weight of the guided member, etc., it is not necessary to make the urging means stronger than necessary, so that the drive pulley, the driven pulley, It is not necessary to unnecessarily increase the strength of the drive belt, the support member that supports them, and the like, and it is possible to suppress the increase in size and cost.

  It is desirable that a predetermined tension (tension) is applied to the drive belt, whereby the winding force of the drive belt around the drive pulley can be in a good state, and the drive pulley and the drive belt It is possible to prevent the occurrence of slippage between the two and to drive the drive belt to rotate favorably. As a method for applying tension to the drive belt, for example, “the drive pulley and the driven pulley are moved relative to each other, and one of the pulleys is moved away from the other pulley by the urging means. Energizing the drive belt by urging ”,“ After making the drive pulley and the driven pulley move relative to each other, move the drive pulley and the driven pulley relative to each other, Applying tension to the drive belts wound around these pulleys, and fixing the positions of these pulleys in that state "," After winding the drive belt on the drive pulley and driven pulley with fixed positions " , And the like, in which tension is applied to the drive belt by pressing the drive belt with a predetermined urging force from the inner peripheral side or the outer peripheral side of the drive belt.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of this means, in the case of a biasing means for biasing the driven pulley downward, or a drive belt or drive pulley further provided with engagement teeth or engaged teeth, Since the biasing force of the biasing means acts in addition to the weight from the guided member or the like, it can be pulled further downward to further increase the winding force of the driving belt around the driving pulley, and the engagement teeth The engaging force of the engaged teeth can be further increased, and slipping between the driving pulley and the driving belt can be further prevented.

  In addition, a drive pulley of the moving means is disposed on the same upper side as the side on which the mounting contact surface of the base for mounting and fixing to the game board is disposed. In other words, the rotational drive means for rotationally driving the drive pulley is supported on the upper side of the base close to the attachment contact surface, so that the attachment application is performed at a position as close as possible to the rotational drive means that is a source of vibration and reaction force. Each member such as a guide member supported by the base by vibration of the base is able to prevent the vibration from the rotation driving means from being transmitted to the entire base and is fixed to the game board via the contact surface. It is possible to prevent the guided means from being able to be guided and guided satisfactorily due to vibration, contact with other members and being damaged, or loose assembly of the members.

  Furthermore, since the rotation drive means is supported at a position close to the mounting contact surface, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of vibration even if the rotation drive means is driven, so that the game board vibrates via the base. Can be prevented from being affected by the vibration of the rotation drive means, and the game media, various winning devices, and game media payout devices, etc. that are driven into the game area can be prevented. Can be.

Means 21: In the configuration of means 20, "the moving means is
A plurality of engaging teeth formed on the inner periphery of the drive belt;
It further includes a plurality of engaged teeth that are engaged with the engaging teeth and formed on the outer periphery of the driving pulley.

  In the configuration of the means 21, the drive belt is a toothed belt in which engagement teeth are formed, and the drive pulley is a toothed pulley in which engaged teeth that engage with the engagement teeth are formed. As a result, the drive belt is wound around the drive pulley, the engaging teeth and the engaged teeth are engaged with each other, and the drive belt can be made difficult to slide on the outer peripheral surface of the drive pulley. The rotational drive can be reliably transmitted to the drive belt.

  In addition, the engagement between the engagement teeth and the engaged teeth ensures that the rotation of the drive pulley is transmitted to the drive belt. Even if the rotation speed of the drive pulley is increased, the drive pulley and the drive belt Therefore, the driving belt can be driven at a higher speed, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be moved at a higher speed via the guided member. It is possible to enhance the interest by making a more impactful movement.

Means 22: In the structure of means 20 or means 21, “the moving means is
The driving belt further includes urging means for urging the driven pulley in a direction away from the driving pulley while being wound around the driving pulley and the driven pulley. And

  Here, examples of the “biasing means” include “coil spring”, “plate spring”, “rubber”, and the like. In addition, as a position which arrange | positions a biasing means, the position between a drive pulley and a driven pulley may be sufficient, and the position on the opposite side to a drive pulley with respect to a driven pulley may be sufficient.

  By the way, conventionally, a tension mechanism for applying a predetermined tension (tension) to the drive belt is provided so that the drive belt wound around the drive pulley and the driven pulley can be driven to rotate favorably. There are various forms of the tension mechanism. For example, “a tension is applied to the drive belt by pressing the drive belt with a predetermined urging force from the inside or the outside at a position between the drive pulley and the driven pulley. When the `` thing '' is used, a tension mechanism must be provided between the driving pulley and the driven pulley, the tension mechanism obstructs the movement of the guided member, and it cannot be moved, or the direction in which the driving belt extends On the other hand, a mechanism for applying an urging force in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction is required, so that the size in the direction perpendicular to the surface becomes large, and there is a problem in that it cannot be installed due to its overall size.

  According to the structure of the means 22, the urging means for urging the driven pulley away from the drive pulley is provided. That is, an urging means for applying a predetermined tension to the drive belt is provided. Thereby, the tension of the driving belt wound around the driving pulley and the driven pulley can be made appropriate, and the driving belt can be driven to rotate favorably.

  Also, as the tension mechanism, the drive pulley and the driven pulley are urged away from each other, so the drive belt is urged from the inside or outside of the drive belt to the opposite side between the drive pulley and the driven pulley. Compared to what to do, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the drive belt extends, and since no tension mechanism is provided at a position between the drive pulley and the driven pulley, The guided member can be favorably moved without disturbing the movement of the guided member.

  In addition, as a position which arrange | positions a biasing means, the position between a drive pulley and a driven pulley may be sufficient, and the position on the opposite side to a drive pulley with respect to a driven pulley may be sufficient.

Means 23: In the configuration of means 22, “the moving means is
A hook-shaped locking portion that locks a shaft portion that opens in a direction away from the drive pulley with respect to the driven pulley and protrudes from both sides of the driven pulley; and a guide hole into which the guide member is inserted and fitted. A moving body that is guided and guided by the guide member and that rotatably holds the driven pulley;
The urging means has one end supported between the guide hole and the locking portion in the movable body and the other end supported by the base.

  Here, as the tension mechanism, “a mechanism that applies a predetermined tension to the drive belt wound around the drive pulley and the driven pulley by moving the drive pulley and the driven pulley relative to each other in a direction away from each other” is used. In this case, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the drive belt extends. However, the drive pulley and the driven pulley can be moved relative to the direction in which the drive pulley and the driven pulley are arranged, and the drive pulley and the driven pulley are relatively moved by a support member that rotatably supports the drive pulley and the driven pulley, thereby applying tension to the drive belt. In addition to the tension mechanism to be actuated, a guiding member for guiding and guiding the guided member is arranged, so that the decorative movable body that is relatively large and is held on the guided member relatively increases in size as a whole. There is a problem that the size of the guided member, that is, the moving amount of the decorative movable body is reduced.

  Various positions are conceivable as the position where the urging force is applied by the urging means, and the conventional tension mechanism is arranged so as to act along the axis passing through the rotation centers of the driving pulley and the driven pulley. It was. However, the driven pulley is guided and slid by a guide member arranged substantially parallel to the axis passing through the rotation center of the drive pulley and the driven pulley, and then on the axis passing through the rotation center of the drive pulley and the driven pulley. When the urging force is applied along the axis, the driven pulley is guided and guided by the guiding member via the moving body at a position eccentric from the axis, so that the urging force of the urging means is applied to the guiding member. The moving body will tilt. On the other hand, when an urging force is applied along the axis of the guide member, the reaction force from the drive belt caused by the urging force of the urging means is deviated from the axis of the guide member. It will be on an axis passing through the center of rotation, and the moving body will be inclined with respect to the guide member by the reaction force. As described above, when the moving body is inclined with respect to the guide member, the moving body may not be guided and guided well.

  According to the configuration of the means 23, the hook 23 includes a hook-shaped locking portion that is open on the side opposite to the driving pulley and locks the shaft portion of the driven pulley, and a guide hole that is inserted and fitted into the guide member. A moving body to which one end of the urging means is connected, and the other end of the urging means is connected to the base so that the urging force of the urging means is applied to the drive belt via the moving body. It is a thing.

  As a result, the moving body for applying tension to the drive belt is guided and guided by the guide member to which the guided member is guided and guided, so the moving body is separated in the direction in which the drive pulley and the driven pulley are separated. It is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism for moving, and the entire apparatus can be simplified, and the overall increase in size can be suppressed. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the overall size from being increased, it is possible to relatively increase the size of the decorative movable body or increase the amount of movement, and to easily recognize the rendering operation of the decorative movable body. Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by the production operation.

  In addition, since the urging force of the urging means acts between the guide portion guided and guided by the guide member in the moving body and the locking portion that holds the driven pulley, this causes the moving body to be applied. The urging force of the urging means is applied substantially evenly on the guiding member side and the driven pulley side, so that the moving body can be prevented from being tilted with respect to the guiding member, and the guiding member can guide the moving body satisfactorily. Can be made.

  In addition, since the moving body can be guided and guided well by the guiding means, a predetermined tension can be favorably applied to the driving belt by the urging force of the urging means, whereby the driving pulley and the driven pulley can be applied. By appropriately adjusting the tension of the drive belt to be wound, the drive belt can be driven to rotate favorably.

  Furthermore, the driven pulley and the drive belt can be easily assembled and the urging force is applied to the drive belt simply by locking the shaft portion to the locking portion while the drive belt is wound around the driven pulley. be able to. More specifically, once the moving body is moved to the driving pulley side against the urging force of the urging means, the shaft portion of the driven pulley around which the driving belt is wound is inserted from the opened side of the moving body. Then, by applying the urging force of the urging means to the moving body, the moving body is urged by the urging means in a direction in which the drive pulley and the driven pulley are separated from each other, and the driven pulley is wound around. Since the drive belt restricts the movement of the drive pulley and the driven pulley in a direction away from each other, the shaft portion of the driven pulley is not detached from the locking portion of the moving body, and the shaft portion of the driven pulley can be satisfactorily locked. can do.

  Further, since the other end of the urging means is directly supported by the base made of sheet metal, even if the urging force of the urging means is strong, the urging means can be surely supported and is applied to the drive belt by the urging means. Tension can be made favorable.

Means 24: In any one of the means 19 to 23, "at least one of the first drive unit and the second drive unit is
A support shaft that cantileverably holds the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body on the guided member;
And a rotation means for rotating the support shaft around the axis thereof ”.

  Here, as "rotating means", "the one that rotates by the rotation of the motor", "the one that rotates by moving the solenoid plunger back and forth", "the one that rotates by moving the piston of the cylinder back and forth" And the like. In addition, it is good also as what rotates directly by drive parts, such as a motor, a cylinder, and a piston, and even if the drive of a drive part rotates indirectly via transmission means, such as a gear and a link mechanism. good.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, since the movement of the decorative movable body is only a movement in the vertical direction or only the movement rotating in the front-rear direction, the movement direction is one direction. The movement becomes a simple movement, and by getting used to the production by the movement of the decorative movable body, some players may get bored with the movement of the decorative movable body and reduce the interest in the game.

  According to the configuration of the means 24, at least one of the first drive unit and the second drive unit is a support shaft that cantileverly supports the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body and is rotatably supported by the guided member. And rotating means for rotating the support shaft.

  Accordingly, the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body can be rotated around the axis of the support shaft, so that the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body is supported not only in the vertical direction but also in the support shaft. The movement of the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body can be made more complex, and it can be interesting by making the movement more highly effective. Can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are cantilevered by the support shaft, for example, the first drive unit and the second drive unit are arranged at the ends of the game board (the left and right outer sides of the effect display means). ) And the movable decoration supported by the support shaft can be moved in the vertical direction at the approximate center of the game board (the front side of the effect display means). It becomes possible to arrange the movable body in a more conspicuous position, and the production effect can be further enhanced.

  Note that both the first drive unit and the second drive unit may be provided with a rotating means. For example, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body represent the mouth of a predetermined character. Since the support shaft extends in a substantially horizontal direction along the game board, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are respectively supported by regarding the axis of the support shaft as the axis of the temporomandibular joint of the predetermined character. When the shaft is rotated around the shaft axis, the opening / closing operation of the mouth of the predetermined character becomes a more realistic operation, and the appealing power to the player is strengthened, which can be more enjoyed.

Means 25: In the structure of means 21, "the rotating means is
The first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body is disposed at a position opposite to the side held by the guided member via the support shaft, and moves forward and backward in a predetermined direction. A solenoid having a plunger;
And a transmission means for converting the linear motion of the solenoid caused by the advancement and retraction of the plunger into a rotational motion and transmitting the support shaft so as to rotate about the axis thereof.

  Here, as the “transmission means”, “the base end is fixed to the support member and the distal end is connected to the plunger, so that the linear motion of the plunger is converted and the support member is rotated and transmitted”, “Using a crank mechanism, the linear motion of the plunger is converted and transmitted to rotate the support member”, and the like.

  By the way, when a motor is used as a drive source for rotating the support shaft, a small motor such as that provided in the guided member generally has a small rotational torque, and the support shaft is rotated together with the decorative movable body by the rotation shaft of the motor. It is difficult to move, and the support shaft is rotated by increasing the torque by reducing the rotation speed through a plurality of gears. However, since the rotation speed is decreased, the movement of the decorative movable body is reduced. As it slowed down, the response of the movement slowed down, and it was difficult to make a fast movement that had an impact and increased interest.

  Further, when the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are cantilevered via the support shaft, the guided member holds the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body via the support shaft. A large load is applied to the side, and uneven wear occurs due to uneven friction between the sliding member held by the guided member and the guiding member, and the guided member guided and guided by the guiding member smoothly guides. There is a risk that the movement will be awkward and it may become impossible to guide and guide.

  According to the configuration of the means 25, the rotating means includes a solenoid having a plunger that advances and retreats, and a transmission means that transmits the support shaft by the advance and retreat of the plunger, and the rotating means is the first decoration of the guided member. The side on which the movable body or the second decorative movable body is held is arranged on the opposite side across the guide member.

  Thus, the rotating means for rotating the support shaft is arranged on the opposite side of the guided member from the side on which the decorative movable body is held, and the guided member sandwiches the guiding member. Thus, the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body is held on one side and the rotating means is held on the other side, and a predetermined load is applied to both sides of the guide member. The uneven load applied to the guided member is alleviated, the occurrence of uneven wear between the guided member and the guiding member is suppressed, and the guided member guided and guided to the guiding member is smoothly guided by the uneven load. It can be prevented that the movement becomes awkward and the guidance cannot be performed.

  In addition, the rotation means includes a solenoid having a plunger that moves forward and backward, and a transmission means that converts the linear motion of the plunger in the solenoid into a rotational motion and rotates the support shaft around the axis, Since the solenoid is used as the source, it is possible to make quick movement with good response compared to the case of using the motor, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can perform a strong impacting operation. Can be fun and interesting.

  Further, when the decorative movable body is directly rotated by the solenoid plunger, the solenoid itself must be changed in order to change the rotation amount, and the design cannot be easily changed and the design freedom is low. There's a problem. However, in this means, since the support shaft is rotated by the rotation means, the rotation amount of the support shaft can be easily changed with respect to the advance / retreat amount of the plunger by the rotation means. It is possible to increase the degree of movement, and to make the decoration movable body move more interesting.

  By the way, in general, in a solenoid having a plunger that advances and retreats, the plunger is urged in a predetermined direction by the elastic force of the spring. It moves forward and backward in the direction opposite to the direction of force. For this reason, when the forward / backward direction of the plunger in the solenoid is set to the vertical direction, gravity applied to the plunger acts on the plunger in addition to the biasing force of the spring. If the force becomes weaker or stronger, for example, if the urging force becomes weaker, there is a possibility that the plunger does not move sufficiently and is not positioned at a predetermined position when the solenoid is not energized. Further, when the urging force becomes strong, there are problems that the plunger does not move sufficiently even when the solenoid is energized, or that a large amount of power is required. As a result, the advancement / retraction of the plunger becomes insufficient, and the movement of the decorative movable body becomes insufficient, making it difficult to perform a desired movement, and there is a possibility that the effect of the movement cannot be obtained.

  Therefore, the rotating means is “a solenoid arranged so that the plunger advances and retreats in a substantially horizontal direction, and a transmission member connected to the plunger with the base end fixed to the support shaft and the tip extending in either the vertical direction. It is also possible to make the plunger forward and backward directions substantially horizontal, thereby reducing the influence of gravity on the plunger forward and backward as much as possible. By making the advance and retreat reliably, it becomes possible to move the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body with certainty and to perform the desired production operation, and to fully demonstrate the production effect by the movement, It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, since the transmission means is a transmission member whose base end is fixed to the support shaft and whose distal end extends in any of the vertical directions and is connected to the plunger, the linear movement of the plunger is supported by the simple configuration of the transmission shaft. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost for realizing the transmission means. The direction in which the transmission member is extended is preferably extended so that the transmission member connected to the plunger is substantially perpendicular to the horizontal direction when the plunger moves forward and backward at a substantially intermediate position. . Thereby, even if the amount of forward / backward movement of the plunger is the same, the support shaft can be rotated more greatly.

  On the other hand, in the case of a solenoid having a plunger that moves forward and backward, the size of the plunger is generally larger than the dimension in the forward / backward direction of the plunger and the dimension perpendicular to the forward / backward direction of the plunger. The dimensions are large. For this reason, when the solenoid is arranged so that the advance / retreat direction of the plunger is substantially horizontal and the extension direction of the support shaft is substantially horizontal, the extension of the support shaft is assumed to be the same direction as the support shaft. The size of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body supported by the support shaft when the exit direction becomes longer as a whole, or the overlap between the support shaft and the solenoid becomes large, so that the game machine is equipped. Becomes relatively small, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body become inconspicuous, there is a possibility that the effect of reducing the impact and enhancing the interest cannot be expected. Further, if the plunger is advanced and retracted in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the support shaft, the dimension of the support shaft in the direction perpendicular to the axis becomes large, and there is a problem that it is easy to buffer with other members.

  Therefore, the rotating means is defined as “a solenoid arranged so that the plunger advances and retreats substantially vertically and a predetermined length extending in a substantially horizontal direction and in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the support shaft, and between the one end and the other end of the solenoid. Connected to the plunger, one end is rotatably supported at a position opposite to the support shaft across the connection with the plunger, and the other end is located at a position opposite to the connection with the plunger across the support shaft A distal end is rotatably supported on the other end of the first flange member and the first flange member, and a base end is fixed to the support shaft so as to be integrally rotatable, and is shorter than the first flange member. It is also possible to provide a transmission means composed of a second flange member, which can increase the overall length of the support shaft in the extending direction, or increase the overlap between the support shaft and the solenoid. do it, The size of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body supported by the support shaft when preparing for the technical machine is relatively small, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are less noticeable. The first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be enlarged as much as possible, and the impact of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be increased to enhance interest. Can be expected. In addition, since it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension of the support shaft in the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is possible to make it difficult to buffer with other members, and it is possible to easily provide a gaming machine. The advance / retreat of the plunger may be advanced / retracted from the upper part of the solenoid or may be advanced / retreated from the lower part of the solenoid, and can be selected as appropriate. In addition, the amount of movement of the other end of the first rod member increases with respect to the amount of advancement and retreat of the plunger, and the length of the second rod member is greater than the length from the other end of the first rod member to the connection portion with the plunger. Because it is a short length, the rotation around the axis of the support shaft can be further rotated through the second flange member, and by increasing the movement of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body, You can make the movement that is interesting. Furthermore, since the plunger and the support shaft are disposed between one end and the other end of the first rod member, the second rod member connecting the other end of the first rod member and the support shaft is outside the first rod member. Therefore, the entire transmission means can be reduced in size, and the transmission means can be easily provided.

  The relationship between the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body and the support shaft is as follows: “The first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are supported at a position eccentric by the support shaft, and the first decorative movable body. The gravity of the movable body and the second decorative movable body may bias the solenoid plunger through the support shaft and the transmission means in the direction opposite to the direction in which the solenoid moves by energizing the solenoid. Thus, when the solenoid is de-energized, the plunger is biased in the direction opposite to the direction in which the plunger moves by energization due to the gravity applied to the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body, and automatically moves forward or forward to the moving end. When retreating, that is, when power is not supplied, the plunger can be automatically returned. Even when an elastic member such as a spring for returning is provided as in the case of a conventional solenoid, it can be returned sufficiently even if its elastic force is weak, so it is necessary to use an expensive elastic member having a strong elastic force. It is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Means 26: In any one of the means 19 to means 25, “the first drive unit and the second drive unit are
The first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body further include a rotation preventing means for preventing the first decorative movable body from rotating about the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  Here, as the “rotation preventing means”, “the guide member arranged substantially parallel to the extending direction of the guide member and the movement of the guide member guided by the guide member in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the guide member are restricted. Of the first drive unit and the second drive unit of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body that are cantilevered and supported by the first drive unit and the second drive unit. What prevents rotation by supporting the opposite side ".

  By the way, the decorative movable body in the conventional gaming machine has, for example, a linear rack gear, and the decorative movable body moves in the extending direction of the rack gear by rotating a pinion gear meshing with the rack gear by a motor. ing. The rack gear is guided with a predetermined play so as to move in the extending direction, and the decorative movable body can swing by the amount of play. Therefore, if the size of the decorative movable body is relatively small, even if the decorative movable body shakes, it is difficult to understand the shaking, but if the decorative movable body is enlarged, the overall movement of the decorative movable body will be noticeable, The motion of the decorative movable body may be impaired due to the shaking not being performed, and the desired rendering effect may not be exhibited, and the base end portion is separated from the base end portion even if the base end portion to be guided is small. The vibration at the tip becomes large, and the decorative movable body (the first decorative movable body, the second decorative movable body) comes into contact with other members such as the effect display device or the front decorative movable body, causing problems such as damage. May occur.

  Therefore, by reducing the play of the guide portion that guides the decorative movable body so as to move in a predetermined direction, the vibration at the base end portion is reduced as much as possible, and the vibration at the distal end portion of the decorative movable body is reduced. It is conceivable to suppress it. However, in this case, it is necessary to increase the dimensional accuracy of the guide portion, which causes a problem that the processing cost of the guide portion increases and becomes expensive.

  In addition, when the guided member holding the decorative movable body is fixed to the drive belt and moved, the drive belt is generally flexible and easily bent, so that the drive belt suppresses the swing of the decorative movable body. On the contrary, since the drive belt is easily bent, it is easy to vibrate when the drive belt is driven to rotate, and the decorative movable body may be shaken via the guided member due to the vibration of the drive belt.

  According to the configuration of the means 26, the first drive unit and the second drive unit are provided with rotation preventing means for preventing the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body from rotating about the axis extending in the vertical direction. Is.

  As a result, the rotation preventing means can prevent the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body from rotating around the axis extending in the vertical direction. Even if the size is increased, the anti-rotation means prevents the shake from being favorably prevented, so that the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body come into contact with other members such as an effect display device and a front decorative movable body. It is possible to prevent the malfunction of the decorative movable body and other members that are damaged or worn by the contact.

  Further, since the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be prevented from rotating around the axial core extending in the vertical direction by the rotation preventing means, the first decorative movable body can be used as the moving means by the drive belt having a lot of vibration. Even if the movable body or the second decorative movable body is moved, the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body can be well prevented from rotating around the axis in the vertical direction, that is, swinging around the axis. This makes it possible to suppress unintentional shakes and reliably perform a desired production operation, prevent a decrease in interest, and make the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body larger. It becomes possible to make the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body more conspicuous, and the effect of the decorative movable body can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the anti-rotation means is provided, the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body can be moved without increasing the movement accuracy of the first drive unit or the second drive unit. The second decorative movable body can be prevented from shaking, and it is not necessary to increase the processing accuracy of the first drive unit and the second drive unit, and without increasing the cost, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative body It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the movable body from shaking.

Means 27: In the constitution of means 26, “the rotation preventing means is
A guide member that extends in the vertical direction and is arranged substantially parallel to a position away from the guide member by a predetermined distance;
It has a guided member that is controlled by the guide member in a direction substantially perpendicular to its extending direction and is held by the guided member. ''
It is characterized by being.

  Here, as the “guide member”, “a cross-sectional shape is circular or polygonal and extends continuously in a predetermined direction”, “a cross-sectional shape is circular or polygonal and extends discontinuously in a predetermined direction (predetermined Are arranged at intervals of “)” and the like. Examples of the material of the “guide member” include “resin”, “metal”, “ceramics”, “composite material such as glass fiber reinforced resin and carbon fiber reinforced resin”, and the like. On the other hand, “guided members” include “things that are guided by contacting the outer surface of the guide member”, “things that are guided by contacting the inner surface or the recessed portion of the guide member”, “fit with the guide member” What is guided by combining ", etc. are mentioned. Further, the rotation preventing means may support the weight of the guided member.

  According to the configuration of the means 27, the rotation preventing means includes a guide member arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the guide member, and a guided member that is held by the guided member while the movement of the guide member in the direction perpendicular to the axis is restricted. It is composed of

  Thus, the rotation preventing means can prevent the guided member from rotating around the axis of the guiding member, so even if the guided member is moved by a drive belt having a lot of vibration, the guided member It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the held first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body from rotating around the axis of the guide member, that is, swinging around the axis, and suppressing the unintentional shake. It is possible to surely perform the production operation, to prevent the interest from deteriorating, and to make the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body larger, By making the movable body and the second decorative movable body more conspicuous, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body.

  In addition, since the rotation preventing means is provided, the guided member can be prevented from rotating and swinging around the axis of the guiding member without increasing the dimensional accuracy between the guiding member and the guided member. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the processing accuracy of the guide member and the guided member, and it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body from shaking without increasing the cost.

  And a guide member disposed at a position that is substantially parallel to the guide member and spaced apart from the guide member by a guide member, and a guided member that is held by the guide member by restricting movement of the guide member in the direction perpendicular to the axis by the guide member. Since the position of the guide member is fixed with respect to the guided member to be moved, a space for moving the guide member becomes unnecessary as compared with the case where the guide member is held by the guided member. . As a result, the installation space can be reduced as much as possible, so that it is possible to install the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body having a moving amount that can be expected to produce a desired effect in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  The guide member and the guided member as rotation preventing means may be a long member having the same cross section in the guide member, and the U member having a U-shaped cross section sandwiching the guide member. The guide member and the guided member can each have a simple configuration, and the rotation preventing means can be easily realized. Moreover, a general extrusion material, a drawing material, etc. can be used as a guide member, and the cost concerning a guide member etc. can be reduced.

  In addition, the guide member may be a rod-shaped member having a circular cross-sectional outer shape, that is, a column-shaped rod-like member. By this, the guide member is formed into a guide member such as a general round bar or pipe material. Since it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost and the rotation prevention means is provided, the guided member can be a columnar rod-shaped member that is easily rotated around the axis of the guiding member. It is possible to prevent the guided member from rotating (shaking) well. The guide member only needs to have a circular outer shape, and may be a solid member or a hollow member.

  Furthermore, “the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are held by the guided member between the guiding member and the guide member” may be configured so that the guided member is guided by the guiding member and the guide member. Compared to the case where the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are held outside the member, it is possible to suppress an increase in the width in the direction in which the guide member and the guide member are arranged, and as a whole A gaming machine that can be reduced in size and easily provided in a gaming machine and can be more interesting can be obtained. Further, when the guided member is guided and guided not only by the guiding member but also by the guide member, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are held between the guiding member and the guide member, thereby The load applied to the guide member and the guide member from the guide member can be applied substantially evenly, the unbalanced load applied to the guided member and the guide member is reduced, and between the guided member and the guide member and the guide member Suppresses the occurrence of uneven wear due to uneven friction, and the guided member, that is, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are not smoothly guided by the uneven load, and the movement becomes awkward and cannot be guided. Can be prevented.

Means 28: In any one configuration of means 19 to means 27, “the first drive unit and the second drive unit are
A first support member made of a resin that supports one end of the guide member and has a plurality of positioning protrusions;
A second support member that supports the other end of the guide member and is made of a resin having a plurality of positioning protrusions;
The base made of sheet metal has a plurality of positioning holes corresponding to the positioning protrusions of the first support member and the second support member, and by fitting the positioning holes and the positioning protrusions to each other, The first support member and the second support member are positioned and supported at predetermined positions by the base. "
It is characterized by being.

  By the way, it is conceivable to increase the length of the guide member in order to increase the moving distance of the decorative movable body such as the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body. When the both ends of the guide member are supported, the support member that supports both ends of the guide member increases as the length of the guide member increases. For example, if the support members that support both ends of the guide member are integrally molded with resin, the larger the support member, the greater the molding distortion, and the guide member cannot be supported at a desired position, and the decorative movable body is excellent. There is a problem that it becomes impossible to guide to.

  Further, when the support member is enlarged, the mold for forming the support member is also enlarged, and there is a problem that the cost for manufacturing the support member is increased.

  According to the configuration of the means 28, in the first drive unit and the second drive unit, both ends of the guide member are supported by the first support member and the second support member made of resin, and the first support member and the second support member The first and second support members are positioned and supported at predetermined positions by fitting the provided positioning protrusions into positioning holes provided at corresponding positions of the base made of sheet metal. is there.

  Thereby, the magnitude | size of the 1st support member and 2nd support member which consist of resin can be made as small as possible, the distortion by resin molding can be made relatively small, and processing precision (molding precision) Since the first support member and the second support member are positioned and supported at predetermined positions by the base made of a relatively high sheet metal, the support accuracy of the guide member is maintained well even if the member supporting the guide member is enlarged. be able to. That is, even if the guide member is made large (long), the guide member is supported at a desired position, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are guided and guided by the guide member through the guided member. Therefore, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be moved more greatly, and the directing operation of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be easily recognized. It is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by the production operation.

  In addition, since the first support member and the second support member member made of resin that support both ends of the guide member can be made as small as possible, the first support member and the second support member member are formed. The mold can be made small, and an increase in manufacturing costs can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the first support member and the second support member can be easily positioned and supported at a predetermined position separated by a predetermined distance simply by fitting the positioning protrusion into the positioning hole, and the guide member can be easily positioned at a desired position. Placement can be supported.

  In addition, since the base and the guide member are arranged and supported by the first support member and the second support member so as to be substantially parallel to each other, when the base and the guide member are formed using a highly rigid material, they are mutually connected. As a result of the assembly, the overall strength rigidity is further increased, and even if vibration or reaction force is applied due to the movement of the guided member, the guided member or the base does not bend or shake, and the guided member, i.e. One decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be guided and guided satisfactorily. And since the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are guided and guided well and are not easily shaken, interference with the front decorative movable body hardly occurs and the effect of the front decorative movable body is not impaired. It is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by the operation.

  As the “resin”, an appropriate material such as a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin can be used, and examples thereof include “polycarbonate”, “polypropylene”, “polyethylene”, and “polyurethane”. In addition, it is desirable that injection molding be possible.

  The first support member and the second support member preferably each include at least two positioning protrusions, and the positioning protrusions are preferably arranged at positions as far as possible. As a result, the positioning accuracy of the first support member and the second support member in the base can be further increased, and thus the support accuracy of the guide member can be increased.

Means 29: In the constitution of means 28, “the mounting contact surface of the base is
The moving means and the guide member supporting the guide member are bent at a substantially right angle ".

  According to the structure of the means 29, the base is made of a sheet metal having a mounting contact surface bent in a substantially right angle direction with respect to the support surface supporting the moving means and the guide member. Thereby, since the moving means and the guide member are supported in a direction substantially perpendicular to the mounting contact surface, the game board on which the mounting contact surface is fixed and the moving means and the guide member are less likely to interfere with each other. Thus, it is possible to satisfactorily attach and fix to the game board while supporting the moving means and the guide member.

  In addition, since the base can be press-molded, it can be manufactured in a large amount and at a low cost compared to a machined one, and a support surface for supporting the moving means and the guide member, and an attachment contact surface are provided. Since it is bent so as to be substantially at right angles, it becomes possible to make it stronger and rigid than the flat plate material by the bent portion, and the base is moved by the movement of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body. It is possible to prevent deformation and wobbling of the moving means and the guide member, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be reliably guided and guided. In addition, since the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are guided and guided well and wobble is prevented, interference with the front decorative movable body hardly occurs, and the effect of the front decorative movable body is not impaired. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entertainment from being lowered by the production operation.

  Means 30: In the constitution of means 28 or means 29, “one end side and the other end side of the guide member in the rotation preventing means are respectively supported by the first support member and the second support member”. It is characterized by that.

  According to the configuration of the means 30, both ends of the guide member in the rotation preventing means are supported by the first support member and the second support member. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately provide a support member for supporting the guide member, the configuration for supporting the guide member can be simplified, and an increase in cost can be suppressed. Further, since the support accuracy of the guide member can be improved similarly to the guide member, the relationship between the guide member and the guide member (for example, parallelism) even if the guide member is lengthened with the increase in the length of the guide member. The first decorative movable body can be maintained in a good state, the guided member can be prevented from swinging well, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are enlarged to be more conspicuous. And the second decorative movable body can enhance the interest.

  When the guide member is used together with the base and the guide member and has high rigidity, the guide member is supported by the base via the first support member and the second support member, so the synergistic effect of the base, the guide member, and the guide member. This makes it possible to further increase the overall strength rigidity, and even if the guide member is made longer or the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body held by the guide member are enlarged, they are covered by the guide member. The guiding member can be guided and guided satisfactorily, and the moving amount and size of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are increased to make the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body stand out. The production effect can be further enhanced.

  Means 31: In any one of the constitutions of means 16 to 30, “the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are configured as decorative movable bodies capable of emitting light”. To do.

  According to the structure of the means 31, the 1st decoration movable body and the 2nd decoration movable body are made into the decoration movable body which can light-emit. Accordingly, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can not only move in the vertical direction but also emit light, so that the player notices the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body by the light emission. This makes it possible to entertain the movement of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

Means 32: In the constitution of means 31, "the first decorative movable body is
A portion corresponding to the eyes of the predetermined character is provided with a light emitting decoration display means that changes a display mode of light emission.

  Here, “the part corresponding to the eyes” means “the part corresponding to the eyeball”, “the part corresponding to the pupil”, “the part corresponding to the upper and lower eyelids”, “the part corresponding to the glasses and goggles”. , Etc. Further, examples of the “light emitting decoration display means” include “a light emitting display pattern or design that changes”, “a light emitting display pattern or design that changes color”, and the like.

  According to the structure of the means 32, the light emission decoration display means is provided in the part corresponding to the eyes of the predetermined character in the first decoration movable body. As a result, the part corresponding to the eyes of the predetermined character shines or the display mode changes, so that the player can be impressed strongly, and the decoration is enhanced as a high-impact decorative movable body. Can do.

Means 33: In the structure of means 32, “the light emitting decoration display means varies the display mode in accordance with the color of light projected from the light emitting means capable of projecting light of a plurality of types of colors. A segment type optical display device,
By transmitting only the first color light projected from the light emitting means, the first transmitting means exhibiting the first display mode,
It includes at least a second transmission means that exhibits a second display mode by transmitting only light of a second color different from the first color ”.

  Here, the “plurality of colors” may be any (or any) of the three primary colors of red, green, and blue, or any one (or any) of these may be mixed. Intermediate colors may also be used. In addition, the “light emitting means” is not limited to a specific configuration, but “incandescent lamp”, “bulb”, “fluorescent lamp”, “LED”, “neon lamp”, “mercury lamp”, “ A sodium lamp "etc. can be illustrated. Furthermore, the “display mode” may be any pattern / shape / graphic, and may include symbols such as letters, pictures, numbers, and characters.

  “Segment type” refers to a display method in which a predetermined shape is lit and flashed and displayed, and is a “dot matrix type” in which a plurality of dots (dots) are combined and displayed in a matrix. Indicates that it is different from the display method.

  Furthermore, the “first color” and the “second color” are not particularly limited as long as they are different from each other, and may be the three primary colors of light or may be an intermediate color. For example, so-called achromatic colors such as white, black, and gray may be used, and chromatic colors such as red, green, and blue may be used. In addition, since light is expressed using light emitting means, that is, light, all intermediate colors can be expressed by mixing any one (or both) of red, green, and blue. In other words, the “first color” may contain all the light of the “second color” and vice versa, but in short, the “first color” is different from the “second color”. Any correlation may be used. Similarly, the “first display mode” and the “second display mode” are not limited as long as they are different from each other. For example, a pattern or a pattern with completely different shapes may be displayed, or a pattern with the same shape may be displayed at different places.

  The “first transmission means” and the “second transmission means” are not limited as long as they can transmit (filter) only predetermined light. For example, a known color Filters can be applied. Further, the arrangement method of the “first transmission means” and the “second transmission means” is not limited in any way, and may be arranged on the same plane (from the viewpoint of the player). ) The arrangement position may be different in the front-rear direction. Further, they may be arranged independently (that is, without adjacent / overlapping portions), or may be partially or entirely overlapped. In short, as long as two different display modes “first display mode” and “second display mode” can be displayed, any display mode may be used. However, it is preferable that the display mode is such that two or more types of pattern shapes can be clearly identified, instead of differentiating the display mode by simply “turning off” or “lighting” the same pattern shape at the same position. .

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the means 33, there is provided a segment type optical display device in which the display mode changes variously according to the color of the light projected from the light emitting means capable of projecting a plurality of kinds of colors. It is equipped. Thereby, the first decorative movable body can be made more conspicuous, and it can be hard to get bored without giving a monotonous impression to the player, and the player's interest can be prevented from being lowered.

  According to the configuration of this means, the display mode can be changed by simply changing the color of the light emitting means. At this time, the background color of the display mode is the same as the color of the display mode. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the shape of the display mode relatively easily when no light is emitted. Therefore, unlike a conventional decorative lamp that uses a lens member having a desired pattern shape, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a change in display mode, and it is possible to wipe off a monotonous impression very effectively.

  By the way, as an optical display device that can exhibit different display modes only by changing the color type of the light emitting means, for example, an organic EL display device, an inorganic EL display device, a plasma display device, a VFD panel, a field emission display, or a CRT. And the like are known. Similarly, as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) in which the color of light emitting means (so-called backlight) is constant and the light transmittance for each color is changed using a color filter and liquid crystal. Are also known. When these optical display devices are used, the display mode can be changed by changing the color of the light emitting means (pixels), but these devices need to be connected to a relatively large number of power supply devices and signal wirings. In many cases, the apparatus is large and difficult to move. For this reason, the movable range of the first decorative movable body becomes narrow, or the first decorative movable body becomes heavy and the movement becomes slow, so that the first decorative movable body cannot be made sufficiently conspicuous. There was a risk that it would not be possible to prevent a decline in interest.

  On the other hand, in the present invention, since it is a segment type optical display device that can change the display mode only by changing the color of the light emitting means, it is easy to construct it extremely simple and compact. For this reason, since it is satisfactorily attached to the decorative movable body, the movable range of the first decorative movable body is not limited, and it is easy to move quickly, and the first decorative movable body is more effectively conspicuous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

  The light emitting decoration display means of this means may be attached not only to the first decoration movable body, but also to the second decoration movable body or the front decoration movable body, but the first decoration which is a part corresponding to the eyes of a predetermined character. By attaching it only to the decorative movable body, it is possible to create an interesting production effect that changes as the character's eyes change, so it can attract the attention of the player more simply and effectively. It is effective because it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Means 34: In the structure of the means 33, “the light of the first color projected from the light emitting means comprises only one of the three primary colors of light;
The light of the second color projected from the light emitting means is composed of any one of the three primary colors of light other than the first color.

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the means 34, the first color consists of only one of the three primary colors of light, that is, red, green and blue. As a result, the first display mode displayed corresponding to the first color is a single color display by any one of the three primary colors, so the displayed contents (patterns, symbols, etc.) can be grasped intuitively. It is easy to do and is suitable. In addition, it is assumed that the second color light is composed of any one of the three primary colors of light other than the first color. As a result, not only the first display mode but also the second display mode displayed corresponding to the second color is also a single color display by any one of the three primary colors. It is easier to intuitively grasp the contents (patterns, symbols, etc.) to be intuitively selected.

  This point will be described more specifically. For example, it is assumed that the first display mode is a display mode configured by a transmissive part that transmits only blue light and a transmissive part that transmits only green light. Here, when light of a mixed color of blue and green (so-called “cyan (water) color)” is projected from the light emitting means, a transmission portion that transmits only green and a transmission of only blue are correspondingly transmitted. Each of the transmission parts emits light and is displayed. However, in such a state, it is necessary to determine whether the presented information is a green part, a blue part, or information composed of a combination of both, and it is intuitively displayed. There may be a case where it is difficult to grasp the whole aspect. In particular, when a gaming machine is equipped with a segment type optical display device as in the present invention, a simple design that is easy to grasp intuitively, such as relatively simple numbers and designs, rather than videos and a large amount of character information. It is more suitable when displaying the above. In view of this situation, according to the configuration of this means, the first display mode displayed corresponding to the first color is a single color display by any one of the three primary colors of light, so the displayed information Can be easily grasped in an instant. In addition, since the second display mode emits light corresponding to the three primary colors of light other than the first color, the first display mode and the second display mode can be easily distinguished from each other. It is possible to perform effective display without cutting off.

Means 35: In the constitution of means 33 or means 34, “the optical display device is projected from the light emitting means from the side where the light emitting means is arranged with respect to the first transmitting means and the second transmitting means. It further comprises a light shielding means for preventing the light other than the light to irradiate the first transmission means and the second transmission means ”.

  Here, the “light-blocking means” may be any means that absorbs or reflects light or restricts the optical path according to the viewing angle of a person (player, etc.) viewing the optical display device. For example, a colored organic system Examples thereof include a so-called black matrix, microlens array, or optical mirror made of an appropriate metal oxide film such as resin, Ta, Ti, W, Mo, Cr, and Ni. In addition, the place where the “light shielding means” is arranged is that “light other than the light projected from the light emitting means from the side where the first transmission means and the second transmission means are arranged is transmitted to the first transmission means and the second transmission means. It is only necessary to be able to prevent “irradiation of the device”, for example, behind the light emitting device, between the light emitting device and the transmitting device (the first transmitting device and the second transmitting device), and between the light emitting device and the transmitting device. Examples thereof include a BOX type which surrounds the periphery of the means, and a light-shielding film coated on the back side of the substrate provided with the light emitting means and the transmissive means. Furthermore, “light other than the light projected from the light emitting means” means that light emitted from other display devices such as an LCD, sunlight incident from outside the gaming machine, light from lighting equipment, etc. What was diffusely reflected in the plane, etc.

  Therefore, according to the structure of the means 35, since the light shielding means is further provided, light other than the light projected from the light emitting means is transmitted from the side where the light emitting means is arranged (the first transmitting means and the first transmitting means). It is possible to prevent the second transmission means and the like from being irradiated. For example, it is assumed that the optical display device of the present invention is installed in front of another display device such as an LCD. In this case, light of various colors emitted from the other display device is projected onto the first transmission unit and the second transmission unit from the side where the light emitting unit is arranged, so that at a desired timing and color scheme, There is a possibility that the first display mode or the second display mode cannot be displayed. Specifically, when only the first display mode is desired to be displayed, the second display mode may be displayed in duplicate.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of this means, since the light shielding means is further provided, it is possible to prevent light other than the light projected from the light emitting means from being projected onto the transmission means. . Thereby, it becomes easy to control each display mode with a desired timing and color scheme, and a gaming machine equipped with a more practical optical display device can be provided.

Means 36: In any one configuration of means 33 to means 35, “the first transmission means and the second transmission means are configured as one optical display member formed on the same plane,
When the first transmission means and the second transmission means are arranged in an overlapping manner, the overlapping overlapping portion is configured to transmit at least the light of the first color and the second color, respectively.
It is characterized by that.

  Here, "overlapping" may be a case where the first transmission means (or the second transmission means) overlaps entirely with the second transmission means (or the first transmission means), or a part thereof May overlap with each other. In addition, “at least the light of the first color and the second color can be transmitted” may mean that only the first color and the second color are transmitted, or other colors are further transmitted. It may be what you do.

  In addition, as a method of forming “one optical display member formed on the same surface”, for example, a multicolor molding technique which is one of resin injection molding techniques formed by bonding two transmission means together And a method of applying a color printing technique.

  By the way, as the arrangement method of the first transmission means and the second transmission means, two members (a first member including the first transmission means and a second member including the second transmission means formed on separate surfaces). A method of arranging the members) in an overlapping manner is conceivable. However, according to this method, since the thicknesses of the two members are superimposed, the thickness of the entire optical display device is increased, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in mounting is limited. In addition, the amount of light emitted from the light emitting means is attenuated (that is, the transmittance is lowered) and the display tends to be relatively dark. In order to avoid this problem, it is necessary to increase the amount of light from the light emitting means. Therefore, the power consumption of the optical display device is increased, and the lifetime is shortened (the service life is decreased).

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 36, two transmission means (first transmission means and second transmission means) are arranged on the same plane, that is, on one member (or a part thereof is overlapped). Deploy. This is preferable because the thickness of the entire optical display device can be made thinner and more compact than when two members are overlapped, and the degree of freedom in mounting is improved. In addition, since two transmission means are formed on the same surface, a decrease in transmittance can be reduced, and a gaming machine capable of providing a clear and long-life display can be provided.

  By the way, the first transmission means transmits only the first color, and the second transmission means transmits only the second color. In this state, when the first transmission means and the second transmission means are arranged in an overlapping manner, it may be considered that the overlapping portion does not transmit both the first color and the second color. This is because when the first color is projected from the light emitting means, the first color is blocked by the second transmitting means, and when the second color is projected, the second color is blocked. Accordingly, there may be a problem that, in either one (or both) of the first display mode and the second display mode, the color of the overlapping portion is lacking and the display is not normally performed.

  On the other hand, according to the structure of the means 36, the overlapping part with the 1st transmission means and the 2nd transmission means is comprised so that the light of a 1st color and a 2nd color can each be permeate | transmitted. Accordingly, the colors of the overlapping portions are not lost, and each display mode can be displayed in a desired color and form. Thereby, since a 1st display mode and a 2nd display mode are easy to distinguish, it can attract a player's eyes effectively and can prevent a fall of interest.

Means 37: In the configuration of any one of means 27 to 36, “in the first drive unit, the guide member is cantilevered by the guided member with respect to the axis of the guiding member. It is placed at a position opposite to the direction of the first decorative movable body,
In the second drive unit, the guide member is disposed at a position substantially perpendicular to the direction of the second decorative movable body that is cantilevered by the guided member with respect to the axis of the guide member. It is characterized by being "

  By the way, although various directions can be considered as a direction which arranges rotation prevention means with respect to the direction of the 1st decoration movable body and the 2nd decoration movable body held at the guided member, the 1st decoration movable body and the 1st When the anti-rotation means is arranged in the same direction as the two decorative movable bodies, the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body and the anti-rotation means wrap around, so the first decorative movable means is equivalent to the anti-rotation means The problem that a body and a 2nd decoration movable body will become small generate | occur | produces.

  Further, if the first decorative movable body is provided with the light emitting decorative display means, the weight of the first decorative movable body increases, and the heavy first decorative movable body can be rotated or moved up and down. There is a problem that the vibration of the guided member is increased or tilted.

  According to the configuration of the means 37, in the rotation prevention means of the first drive unit, the guide member is placed on the opposite side of the first decorative movable body with the guide member interposed therebetween, that is, the guide member and the guide member are in the left-right direction with respect to the game board. In the rotation prevention means of the second drive unit, the guide member is positioned substantially perpendicular to the first decorative movable body from the guide member, that is, the guide member and the guide member with respect to the game board. Are arranged in the front-rear direction.

  Thereby, since the guide member is arranged on the opposite side of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body with respect to the axis of the guide member, the guide member, that is, the rotation preventing means and the first decorative movable body It is possible to prevent the second decorative movable body from wrapping (overlapping) with each other, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be prevented from being reduced by the wrapping. Since the decorative movable body can be enlarged as much as possible, it can be used as a large first movable movable body or second decorative movable body with a large amount of movement. It is possible to make the game stand out and enhance its interest by the production operation.

  When the guide member is disposed on the opposite side of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body with respect to the axial center of the guide member, when viewed from the axial center direction of the guide member, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body Since the two decorative movable bodies, the guide member, and the rotation preventing means are arranged in a substantially straight line, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body protrude in a direction perpendicular to the axis with respect to the axis of the guide member. The amount can be suppressed. That is, since the first decorative movable body, the second decorative movable body, and the guide member are arranged so as to be substantially along the surface of the game board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the thickness in the front-rear direction. Increase in the thickness (distance in the front-rear direction) can be suppressed, and it is possible to satisfactorily cope with an island facility in which a gaming machine conventionally used in a game hall or the like is installed. In addition, since the rotation preventing means is disposed in a direction away from the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body with the guide member interposed therebetween, the rotation prevention function becomes higher as the guide member is moved away from the guide member. The weight balance between the decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body and the rotation preventing means or the rotating means is facilitated, and it can be made to correspond to a larger first decorative movable body or second decorative movable body.

  Further, when the guide member is disposed on the side perpendicular to the axis of the movable member with respect to the axis of the guide member, the length in the direction in which the first decorative movable body or the second decorative movable body and the guide member are arranged is long. Therefore, it is possible to relatively increase the size (length) of the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body as much as possible, and the larger first decorative movable body. By realizing the second decorative movable body, it can be more interesting than an impact.

  Further, according to the configuration of this means, in the first drive unit that moves the first decorative movable body, the guide member of the rotation preventing means is arranged on the opposite side of the first decorative movable body with the guide member interposed therebetween. The distance between the member and the guide member is increased by a predetermined distance and the length in the left-right direction is increased to enhance the rotation prevention function by the rotation prevention means, and the weight of the rotation means and the rotation prevention means increases the distance from the first decorative movable body. The weight balance can be improved and the guided member, that is, the first decorative movable body can be guided and guided well. On the other hand, in the second drive unit that moves the second decorative movable body, since the guide member of the rotation preventing means is arranged in any one of the front and rear directions of the guide member, the length in the left-right direction can be shortened. The length of the left and right direction in the first drive unit can be absorbed by the second drive unit, and the entire length in the left and right direction including the first drive unit and the second drive unit becomes longer. Thus, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be provided in the gaming machine in a good state.

Means 38: In the configuration of any one of means 19 to means 37, “the first drive unit and the second drive unit are slidably guided by the guide member and held at predetermined intervals by the guided member. Further comprises two sliding members,
The guide member has a circular cross-sectional outer shape and a bush shape in which the sliding member is inserted and fitted into the guide member, and at least a portion where the sliding member slides reduces friction. A layer is formed ".

  Here, as the “sliding member”, one that can restrict the movement of the guide member in the direction perpendicular to the axis is desirable, and “the circular or polygonal bush shape”, “the dovetail shape”, “the T shape” In particular, when the bush shape is used, the induction member and the sliding member can be made inexpensively and abundant in types and standard materials.

  The “guided member” includes “a body portion that holds the sliding members so as not to approach each other and a fixing member that fixes the sliding members so as not to be separated from each other”, “ A main body that holds the guide member so as not to approach and separate from each other and restricts the movement of the guide member in one direction with respect to the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide member, and holds the slide member so as not to approach and separate from each other. In contrast, “consisting of a fixing member that restricts movement in the other direction”, “a combination of the main body and the fixing member as appropriate”, and the like.

  Examples of the “friction reduction layer” include, for example, “mirror polishing layer capable of reducing friction by polishing the surface”, “metal plating layer of chromium, etc.”, “resin coating layer coated with resin capable of reducing friction” (As the resin, engineering plastic is desirable, and among them, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE, Teflon (registered trademark), Turkite (registered trademark), BEAREE (registered trademark)), which is a fluorine-based resin, is desirable. Is mentioned.

  Further, “the cross-sectional outer shape is a circular shape” may be a solid or hollow member as long as the outer shape is circular. In addition, the “bush shape” may be a cylindrical shape having a circular hole that fits with the guide member, and may include a flange or the like for holding the guide member.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, since the size of the decorative movable body is relatively small, the decorative movable body is not conspicuous in the gaming machine, and there is a possibility that the effect by the movement of the decorative movable body cannot be sufficiently obtained. Therefore, it is conceivable to make the decorative movable body relatively large and stand out so that the effect of the movement of the decorative movable body can be enhanced, and the enlarged decorative movable body is held by the guided member. It can be considered that the guided member can be moved in the extending direction of the guiding member for guiding and guiding the guided member. However, in this case, the guided member also increases in size as the decorative movable body increases, and if the guided member is slidably guided by the guiding member, the contact area of the sliding portion increases. The sliding resistance becomes large, so that the guided member cannot be guided and guided well, or the moving means for moving the guided member requires a large driving force, resulting in an overall increase in size. There is a risk that the gaming machine will not be equipped.

  Also, it is conceivable to reduce the frictional resistance by applying a lubricant such as machine oil or grease to the sliding parts that slide in contact with each other. Therefore, there may be a problem that the applied lubricant scatters and causes dirt, or when an electrical component or the like is disposed in the vicinity, a short circuit or a leakage due to the lubricant occurs.

  According to the configuration of the means 38, the guided members of the first drive unit and the second drive unit are configured to hold the two sliding members slidably guided by the guiding member at a predetermined interval. In addition, the guide member has a rod shape with a circular cross-sectional outer shape, the sliding member has a bush shape that fits with the guide member, and a friction reducing layer is formed on the part of the guide member where the sliding member slides It is.

  Accordingly, the guided member holding the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body is slidably guided to the guiding member via the two sliding members, so that the contact area of the sliding portion is made as small as possible. The sliding resistance can be reduced, and the guided member can be guided and guided well in a predetermined direction together with the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body, and the decorative movable body. Can be made larger, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be made more conspicuous, and the production effect can be made higher, and the interest can be prevented from being lowered.

  Further, since the sliding resistance between the guiding member and the sliding member can be reduced, the guided member can be guided and guided satisfactorily through the sliding member, and the friction at the sliding portion is reduced. It becomes possible to make it difficult to wear, and it is possible to prevent the guiding member and the sliding member from being worn at an early stage and causing the malfunction of the guided member, that is, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body.

  Further, the guide member has a rod shape with a circular cross-sectional outer shape, and the sliding member has a bush shape that fits with the guide member. As a result, the guide member can be a mold such as a general round bar or pipe material, and the slide member can be a general cylindrical bush, which increases the cost of the guide member and the slide member. It is possible to suppress the sliding, and it is possible to slide the sliding member satisfactorily.

  Moreover, since it is possible to suppress an increase in sliding resistance even if the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are enlarged, the first decorative movable body can be used without using a large moving means having a large driving force. The guided member that holds the movable body and the second decorative movable body can be guided and guided well, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body of a desired size can be provided in the gaming machine. It can be more interesting.

  Furthermore, since the sliding resistance can be reduced, the driving force required to move the guided member in a stationary state can be reduced, and the guided member can be easily started to move. In other words, since the movement response of the guided member can be increased, the guided member, that is, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be quickly moved, and the impact caused by the movement of the decorative movable body can be further increased. It can raise and can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, as a predetermined space | interval of two sliding members, it is desirable to arrange | position in the position away as much as possible. More specifically, when the clearance between the guiding member and the sliding member is the same, the smaller the distance between the two sliding members, the larger the backlash of the guided member and the worse the stability of the guided member. On the other hand, the larger the distance between the two sliding members, the smaller the backlash of the guided member, and the stability of the guided member is relatively improved. Therefore, the guided member can be guided and guided in a more stable state by the guiding member by disposing the two sliding members as far as possible.

  In addition, since the two sliding members are held at a predetermined interval, even if the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body are cantilevered, the guided member is inclined or loose with respect to the guiding member. The guided member, that is, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be guided and guided in a stable and good state, and the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be guided. The size can be increased, the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body can be made more conspicuous, and the production effect can be made higher, and it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the friction reducing layer is formed on the induction member, the lubricant is not scattered compared to the case where the lubricant is used, and the occurrence of contamination due to the sliding of the sliding member is prevented. In addition, electrical components and the like can be arranged in the vicinity of the guide member, and the degree of design freedom of the gaming machine can be increased to further enhance the interest.

  Means 39: In any one configuration of means 1 to means 38, “the common effect executing means is that the privilege given in the normal state effect or the high-probability expected small effect satisfies a predetermined first condition. It is possible to appear in some cases ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 39, the determination as to whether or not to shift from the high probability expected small effect to the high probability expected large effect, that is, whether or not the first condition is satisfied is given as the game progresses. Based on benefits. In other words, in the high-probability expected small production, some kind of privilege (for example, production points) is given, and when the given privilege satisfies the first condition, the high-probability expected small production to the high-probability expectation large It is possible to shift to production. For this reason, the player comes to pay attention to whether or not a privilege is granted while visually recognizing the high-probability expected small effect, and thus can enhance the interest of the high-probability expected small effect. Moreover, this privilege may be given not only in the high-probability expected small effect but also in the normal state effect. Therefore, the pleasure of acquiring the privilege in the normal state effect increases, and the willingness to shift to the high probability expectation small effect can be further enhanced by associating the normal state effect with the high probability expectation small effect. In other words, when a privilege that satisfies the first condition is given in the normal state production, “it was promised to develop from a high probability expectation small production to a high probability expectation large production” or “ It can be recognized as “substantially certain”, and the willingness to shift to a high-probability expectation small production can be enhanced. In other words, from the normal gaming state before the appearance of high-probability expected small effects, it becomes possible to be involved in games played with high-probability expected small effects, and it is possible to further increase interest in these series of effects. become.

  Means 40: In the structure of means 39, “The privilege that can be given in the normal state effect or the high-probability expected small effect is a privilege other than valuable value, and is associated with at least the effect content in the high-probability expected small effect. It is characterized by.

  Here, “privileges other than valuable value” do not directly give a profit to the player, but are given to enhance the expectation, and the pattern related to the high-probability expectation small effect The item etc. can be illustrated.

  According to the configuration of the means 40, when the normal state effect or the high probability small effect is performed, a privilege other than the valuable value is given as the game progresses, and whether or not the first condition is established based on this privilege Is determined. Moreover, since the contents of the high-probability small effect and the privilege to be granted are associated with each other, the interest of the high-probability small effect is further enhanced. In addition, since the privilege granted is only an item for developing the production, it does not directly give a profit to the player, so it may be difficult to grant the privilege in the normal state production. However, it does not reduce the player's motivation.

Means 41: In the configuration of means 40, “the display control means is capable of generating predetermined effect points for generating the normal state effect and the high-probability expected small effect, and the generated effect points. And a point accumulating means for accumulating,
It is determined that the first condition is satisfied when the accumulated total of the production points reaches a certain value ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 41, when performing the normal state effect or the high probability expectation effect, a predetermined effect point (score) is displayed and the effect points are accumulated. That is, a production point is given as a privilege. When the total of the production points reaches a certain value, it is possible to shift from the high probability expectation small production to the high probability expectation large production. Therefore, it is interested in collecting performance points, and the willingness to advance the game further increases. In addition, since the higher the total of the production points, the more advantageous it becomes, so that even if the normal content production or the high-probability expected small production of the same content continues to appear, it is reduced that the content of the production is bored.

  Means 42: In the configuration of means 41, “the normal state effect has a special effect that requires an operation of a push button, and when the special effect is derived, the push button is operated, It further comprises point generation permission means for permitting the generation of production points ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 42, at least in the normal state effect, a special effect that requires the operation of the push button is performed, and it is possible to generate effect points only when the push button is operated during the effect. . In other words, in the normal state effect, if the special effect is not performed, or if the push button is not operated even if the special effect is performed, the effect point is not generated. Therefore, the frequency at which the production points are generated can be suppressed, and the total production points can be prevented from reaching a certain value immediately. Further, since the special effect is performed as a part of the normal state effect, the game can be sharpened by the special effect. Furthermore, since the operation of the push button is requested, it is possible to actively participate in the production rather than just the passive production just watching, and to collect the production points as if it were a game.

Means 43: In the constitution of means 41 or means 42, “the point generating means is
A point distribution table showing the relationship between the total of the production points and the distribution (appearance rate) of the production point values to be given,
Prior to derivation of the normal state effect, point determination random number extraction means for extracting a given point determination random number,
When the point determination random number extraction means extracts the assigned point determination random number, an effect point value is determined based on the assigned point determination random number, the total of the stored effect points, and the point distribution table. Point determination means ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 43, when the point determination random number extraction means extracts the grant point determination random number, the total of the production points already stored at the time of the lottery, the extracted grant point determination random number, An effect point value corresponding to the total of effect points is determined from the point distribution table. For this reason, it becomes possible to generate an unspecified effect point based on a random number, and attention to the effect point is further increased, and it is possible to add a sharpness when providing the effect point. In addition, since the tendency of the effect point value to be granted changes depending on the total of effect points that have already been stored, for example, the effect point value to be granted may be limited so that the total of effect points does not exceed a predetermined value. , It becomes possible to cause a bias in the way the production points are accumulated.

  Means 44: The structure of means 43 is characterized in that “the point distribution table is distributed such that the larger the total of the effect points is, the more difficult it is to assign a large effect point value”.

  According to the configuration of the means 44, the higher the total of the produced performance points is, the more difficult it is to give a large production point value, so that it is possible to prevent the production point total from reaching a certain value immediately. it can. That is, the pleasure of collecting the production points can be continued for a relatively long time. On the contrary, when the total of the production points is low, it is possible to give a relatively large production point value. For example, if a large performance point value is given at the beginning of the game, it becomes possible to attract the player's consciousness.

Means 45: In the configuration of means 44, “the normal state effect is the first normal state effect that can appear even if the lottery result of the lottery means does not become the third result or the fourth result, and the lottery result. Consists of a second normal state effect that can appear after the third result or the fourth result,
The point distribution table corresponding to the first normal state effect includes a case where the effect point value is “0”, and the point determination means corresponding to the first normal state effect is stored. It is characterized in that the effect point value to be given is determined so that even if the added effect point value is added to the total of the effect points, the predetermined value is not reached.

  According to the configuration of the means 45, the normal state effect includes the first normal state effect that can appear even if the lottery result does not become the third result or the fourth result, and the third result or the fourth result. A second normal state effect that can appear is included. That is, when the lottery result becomes the third result or the fourth result, the first normal state effect is shifted to the second normal state effect, and then the high probability expectation small effect (or the high probability expectation large effect) is changed. It has become. By the way, in this case, since the transition from the first normal state effect to the second normal state effect is based on the condition that the lottery result becomes the third result or the fourth result, there are many effect points in the first normal state effect. In spite of having been stored, a situation may occur in which the transition is not made to the second normal state effect as well as the high probability expectation small effect. In this case, there is a concern that distrust is caused by the fact that the production does not develop even though many production points are stored, and the reliability of the production points is impaired.

  However, according to the configuration of the means 45, in the first normal state effect, even if the added effect point value is added to the total of the stored effect points, the effect points to be given are not reached. Determine the value. In other words, when the value is close to a certain value, the given effect point is limited to an extremely small effect point value, or the effect point value is set to “0” so as not to reach the constant value. Therefore, in the second normal state effect derived after the third result or the fourth result, it becomes possible to reach a certain value for the first time, and when it reaches a certain value, it immediately develops to the next effect. It becomes possible to make it. For this reason, the relationship between the total of the produced production points and the production transition conditions is clarified, and the reliability of the production points can be improved.

Means 46: In the configuration of means 45, “further comprising point display control means for displaying the effect point value to be given on the effect display means,
The point display control means displays an item image instead of the effect point value when the effect point value given by the point determination means is “0”.

  By the way, when the effect point value to be given is “0”, “0 points” may be displayed or nothing may be displayed. However, when “0 points” is displayed, there is a risk of discomfort. In particular, there is a concern that it may cause irritation if displayed continuously many times. Further, when nothing is displayed, a malfunction of the effect display device or a bug in the program may be aroused to cause mistrust to the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, according to the structure of the means 46, when the effect point value provided is "0", an item image is displayed instead of the effect point value. For this reason, even if it is production | presentation point value "0" and a total does not change, while being able to suppress the fall of a player's mood, a visual interest can be given with an item image.

Means 47: In the constitution of means 46, “an item image selection table indicating a relationship between a plurality of types of item images and an expected value for a lottery result of the lottery means;
Prior to the derivation of the first normal state effect, item image selection random number extraction means for extracting an item image selection random number for selecting the item image,
When the item selection random number is extracted, the item image displayed instead of the effect point value based on the item image selection random number, the lottery result of the lottery means, and the item image selection table And an item image determining means for determining “.”.

  According to the configuration of the means 47, when the item image selection random number is extracted prior to the derivation of the first normal state effect, the item image selection random number, the lottery result of the lottery means, the item image selection table, The item image to be displayed is determined based on the above. Therefore, it is possible to display one item image from among a plurality of types of item images. In particular, in the item image selection table, a plurality of types of item images are associated with expected values for the lottery results of the lottery means, so that item images corresponding to the expected values can be displayed. For this reason, the player can recognize the expected value of the lottery from the displayed item image. In other words, the item image is a means for indicating that the production point value is “0 points” in the first place, but is used to grasp the expected value in the current lottery, so the hatred for the “item image” is wiped out. be able to.

Means 48: In any one configuration of means 45 to means 47, “The point distribution table corresponding to the second normal state effect adds the effect points to be added to the total of the effect points stored. However, it consists of a first area composed of production point groups that do not reach the certain value, and a second area other than that,
When the effect point value is determined based on the extracted random number for determination of the granted points, the total of the effect points already stored at the time of the lottery, and the point distribution table, the effect point value is If it is included in one region, the second normal state effect is shifted to the high probability expectation small effect, while if the determined effect point value is included in the second region, the high probability expectation small It further comprises an effect transition control means for shifting from the second normal state effect to the high probability expectation effect without causing an effect to appear ”.

  By the way, in the second normal state effect, when the effect points are given, the total of the effect points may reach a certain value, and in this case, there is a match between the second normal state effect and the high probability expected small effect. I can't take it. In other words, in the high-probability expectation small production, the production of “accumulating the given production points and moving to the high-probability expectation production when the total of the production points reaches a certain value” is performed. If the total of the production points reaches a certain value before the production appears, the existence of the high-probability expected small production itself is meaningless.

  However, according to the configuration of the means 48, the point distribution table is divided into the first area and the second area, and even if the added effect points are added to the total of the stored effect points, the predetermined value is not reached. An effect point group is defined as a first area, and an area other than that, that is, an effect point group reaching a certain value is defined as a second area. Then, when the determined effect point value is included in the second region, the second normal state effect is shifted to the high probability expected large effect without causing the high probability expected small effect to appear. In other words, if a certain value is not reached even after adding the given production points, after the production points are given, the transition is made to a high-probability expected small production. Shift to production. In the case of direct transition to the high-probability expectation production, since the production points are no longer necessary, even if the production points assigned in the second normal state production are added (without being displayed). I do not care. In this way, in the second normal state production, when providing the production points, in order to grasp in advance whether or not the total of the production points reaches a certain value, in order to shift directly to the high probability expected large production, It is possible to prevent contradictions between productions due to the existence of high-probability small productions.

  Means 49: In the configuration of means 48, “The point distribution table is such that the higher the total of the stored effect points, the higher the possibility that the effect point value of the second area will be selected. Is made ".

  According to the configuration of the means 49, when determining the effect point value in the second normal state effect, the total of the effect points given in the first normal state effect is considered, and the higher the total of the effect points, the more There is a high possibility that the effect point values in the two areas are selected. In other words, the higher the production points that are stored, the easier it is to shift to the high-probability expected production. For this reason, for example, in comparison with “what restricts the effect point value to be given so that the total of effect points does not reach a certain value in the second normal state effect”, the effect points stored in the first normal state effect are utilized. Can be processed.

  Means 50: In the structure of means 48 or means 49, “the effect transition control means determines the given point when the total of the effect points already stored at the time of the lottery has reached the predetermined value. It is characterized by always shifting to a high-probability expected production regardless of random numbers.

  According to the structure of the means 50, when the total of the production | presentation points provided in the 1st normal state effect has reached the fixed value, a high probability expectation is performed from a 2nd normal state effect, without performing a high probability small effect. Shift to a large production. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the contradiction between the effects and to realize the superiority of the effects due to reaching a certain value at a relatively early stage.

Means 51: In any one configuration of means 48 to means 50, “the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, and it is determined that the effect transition control means shifts to the high probability expected small effect. If it is, the first route to return to the first normal state effect without developing more than the high probability expected small effect, or the second route to develop to the high probability expected large effect and then return to the first normal state effect Route selection means for selecting one of the routes based on the total of the production points;
If the total of the accumulated production points does not reach the certain value even after performing the high-probability expected small production a predetermined number of times, it is determined whether the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result When the lottery result is the third result, or when the lottery result is the fourth result and the second route is selected by the route selection means, the transition to the high-probability expected large effect is made. , Further comprising second effect transition control means for transitioning to the first normal state effect when the lottery result is the fourth result and the first route is selected by the route selecting means. To do.

  By the way, in order to prevent the third result and the fourth result from being recognized separately depending on the size of the effect point value to be given, it is preferable that the distribution ratio of both is common in the point distribution table. If the effect point value to be given is too large, it immediately reaches a certain value, and in the case of the third result and the fourth result, it easily shifts to the high probability expected production. In other words, it is difficult to position the high-probability expectation production as an “production with a high probability that a probability variation state has occurred (production with a high possibility of being the third result)”. On the other hand, if the effect point value to be given is too small, even if it is the third result, the total of the effect points does not readily reach a constant value, and smooth development cannot be expected. In addition, when the lottery result is the third result, the series of effects cannot be ended with the high probability expectation small effect. Because, if a series of performances ends in the middle, the player may recognize that the fourth result (small hit) is in spite of being in a probability variation state, and may stop the game halfway. Because there is.

  Therefore, if the number of high-probability small effects is set, and the total of the performance points does not reach a certain value even if the predetermined number of effects are performed, the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result It can be considered that only when the result is the third result, the transition is made to the high-probability expected large production which is the next production. However, according to this, after the maximum number of high-probability expected small effects has been performed, the process of shifting to the high-probability expected large effects, that is, the high-probability expected large effects even though the total of the production points has not reached a certain value. The process to shift becomes a process specific to the third result (probability variation state), and as a result, before the transition to the high probability state effect, it is made to recognize that the probability variation state has occurred. There is a risk that the production effect in the probability state production is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the structure of the means 51, when it is determined that the lottery result is the fourth result (small hit) and the transition from the second normal state effect to the high probability expected small effect is made, Whether the route is the first route or the second route is determined by lottery. The first route is a route that returns from the high probability expectation small effect to the first normal state effect, and the second route transitions from the high probability expectation small effect to the high probability expectation large effect, and then returns to the first normal state effect. Is the root.
Then, if the total of the accumulated production points does not reach a certain value even after performing the predetermined number of high-probability expected small productions, the production to be subsequently shifted is determined based on the lottery result and the selected route. . That is, when the lottery result is the third result and when the lottery result is the fourth result and the second route is selected, the transition is made to the high-probability expectation production, while the lottery result is the first result as the fourth result. When the route is selected, the series of effects is finished in the high-probability expected small effect. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the production in the case of the third result from ending in the middle of a series of productions, and it is not only the case of the third result that shifts to the high probability expected production. Since there may be four results, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the probability variation state from being recognized until a high probability state effect is derived.

Means 52: In the configuration of means 51, “the route selection means includes a route distribution table indicating a relationship between the total of the production points and the distribution ratio of the first route and the second route,
In the route distribution table, the distribution ratio is set such that the greater the total of the production points, the higher the probability that the second route will be selected.

  According to the structure of the means 52, the possibility that the second route is selected increases as the total of the stored effect points increases. In other words, the production points accumulated so far are taken into consideration, and the higher production points make it easier to shift to the high-probability expected production. In other words, even if there are few production points given in the high-probability expected small production, if the total of production points accumulated before that is high, the probability of shifting to the high-probability large production is high. Get higher. Therefore, it is possible to give higher interest to the effect points given in the normal state effect.

  Means 53: In any one configuration of means 41 to means 52, “in the high probability expected small effect, the total value of the effect points reaches the certain value before the normal state from the high probability expected small effect. In the case of returning to the production, it is further characterized by further comprising point erasure means for erasing or reducing the production points accumulated by the point accumulation means.

  According to the configuration of the means 53, when the high-probability expected large production does not appear, before the first condition is satisfied, that is, before the total of the production points reaches a certain value, the high-probability expected small production is changed to the first normal Returning to the state effect, in this case, all or part of the stored effect points are deleted. Therefore, the first normal state effect is started again from the zero state or the extremely small state, and even if, for example, fourth hits occur continuously, it is possible to prevent the total of the accumulated effect points from becoming extremely large. .

Means 54: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 53, “The display control means is for the high-probability expected small effect,
Point granting means for granting a predetermined production point as a privilege;
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
First condition determination means for determining that the first condition is satisfied when the total of the production points given by the point grant means reaches a certain value;
Even if it is determined by the first condition determination means that the first condition is satisfied, the high probability until the number of executions of the high probability expectation small effect becomes the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising an effect transition postponing means for postponing the transition to a probabilistic expectation production.

  According to the configuration of the means 54, the determination as to whether or not to shift from the high probability expected small effect to the high probability expected large effect, that is, whether or not the first condition is satisfied is given as the game progresses. This is based on production points. That is, in the high-probability expected small effect, predetermined effect points are given, and when the total of the given effect points reaches a certain value, it is determined that the first condition is satisfied. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to whether or not an effect point is given while visually recognizing the high-probability expected small effect, and thus to enhance the interest of the high-probability expected small effect. In the present invention, even if the total of the production points reaches a certain value, it does not immediately shift to the high probability expected large production, but until the high probability expected small production of the set number of continuous derivations is executed, It is designed not to migrate. For this reason, if the total of the production points reaches a certain value in the high-probability expectation small production, or if the high score is obtained even if it does not reach the certain value, “High probability expectation small production to high probability expectation It is possible to recognize that “it has been promised to develop into a large production” or “the development has become almost certain”, and it is possible to increase the willingness to make a transition to a high-probability expected production. That is, it is possible to arouse awareness of “Let's continue playing a little more until the set number of continuous derivations is reached”.

  Means 55: The constitution of means 54 is characterized in that "the derivation number setting means has a number variable means for changing the continuous derivation number of the high-probability expected small effect based on the gaming state".

  According to the configuration of the means 55, since the number of continuous derivations of the high-probability expected small effects changes based on the gaming state, it is difficult to predict the number of continuous derivations, and the total of the production points within the period is a constant value. It can be even more irritating as to whether or not For example, even if the number of high-probability expected small performances that were predicted was performed, the total of the production points did not reach a certain value, so when giving up, the high-probability expected small performance was performed once again and reached a certain value On the contrary, the total of the production points gradually increases, and when it is certain that the next high probability expectation production will reach a certain value, the production will end at that time.

Means 56: In the configuration of means 55, “when the lottery result is the fourth result, the display control means can perform the normal state from the high probability expected small effect without developing more than the high probability expected small effect. Route determination for determining either the first route to return to the production or the second route to develop to the high probability expectation large production and then return to the normal state production before moving to the high probability expectation small production Further comprising means,
The number of times variable means is:
Derivation frequency distribution table showing the relationship between the route determined by the route determination means and the distribution of the continuous derivation frequency, and the second route is set so that the continuous derivation frequency is larger than the first route. When,
Random number extracting means for determining the number of times for extracting the random number for determining the number of times for determining the number of times of continuous derivation;
When the number determination random number extracting means extracts the number determination random number, the number determination means for determining the number of continuous derivations based on the number determination random number, the determined route, and the number distribution table, It is characterized by having.

  According to the configuration of the means 56, when the lottery result is the fourth result, either the first route or the second route is determined by lottery before shifting to the high-probability expected small effect. The first route is a route that returns from the high probability expectation small effect to the normal state effect, and the second route is a route that transitions from the high probability expectation small effect to the high probability expectation effect and then returns to the normal state effect. Then, in determining the number of times of continuous derivation, first, a random number for frequency determination is extracted, and based on the random number for frequency determination, the determined route (first route or second route), and the frequency distribution table, The number of continuous derivations is determined. That is, the number of continuous derivations is determined based on the distribution corresponding to the route. In particular, in the frequency allocation table, the second route is set to have a higher number of continuous derivations than the first route, so the number of high-probability expected small productions is a pattern that develops into a high-probability expected large production. Will be more. Therefore, when transitioning to a high-probability expectation production, the feeling of expectation can be gradually increased by the high-probability expectation production, which is in the middle of the production, and the mood when transitioning to a high-probability expectation production can be raised. On the other hand, if it does not shift to the high-probability expectation production, the high-probability expectation production is terminated at a relatively early stage, thereby suppressing a decrease in the willingness to have not developed into a high-probability expectation production. can do.

Means 57: In any one configuration of means 1 to means 56, “the point giving means is:
A point distribution table showing the relationship between the total of the production points and the distribution (appearance rate) of the production point values to be given,
Random number extraction means for point determination for extracting random numbers for determination of granted points before the transition to the high probability expectation small effect,
When the point determination random number extraction means extracts the assigned point determination random number, an effect point value is determined based on the assigned point determination random number, the total of the stored effect points, and the point distribution table. Point determination means ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 57, when the point determination random number extraction means extracts the granted point determination random number, the total of the production points already stored at the time of the lottery, the extracted granted point determination random number, An effect point value corresponding to the total of effect points is determined from the point distribution table. For this reason, it becomes possible to generate an unspecified effect point based on a random number, and attention to the effect point is further increased, and it is possible to add a sharpness when providing the effect point. In addition, since the tendency of the effect point value to be granted changes depending on the total of effect points that have already been stored, for example, the effect point value to be granted may be limited so that the total of effect points does not exceed a predetermined value. , It becomes possible to cause a bias in the way the production points are accumulated.

  Means 58: The structure of means 57 is characterized in that “the point distribution table is distributed such that the larger the total of the effect points is, the more difficult it is to assign a large effect point value”.

  According to the configuration of the means 58, the higher the total of the production points that are stored, the more difficult it is to give a large production point value. it can. That is, the pleasure of collecting the production points can be continued for a relatively long time. On the contrary, when the total of the production points is low, it is possible to give a relatively large production point value. For example, if a large performance point value is given at the beginning of the game, it becomes possible to attract the player's consciousness.

  Means 59: In any one of the constitutions of means 54 to 58, “when the state returns from the high-probability expected small effect to the normal state effect, further comprising point erasing means for erasing or reducing the stored effect points” It is characterized by that.

  According to the configuration of the means 59, if the high probability expected large effect does not appear, the total of the effect points will return from the high probability expected small effect to the normal state effect without reaching a certain value. The stored production points are deleted or reduced. Therefore, the production of the normal state is started again from the state where the total of the production points is zero or very small. For example, even if the fourth hit occurs continuously, the total of the production points to be accumulated becomes extremely large. Can be prevented.

Means 60: In the configuration of means 59, “the point erasing means indicates the relationship between the total of the produced effect points and the ratio of a part of the accumulated effect points that is left after erasure, and the stored effect points. The remaining point distribution table set so that the higher the total, the higher the remaining ratio,
A remaining point determination random number extraction means for extracting a remaining point determination random number for determining whether or not a part of the effect point is left;
When the remaining point determination random number is extracted by the remaining point determination random number extracting means, the effect at the time of erasure is based on the remaining point determination random number, the total of the stored effect points, and the remaining point distribution table. A remaining point determining means for determining whether or not a part of the point is left,
When the remaining point determining means determines that the effect points are left, the total is resumed from the remaining effect points ”.

  According to the structure of the means 60, the larger the total of the production points accumulated up to the time of the determination, the more easily a part is left, and if left, it is left after returning to the normal state production. The total is resumed from the production points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a decrease in expectation when returning from the high-probability expected small effect to the normal state effect, and to suppress the game from being ended at that time.

  Means 61: In any one of the constitutions of means 54 to 60, "if it is decided to shift to the high probability expected large effect, the high probability expected large effect in the final high probability expected small effect" It further comprises a transition destination notice display means for displaying a notice to the effect of transition to "."

  According to the configuration of the means 61, in the case of shifting to the high-probability expected large effect, a notice display indicating the transition destination is performed in the final high-probability expected small effect. For this reason, it is possible to make the player recognize that the high-probability expected small effect has ended and that the transition destination is the high-probability expected large effect. Therefore, a series of performances can be performed smoothly, and the expectation can be greatly expanded with respect to the transition to the high-probability expectation production.

Means 62: In any one configuration of means 54 to means 61, “the point giving means can give the effect point even in the normal state effect,
The total of the effect points given in the normal state effect is added to the total of the effect points stored at the time of the high probability expectation small effect ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 62, the presentation points may be given not only in the high-probability expected small production but also in the normal state production. Therefore, the pleasure of acquiring the privilege in the normal state effect increases, and the willingness to shift to the high probability expectation small effect can be further enhanced by associating the normal state effect with the high probability expectation small effect. In other words, in the normal state performance, when a performance point satisfying a certain value is given, “It was promised to develop from a high probability expectation small production to a high probability expectation large production”, or “ Can be recognized.

Means 63: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 62, “The common effect execution means indicates that the probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, A high-probability expected small effect that can give a production point as the game progresses, and a production that can appear when the total of the given production points reaches a certain value, It is possible to execute a high probability expectation large effect indicating that there is a high possibility that the probability variation state is generated by the advantageous gaming state control means,
The display control means is for the high probability expectation small effect,
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
When the lottery result is the fourth result, the first route to return from the high probability expected small effect to the normal state effect without developing more than the high probability expected small effect, or the high probability expected large effect is developed. Route determining means for determining any one of the second routes to be returned to the normal state effect before moving to the high-probability expected small effect,
When the lottery result is the fourth result and the route determination means determines the first route, the high-probability expected small effect of the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting unit is performed. Also, the effect point value is determined so that the total of the effect points does not reach the certain value, while the lottery result is the third result, or the lottery result is the fourth result and the route is determined. When the second route is determined by the means, the total of the production points reaches the certain value when the high probability expected small production of the last round or slightly before the round is derived. The game machine is characterized by comprising a point value determining means for determining a production point value.

  According to the configuration of the means 63, the determination as to whether or not to shift from the high probability expected small effect to the high probability expected large effect, that is, whether or not the first condition is satisfied is given as the game progresses. This is based on production points. In other words, at least in the high-probability expected small production, production points are given, and when the total of the given production points reaches a certain value, the high-probability expected small production changes to the high-probability expected big production. It is possible to migrate.

  By the way, in this case, it is preferable that the distribution of the production point values is common so that the third result and the fourth result are not recognized separately depending on the size of the production points to be given. If the effect point value to be performed is too large, it immediately reaches a certain value, and in the case of the third result and the fourth result, it easily shifts to the high probability expected large effect. In other words, it is difficult to position the high-probability expectation production as an “production with a high probability that a probability variation state has occurred (production with a high possibility of being the third result)”. On the other hand, if the effect point value to be given is too small, even if it is the third result, it is difficult to reach a certain value, and smooth development cannot be expected. In addition, when the lottery result is the third result, if the series of effects is finished with the high probability expectation small effect, the player will be in the fourth result (small hit) despite the probability variation state. There is a risk of recognizing that it was, and quitting the game on the way.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the means 63, first, the number of times of continuous derivation of the high probability expected small effect is set, and the high probability expected small effect of the set number of times is performed. For this reason, it can be suppressed that the high-probability expectation effect becomes extremely short and the effect content cannot be fully enjoyed, or on the contrary, becomes extremely long and tired of repetition of the effect. Further, when the lottery result is the fourth result, either the first route or the second route is determined by lottery before the transition to the high-probability expected small effect. The first route is a route that returns from the high probability expectation small effect to the normal state effect, and the second route is a route that transitions from the high probability expectation small effect to the high probability expectation effect and then returns to the normal state effect. In determining the production point value, if the lottery result is the fourth result and the first route is decided, the total of production points is constant even if the high probability expected small production of the number of continuous derivations is performed. The production point value is determined so as not to reach the value. On the other hand, if the lottery result is the third result, or if the lottery result is the fourth result and is determined to be the second route, the high-probability expected small production of the last round or a little before that is derived. The production point value is determined so that the total of the production points reaches a certain value. In other words, when the lottery result is the third result, after the high-probability expected small production of the number of continuous derivations is performed, it always develops to the high-probability expected large production, while when the lottery result is the fourth result, the route Based on the route determined by the determining means, the process is branched into a pattern that ends with a high-probability expected small effect and a pattern that develops into a high-probability expected large effect. In the case of a pattern that ends with a high-probability expected small production, the production point value is determined to be low so that the total of production points does not reach a certain value, The production point value is determined so that the total of the production points just reaches a certain value near the last round.

  For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted in spite of being in a probability variation state, and to position a high-probability expectation production as “a production that is highly likely to have a probability variation state”. It becomes possible. In addition, it can be ensured that a high-probability expected small production is derived an appropriate number of times, and it seems to determine whether or not to shift to a high-probability expected large production based on the total of the production point values. it can.

Means 64: In the configuration of means 63, “the point value determining means
A point distribution table showing the relationship between the total of the production points and the distribution (appearance rate) of the production point values to be given,
Random number extraction means for point determination for extracting random numbers for determination of grant points for determining the presentation point value to be provided,
When the point determination random number extraction means extracts the assigned point determination random number, the effect point value is calculated based on the assigned point determination random number, the total of the assigned effect points, and the point distribution table. It is determined ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 64, when the random number for determination of the grant points is extracted, the total of the effect points is calculated from the total of the production points already stored, the extracted random number for determination of the grant points, and the point distribution table. The production point value corresponding to is determined. For this reason, when determining the production point value, there are conditions such as “the total of production points does not reach a certain value” and “the value reaches a certain value near the final production”. It becomes possible to generate unspecified performance points based on random numbers. Therefore, attention to the production points is further increased, and it is possible to add sharpness when the production points are given.

  Means 65: The constitution of means 64 is characterized in that “the point distribution table is distributed so that a larger effect point value is more difficult to be assigned as the total of the effect points is higher”.

  According to the structure of the means 65, since the larger production point value becomes harder to be given, so that the total of the production | presentation points provided and stored is high, it suppresses that the total of production point reaches a fixed value immediately. be able to. That is, the pleasure of collecting the production points can be continued for a relatively long time. On the contrary, when the total of the production points is low, it is possible to give a relatively large production point value. For example, if a large production point value is given in the early stage of production, it becomes possible to attract the player's consciousness.

  Means 66: In the configuration of means 64 or means 65, “when the lottery result is the third result, or when the lottery result is the fourth result and the route determining means determines the second route. In the above, even if the high-probability expected small effect is performed the number of times of continuous derivation, if the total of the effect points does not reach the certain value, a special symbol indicating that the high-probability expected large effect is transferred is displayed. It is further characterized by further comprising special symbol display means.

  By the way, when determining the production point value based on the random number for giving point determination and the point distribution table, even if the production point value is determined so that the total of the production points reaches a certain value, the total of the production points is a constant value. There is a possibility that the presentation of the number of continuous derivations will end without satisfying. It should be noted that if the distribution table used for the decision is different between the final stage and other times, it will be possible to reliably reach a certain value, but according to this, a large number of distribution tables are constructed. This is not preferable because the processing is complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 66, when it is determined to shift to the high-probability expected large effect, even if the final high-probability expected small effect is performed, the total of the production points becomes a constant value. If not, a special symbol indicating that a transition to a high-probability expected production is made is displayed. As a result, it is possible to recognize that “the total of the production points could not be achieved to a certain value, but the relief action has shifted to a high probability expectation”, and the production points do not reach a certain value. It doesn't arouse mysterious feelings about moving to the expected production.

Means 67: In any one configuration of means 63 to means 66, “The normal state effect has a special effect capable of generating the effect point,
The route determination means includes a route distribution table showing a relationship between the total of the production points stored in the normal state production and the distribution ratio of the first route and the second route. In the route distribution table, The distribution ratio is set such that the higher the total of the effect points in the normal state effect, the higher the probability that the second route will be selected. "

  According to the configuration of the means 67, the effect points may be given not only in the high probability expected small effect but also in the normal state effect. Therefore, the pleasure of acquiring the production points in the normal state effect increases, and the motivation to shift to the high probability expectation small effect can be further enhanced by associating the normal state effect with the high probability expectation small effect. In other words, in the normal state performance, when a performance point that reaches a certain value is given, “It was promised to develop from a high probability expected small performance to a high probability expected large performance” or “ It can be recognized as “substantially certain”, and the willingness to shift to a high-probability expectation small production can be enhanced.

  In addition, the greater the total of the production points stored in the normal state production, the higher the possibility that the second route will be selected. In other words, even if there are few production points given in the high-probability expected small production, if the total of production points accumulated before that is high, the probability of shifting to the high-probability large production is high. Get higher. Therefore, it is possible to give higher interest to the effect points given in the normal state effect.

  Means 68: In any one configuration of means 63 to means 67, “the derivation number setting means includes a number of times variable means for changing the continuous derivation number of the high-probability expected small effect based on a gaming state”. It is characterized by.

  According to the configuration of the means 68, since the number of continuous derivations of the high-probability expected small effects changes based on the gaming state, it becomes difficult to predict the number of continuous derivations, and the total of the production points within the period is a constant value. It can be even more irritating as to whether or not For example, even if the number of high-probability expected small performances that were predicted was performed, the total of the production points did not reach a certain value, so when giving up, the high-probability expected small performance was performed once again and reached a certain value On the contrary, the total of the production points gradually increases, and when it is certain that the next high probability expectation production will reach a certain value, the production will end at that time.

Means 69: In the structure of means 68, “the number variable means indicates the relationship between the route determined by the route determination means and the distribution of the continuous derivation times, and the second route is more than the first route. A derivation number distribution table set so that the number of continuous derivation times increases,
Random number extracting means for determining the number of times for extracting the random number for determining the number of times for determining the number of times of continuous derivation;
When the number determination random number extraction unit extracts the number determination random number, the number determination unit determines the continuous derivation number based on the number determination random number, the determined route, and the number distribution table. It is characterized by that.

  According to the configuration of the means 69, when setting the number of continuous derivations, first, a random number for frequency determination is extracted, the random number for frequency determination, the determined route (first route or second route), and frequency distribution The number of continuous derivations is determined based on the table. That is, the number of continuous derivations is determined based on the distribution corresponding to the route. In particular, in the frequency allocation table, the second route is set to have a higher number of continuous derivations than the first route, so the number of high-probability expected small productions is a pattern that develops into a high-probability expected large production. Will be more. Therefore, when transitioning to a high-probability expectation production, the feeling of expectation can be gradually increased by the high-probability expectation production at that stage, and the mood when the transition to the high-probability expectation production can be raised. On the other hand, if it does not shift to the high-probability expectation production, the high-probability expectation production is terminated at a relatively early stage, thereby suppressing a decrease in the willingness to have not developed into a high-probability expectation production. can do.

  Means 70: In any one of the means 63 to 69, “if the lottery result is the third result, or the lottery result is the fourth result and the route determination means sets the second route In the case where it is determined, it is further characterized by further comprising a transition destination notice display means for performing a notice display to the effect of transitioning to the high probability expectation large effect in the last high probability expectation small effect.

  According to the structure of the means 70, when shifting to a high probability expectation large effect, a notice display indicating the transition destination is performed in the final high probability expectation small effect. For this reason, it is possible to make the player recognize that the high-probability expected small effect has ended and that the transition destination is the high-probability expected large effect. Therefore, a series of performances can be performed smoothly, and the expectation can be greatly expanded with respect to the transition to the high-probability expectation production.

Means 71: In any one configuration of means 1 to means 70, “the common effect execution means is an effect that can appear when a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected small effect, It has a plurality of background effects that can be derived in a defined order, and can execute a high probability expected large effect indicating that the probability variation state is highly likely to have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means,
The display control means is for the high-probability expectation production,
Derived number determination means for determining the number of derivations for each background effect in the high-probability expected large effect based on lottery;
Production execution means for sequentially executing the high-probability expected large production having each of the background productions for each derivation number determined by the derivation number determination unit;
When the lottery result is the fourth result, after all the high-probability expected large effects are finished, the high-probability expected large effect is shifted to the normal state effect, and the lottery result is the third result Includes an effect transition control means for transitioning from the high probability expectation large effect to the high probability state effect after completion of all the high probability expectation great effects. "

  According to the configuration of the means 71, the high probability expected large effect has a plurality of background effects that can be derived in a predetermined order, and the number of continuous executions of the high probability expected large effect is different for each background effect. Is set. In particular, the number of times the background effect is derived is determined by lottery, and is determined before the transition to the high-probability expected large effect. When the lottery result is the fourth result, after all the high-probability expected large productions are finished, the process shifts to the normal state production. On the other hand, when the lottery result is the third result, all the high-probability expected large productions are performed. After the production ends, the process shifts to a high probability state production. That is, whether or not the transition is made to the high-probability state effect, each background effect is derived by the number determined by the lottery, so that the contents of the effect and the change of the background can be fully enjoyed. In other words, the background variation pattern becomes more complex and the change can be difficult to predict compared to a case where the number of derivations is constant. In addition, each background effect can be derived an appropriate number of times compared to the one that draws whether or not to develop each time the effect is executed. On the other hand, it can be prevented from being bored by repeated for a long time.

  Means 72: In the structure of means 71, “the display control means limits the total derivation number of the high-probability expectation effect to less than a predetermined number when the lottery result is the fourth result, and the lottery result In the case of the third result, further includes a number limiting means for limiting the number to a certain number of times. "

  According to the configuration of the means 72, the number of derivations for each background effect is determined by lottery, but the total number of derivations obtained by accumulating all the derivation times, that is, the number of times all high-probability expected large effects are continuously executed. Is restricted. Specifically, when the lottery result is the fourth result, the total derivation number is limited to less than a predetermined number, and when the lottery number is the third result, the total derivation number is limited to a certain number. In other words, if the transition to the high-probability state effect is not performed, the high-probability expected large-scale production less than a certain number of times is performed, and then the normal state is restored. It will develop after a high-probability expectation production is performed. Therefore, the player hopes that the high-probability expected large-scale production will be performed continuously for a certain number of times, and even if a relatively monotonous production is repeated, the player will be frustrated and frustrated. There is no. In other words, the longer the number of derivations of the high-probability expected production, the higher the sense of expectation, so that the game motivation can be increased by repeating the production.

  Means 73: In the structure of means 72, “the predetermined number of times is given the specific profit, which is predicted based on a probability that the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state occurs in the probability variation state. It is more than the number of predictions until it is done. "

  By the way, if the probability variation state is caused by the third advantageous gaming state, after a high probability expectation production is derived, when a certain period of time (that is, the number of lotteries predicted based on the winning probability) elapses, It can be predicted that an advantageous gaming state or a second advantageous gaming state will occur (i.e., a particular benefit will be awarded). However, since whether or not the lottery means is successful is determined only by random numbers, there are cases in which neither the first advantageous gaming state nor the second advantageous gaming state occurs even though a lot of lotteries are performed. In this case, the player becomes aware that “the predetermined profit was given due to the fourth advantageous gaming state and the probability fluctuation state did not occur”. Concern about giving up continuation.

  On the other hand, according to the structure of the means 73, even if the number of lotteries predicted to be in the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state elapses, such an advantageous gaming state is not achieved. Transition to high probability state production. In other words, “the probability variation state has not occurred”, the high probability state effect is caused to appear at the timing when the player starts to be aware of the end of the game. Therefore, the joy due to the appearance of the high-probability state effect can be further increased, and the game can be suppressed from being ended even though the probability fluctuation state is hidden.

Means 74: In any one of the means 71 to 73, "the derivation number determining means is
A pattern distribution table indicating a relationship between a number pattern grouped by combining the number of times of derivation of each background effect and a distribution of the number pattern with respect to the lottery result;
A pattern selection random number extraction means for extracting a pattern selection random number before the transition to the high probability expectation production,
When the pattern selection random number is extracted by the pattern selection random number extraction means, a pattern determination means for determining the number-of-times pattern based on the pattern selection random number, the lottery result, and the pattern distribution table;
A derivation number recognizing unit for recognizing each derivation number in each background effect from the number pattern determined by the pattern determining unit.

  According to the configuration of the means 74, the random number for pattern selection is extracted before the transition to the high-probability expected production, the random number for pattern selection, the lottery result (third result or fourth result), and pattern distribution The frequency pattern is determined based on the table. Here, the number pattern is a combination of the number of times of derivation of each background effect, and is set so that the number of times of derivation in at least one background effect is different between the number of times patterns. Therefore, when one number pattern is determined, the number of derivations in each background effect is recognized from the number pattern, and each background effect is recognized each time. In this way, by grouping each derivation count as a pattern, it is possible to set the total number of high-probability expected large productions (total derivation count) to an appropriate number, and to set the derivation count for each background effect. Can be changed irregularly. That is, it is possible to reliably prevent the number of executions of the entire high-probability expected large effect from becoming extremely long or extremely short, while changing the number of derivations for each background effect.

  Means 75: In any one configuration of means 1 to means 74, “the high-probability expected large effect has a plurality of background effects that are sequentially switched as the game progresses, as the background of the main effect, In the case where the lottery result is the third result, the probability that the background effect switching will be delayed is higher than in the case where the lottery result is the fourth result.

  According to the configuration of the means 75, in the high-probability expected large effect, the background effect is sequentially switched as the game progresses. For this reason, even if the appearance of the high-probability expectation production continues for a predetermined number of times, it is possible to prevent the content of the production from changing and getting bored with the production. In addition, since the possibility of the third result, that is, the possibility of shifting to the high-probability state effect, increases as the background effect changes more slowly, the player will also pay attention to the change of the background effect. . In other words, if it is assumed that “the transition to the high-probability state effect after the same effect is derived a certain number of times”, only whether or not the effect continues to appear is noticed. However, according to the present invention, since it is hoped that the background effect does not change, the content of the effect can be noted.

Means 76: In the structure of means 75, “the display control means
Derived number determination means for determining the number of derivations for each background effect in the high-probability expected large effect based on lottery;
Production execution means for sequentially executing the high-probability expected large production having each of the background productions for each derivation number determined by the derivation number determination unit;
When the lottery result is the fourth result, after all the high-probability expected large effects are finished, the high-probability expected large effect is shifted to the normal state effect, and the lottery result is the third result In addition, after the completion of all the high-probability expected large effects, further comprising an effect transition control means for shifting from the high-probability expected large effects to the high-probability state effect,
The derivation number determining means includes
A first derivation number table indicating the relationship between the derivation number for each background effect and the selection rate of the derivation number, which is used when the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result;
Used when the lottery result is the third result, showing the relationship between the number of derivations for each background effect and the selection rate of the number of derivations, and having more derivations than the first derivation times table A second derivation number table set so that the selection rate of
A derivation number random number extracting means for extracting a derivation number random number for determining the derivation number;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the number of derivations for each background effect is determined based on the extracted derivation random number and the first derivation number table, and the lottery result of the lottery means Is the third result, the number of derivations for each background effect is determined based on the derivation number random number and the second derivation number table ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 76, the high probability expected large effect has a plurality of background effects that can be derived in a predetermined order, and the number of derivations of the high probability expected large effect is set for each background effect. Is done. In particular, the number of times each background effect is derived is determined based on a lottery (random number or table), and is determined before the transition to the high-probability expected effect.

  When the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, after all the high-probability expected productions are finished, the process shifts to the normal state effect. On the other hand, when the lottery result is the third result, all the high results After the end of the probabilistic expectation production, the process shifts to the high probability state production. That is, whether or not the transition is made to the high-probability state effect, each background effect is derived by the number determined by the lottery, so that the contents of the effect and the change of the background can be fully enjoyed. In other words, the background variation pattern becomes more complex and the change can be difficult to predict compared to a case where the number of derivations is constant. In addition, each background effect can be derived an appropriate number of times compared to the one that draws whether or not to develop each time the effect is executed. On the other hand, it can be prevented from being bored by repeated for a long time.

  Moreover, in order to determine the derivation number for each background effect, a first derivation number table used when the lottery result is the fourth result and a second derivation number table used when the lottery result is the third result Is provided. Both derivation count tables store the relationship between a plurality of derivation counts and their respective selection rates (distribution), but the second derivation count table has more derivation counts than the first derivation count table. It is set so that the selectivity on the side is high. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the derivation number determining means determines the derivation number for each background effect based on the derivation number random number and the first derivation number table, while the lottery result is the third result. In the case of the result, the derivation number for each background effect is determined based on the derivation number random number and the second derivation number table. Thus, by determining the number of derivations using different derivation number tables corresponding to the lottery results of the lottery means, the number of derivations for each background effect is different between the third result and the fourth result. As a result, the background effect switching in the case of the third result can be more easily delayed than in the case of the fourth result.

Means 77: In the constitution of means 76, “the first derivation number table and the second derivation number table include a plurality of number patterns obtained by grouping the derivation numbers of the respective background effects, and The relationship with selectivity,
When the derivation number random number is extracted, the derivation number determination means extracts the number pattern corresponding to the derivation number random number from the first derivation number table or the second derivation number table, and is extracted Based on the number pattern, the number of derivations for each background effect is determined ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 77, the number pattern is determined based on the derivation number random number and the first derivation number table or the second derivation number table. Here, the number pattern is a combination of the number of times of derivation of each background effect, and is set so that the number of times of derivation in at least one background effect is different between the number of times patterns. Therefore, when one number pattern is determined, the number of derivations in each background effect is recognized from the number pattern, and each background effect is recognized each time. In this way, by grouping each derivation count as a pattern, it is possible to set the total number of high-probability expected large productions (total derivation count) to an appropriate number, and to set the derivation count for each background effect. It can be changed arbitrarily. For example, even if the total number of high-probability expected large productions is equal to each other, it is possible to increase the number of derivations of the previous background effect by making the derivation number in the last background effect relatively short, It becomes possible to delay the switching of the background relatively.

  Means 78: In the constitution of means 77, “the display control means restricts the total number of derivations of the high-probability expectation effect to less than a certain number when the lottery result is the fourth result, and the lottery result In the case of the third result, further includes a number limiting means for limiting the number to a certain number of times. "

  According to the configuration of the means 78, the total number of derivations obtained by accumulating all the derivation times, that is, the number of times that all high-probability expected large effects are continuously executed is limited. Specifically, when the lottery result is the fourth result, the total derivation number is limited to less than a predetermined number, and when the lottery number is the third result, the total derivation number is limited to a certain number. In other words, if the transition to the high-probability state effect is not performed, the high-probability expected large-scale production less than a certain number of times is performed, and then the normal state is restored. It will develop after a high-probability expectation production is performed. Therefore, the player hopes that the high-probability expected large-scale production will be performed continuously for a certain number of times, and even if a relatively monotonous production is repeated, the player will be frustrated and frustrated. There is no. In other words, the longer the number of derivations of the high-probability expected production, the higher the sense of expectation, so that the game motivation can be increased by repeating the production. Further, since the third result has a larger total number of derivations than the fourth result, it is possible to relatively increase the number of derivations of the individual background effects for the third result.

  Means 79: In the structure of means 78, “the predetermined number of times is given a specific benefit that is predicted based on a probability that the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state occurs in the probability variation state. It is more than the number of predicted fluctuations until the end of "."

  By the way, if the probability variation state is caused by the third advantageous gaming state, after a high probability expectation production is derived, when a certain period of time (that is, the number of lotteries predicted based on the winning probability) elapses, It can be predicted that an advantageous gaming state or a second advantageous gaming state will occur (i.e., a particular benefit will be awarded). However, since whether or not the lottery means is successful is determined only by random numbers, there are cases in which neither the first advantageous gaming state nor the second advantageous gaming state occurs even though a lot of lotteries are performed. In this case, the player becomes aware that “the predetermined profit was given due to the fourth advantageous gaming state and the probability fluctuation state did not occur”. There is a risk of giving up continuation.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 79, when the lottery result is the third result, even if the number of lotteries predicted to be in the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state elapses, If the game state is not advantageous, the transition is made to the high probability state effect. In other words, “the probability variation state has not occurred”, the high probability state effect is caused to appear at the timing when the player starts to be aware of the end of the game. Therefore, the joy due to the appearance of the high-probability state effect can be further increased, and the game can be suppressed from being ended even though the probability fluctuation state is hidden.

Means 80: “An effect display means for displaying an effect accompanying the game;
A decorative movable body that appears in front of the recording effect display means and moves based on a display mode;
A first special symbol indicator for displaying the first special symbol;
A second special symbol indicator for displaying a second special symbol;
A first start port that is arranged in the game area and in which a game medium can be won;
First winning state detecting means for detecting that the game medium has won at the first starting port;
First lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of the game medium by the first winning state detecting means;
First display mode determining means for determining a stop symbol of the first special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means;
The first special symbol is varied based on the detection of the game medium by the first winning state detecting means, and the variation of the first special symbol is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the first display mode determining means. First special symbol variation control means;
A second start port arranged in the game area and capable of winning a game medium;
Gaming state determination means for determining whether or not a specific gaming state;
A winning rate changing means for increasing the frequency of changing the second starting port to a state in which a winning of the game medium is possible when it is determined by the gaming state determining means that the game state has been reached;
Second winning state detecting means for detecting that the gaming medium has won a prize at the second starting port;
Second lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of the game medium by the second winning state detecting means;
Second display mode determination means for determining a stop symbol of the second special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means;
The second special symbol is changed based on the detection of the game medium by the second winning state detection means, and the change of the second special symbol is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the second display mode determination means. A second special symbol variation control means;
A display control means for specifying a display mode relating to the lottery based on the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display means;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of,
When the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and at least the specific profit is obtained in the subsequent lottery. Change in the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is set in a probability fluctuation state in which the probability to be given is set higher than normal and fluctuates in the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator First advantageous gaming state control for giving an advantageous gaming state for a short gaming state in which the time is set to be relatively shorter than usual and the ease of winning a prize at the second starting port is increased more than usual. Means,
When the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability variation state is not generated. A second advantageous gaming state control means for imparting an advantageous gaming state in which the short-time gaming state is maintained until at least the number of changes in the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number;
When the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the third result, the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and the gaming state at the time of the lottery is at least A third advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state that generates the probability varying state but not the short-time gaming state when not in the probability varying state and the short-time gaming state;
When the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means grants the predetermined profit to the player, but the advantageous gaming state does not occur. Four advantageous gaming state control means,
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
High probability expectation small effect indicating that a probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means,
In addition, it is an effect that can appear when a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected small effect, and it is highly possible that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means A common production execution means capable of executing the high-probability expected production shown in FIG.
As the display mode unique to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is established in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, The game machine is characterized by having a third specific performance execution means that can execute "."

  Here, as the “specific game state”, a so-called probability variation game state or a short-time game state can be exemplified, but even in other game states, if the game state is advantageous for the player, It can be applied as a specific gaming state.

  According to the configuration of the means 80, at least the first start port and the second start port are provided in the game area, and when it is detected that the game medium has won the first start port, A lottery is performed by the first lottery means. In addition, when it is detected that a game medium has been won at the second starting port, a lottery is performed by the second lottery means based on the detection. On the other hand, there is provided a special symbol display that displays the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result. The first special symbol variation control means varies the first special symbol in the first special symbol display, Stop at the first special symbol determined based on the lottery result of one lottery means. Similarly, the second special symbol variation control means varies the second special symbol on the second special symbol display and stops at the second special symbol determined based on the lottery result of the second lottery means. . In other words, when a game medium wins at one of the start openings, the special symbol corresponding to that start opening fluctuates, and when a game medium wins at both start openings, two special symbols fluctuate. To do.

  In the present invention, when the gaming state determination means determines that a specific gaming state has been reached, the frequency at which the second starting port is changed to a state in which a gaming medium can be won is increased. In other words, since it is extremely difficult to win game media at the second starting port during normal times, a lottery is performed mainly based on winning at the first starting port and a display related to one type of lottery. The mode is often derived to the display means. On the other hand, when a specific gaming state is reached, it is possible to easily win game media for the second starting port. For this reason, the opportunity that the lottery by the 1st lottery means and the lottery by the 2nd lottery means are performed increases, and the advantage in a specific gaming state improves.

In the present invention, it is possible to alternatively generate at least four types of advantageous gaming states as “winning”.
The first advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the first result. When this hits, a specific profit is first given to the player. Further, for each subsequent lottery, a probability that a specific profit is given is set to be higher than usual (a so-called “probability fluctuation state”). In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that fluctuate on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator is shortened and the ease of winning a prize at the second starting port is increased more than usual. (So-called “time-saving gaming state”).

  The second advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the second result. At this time, a specific profit is given to the player as in the “first advantageous gaming state”. However, for the subsequent lottery, the probability does not change and the normal probability (low probability) is obtained, so it is difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation. However, in the “second advantageous gaming state”, after a specific profit is given, the short-time gaming state is entered until the number of changes of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number.

  The third advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the third result. In this win, first, a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, for the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than the normal time (so-called “probability fluctuation state”).

  The fourth advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the fourth result. In this win, as in the “third advantageous gaming state”, a predetermined profit is given to the player. However, for the subsequent lottery, neither a probability fluctuation state nor a short-time gaming state is newly generated.

  In the third advantageous gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated, and for the effect display means, the same effects as in the fourth advantageous gaming state (normal state effect, high probability expectation small effect, and Since a high-probability expected production) can appear, it cannot be visually distinguished compared to the “fourth advantageous game state”. In other words, even when the “fourth advantageous gaming state” occurs, it can be assumed that “the third advantageous gaming state may be present”, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. .

  In particular, when a predetermined effect state is reached, a decorative movable body appears in front of the effect display means and moves based on the display mode. For this reason, it is possible to visually recognize the combination of the image by the effect display means and the effect by the three-dimensional ornament, and it is possible to greatly enhance the visual interest. In addition, the decorative movable body can appear and appear and suddenly appear in a predetermined production state, so that the player can be surprised and excited, and the game motivation can be increased.

Means 81: “A special symbol display on which a special symbol is displayed;
A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of the game medium by the winning state detecting means;
Display mode determination means for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
Special symbol variation control means for varying the special symbol based on the detection of the game medium by the winning state detecting means and stopping the variation of the special symbol at the stop symbol determined by the display mode determining means;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for giving a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability that at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is higher than usual. The probability variation state is set to a higher value, and the variation time of the special symbol that varies on the special symbol display is relatively shorter than usual, and the ease of winning a prize at the start port is higher than usual. A first advantageous gaming state control means for giving an advantageous gaming state to be a short gaming state when increased;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and at least the number of changes in the special symbol is not generated without causing the probability fluctuation state. Second advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state in which the short-time gaming state is reached until a predetermined number of times;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result, the predetermined profit granting means grants the predetermined profit to the player, and the gaming state at the time of the lottery is not at least the probability variation state and the time reduction Third advantageous gaming state control means for giving an advantageous gaming state that does not become the short-time gaming state while generating the probability variation state when it is not a gaming state;
And when the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit, but the fourth advantageous game state control means does not cause the advantageous gaming state to occur. A main board having
An effect display means for displaying an effect associated with the game;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
A decorative movable body that appears in front of the effect display means and is movable based on the display mode by the display control means;
Decorative design variation control means for causing the effect display means to change the decorative design and stopping the decorative design at a predetermined design based on the lottery result,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result or the second result, after displaying the decorative symbol related to the lottery result, a hit display means for displaying "winning",
And when the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result or the fourth result, it comprises a peripheral board having a winning state implicit means for making it unclear to the player which is the hit,
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
High probability expectation small effect indicating that a probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means,
In addition, it is an effect that can appear when a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected small effect, and it is highly possible that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means A common production execution means capable of executing the high-probability expected production shown in FIG.
As the display mode specific to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is established in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, The game machine is characterized by having a third specific performance execution means that can execute "."

  According to the configuration of the means 81, the content of the control is shared between the main board and the peripheral board, and the main board performs a predetermined lottery based on the gaming state and also changes the special symbol on the special symbol display to draw the lottery. Based on the result, a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol is executed. Further, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, any one of “first advantageous gaming state”, “second advantageous gaming state”, “third advantageous gaming state”, and “fourth advantageous gaming state” It makes it possible to make a hit. In the “first advantageous gaming state” or “second advantageous gaming state”, a specific profit is given to the player, and in the “third advantageous gaming state” or the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, there is an advantage over the specific profit. Give a certain low profit. Further, in the “first advantageous gaming state” and the “third advantageous gaming state”, the gaming state is set to a probability variation state, and the probability that a specific profit is given next time is set higher than usual. However, when the “third advantageous game state” is generated when the probability variation state is not the short-time game state, the short-time game state such as the “first advantageous game state” is not generated. That is, the state is visually indistinguishable compared to the case of the “fourth advantageous game state (small hit)”.

  On the other hand, on the peripheral board, the decorative symbol is changed on the effect display means, and the decorative symbol is stopped at a predetermined symbol based on the lottery result. In the case of the “first advantageous game state” or the “second advantageous game state”, the decorative symbol relating to the lottery result is displayed, and then “winning” is derived to the effect display means. On the other hand, in the case of the “third advantageous game state” or the “fourth advantageous game state”, it is unclear to the player which player is hit. That is, as the effects that can appear on the effect display means, there are a plurality of effects (normal state effects, high-probability expected small effects, and high-probability expected large effects), and one effect is derived from them. . Therefore, when a specific profit is granted, the indication of “hit” makes it easy to recognize the type of hit, while when a given profit is granted, which win It is possible to suppress the decrease in the willingness to play due to the “fourth advantageous gaming state”.

  Further, when the predetermined effect state is reached, the decoration movable body appears in front of the effect display means and moves based on the display mode, so that the image by the effect display means and the effect by the three-dimensional decoration are visually recognized. It is possible to greatly enhance visual interest.

  In addition, it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects without increasing the burden on the main board by causing the peripheral board to perform the decorative pattern variation control and the determination of whether or not the lottery means.

Means 82: “A special symbol display on which a special symbol is displayed;
A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
A winning determination random number extracting means for extracting a winning determination random number based on the winning state detected by the winning state detecting means;
A winning symbol random number extracting means for extracting a winning symbol random number based on the winning state detected by the winning state detector;
Fluctuation time random number for extracting the variation display pattern random number (variation time random number) used for determining the special symbol variation display pattern (variation time) based on the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number Extraction means,
A hit determination table showing the relationship between the extracted random number for hit determination and the success / failure of the hit,
A winning symbol table showing a relationship between the extracted random number for winning symbol and the variable stopping symbol which is variable and stopped as a lottery result in the special symbol indicator,
A table for setting a variation time for hitting which shows a relationship between the random number for variation time to be extracted and used and the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display;
Outgoing variation time setting table that shows the relationship between the variation time random number that is used and extracted and the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display,
When the hit determination random number is extracted, a hit determination means for determining whether or not a hit is determined from the hit determination random number and the hit determination table;
When the winning symbol random number is extracted, stop symbol determining means for determining a variable stopping symbol in the special symbol indicator from the corresponding symbol random number and the symbol symbol for winning symbol,
When the variation time random number is extracted and determined to be a hit by the success / failure determination means, the variation time of the special symbol is determined from the variation time random number and the hit variation time setting table. On the other hand, if the random time for variation time is extracted and it is determined that the variation determination means is out of place, the variation time of the special symbol is determined from the variation time random number and the out-of-range variation time setting table. To determine the variable time determining means,
In accordance with detection of the game medium by the winning state detection means, the special symbol display starts to change the special symbol, and after the variation time determined by the variation time determination means has elapsed, the stop symbol determination means Special symbol variation control means for halting variation at the determined variation suspension symbol;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for giving a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of
When it is determined that the first hit is determined by the success / failure determination means, the probability that the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means and at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery The probability variation state is set higher than normal, and the variation time of the special symbol that is varied by the special symbol indicator is relatively shorter than normal, and the winning at the start opening is easy. First advantageous gaming state control means for giving an advantageous gaming state to be a short gaming state when increasing
When it is determined that the second winning is determined by the success / failure determining means, the specific profit is provided to the player by the specific profit giving means, and at least the special symbol is generated without generating the probability variation state. Second advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state in which the short-time gaming state is kept until the number of times of fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times,
When it is determined that the third win is determined by the success / failure determination means, the predetermined profit is provided to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and the gaming state at the time of the lottery is at least in the probability variation state A third advantageous gaming state control means for giving an advantageous gaming state that does not become the short-time gaming state, although the probability variation state is generated when it is not in the short-time gaming state;
A fourth advantageous gaming state in which an advantageous gaming state does not occur, although the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means when it is determined that the fourth hit is determined by the success / failure determining means Control means,
And a main control means having a command transmission means for transmitting a control command including a change display command corresponding to a variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, at least whether or not each hit is present,
Effect display means for displaying decorative designs,
A decorative movable body that appears in front of the effect display means and is movable based on the display mode by the display control means;
Decorative design variation control means for causing the effect display means to change the decorative design, receiving a control command transmitted from the main control means, and stopping the decorative design at a predetermined design based on the control command;
A display control unit that specifies a display mode related to the lottery based on the control command and derives the display mode to the effect display unit,
When it is determined that the first hit or the second hit is determined by the success / failure determination means, a hit display means for displaying "hit" after displaying a decorative design,
And a sub-control means having a winning state implied means for making the player uncertain which is the winning position when it is determined by the winning / decision determining means to be the third hit or the fourth hit. And
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result by the success / failure determination means is the third hit or the fourth hit,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
High probability expectation small effect indicating that a probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means,
In addition, it is an effect that can appear when a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected small effect, and it is highly possible that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means A common production execution means capable of executing the high-probability expected production shown in FIG.
As the display mode specific to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result by the success / failure determination means is the third hit and not the fourth hit,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is established in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, The game machine is characterized by having a third specific performance execution means that can execute "."

  According to the configuration of the means 82, the main control means extracts the winning determination random number and the winning design random number based on the gaming state detected by the winning state detecting means, respectively, and further changes the variation time based on these random numbers. Extract random numbers. Thereafter, whether or not to win is determined from the hit determination random number and the hit determination table. Further, the fluctuation stop symbol in the special symbol display is determined from the random symbol for winning symbol and the table for winning symbol. Furthermore, when it is determined that it is a winning, the changing time of the special symbol is determined from the random time for changing time and the table for setting the changing time per hit, while when it is determined that it is out of place. The variation time of the special symbol is determined from the variation time random number and the out-of-range variation time setting table. Then, the special symbol display unit starts the variation of the special symbol, and after the lapse of the variation time determined using the variation time variable table, the variation is stopped at the variation stop symbol determined using the hit symbol table.

  Also, if it is determined that the game is a win, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. Specifically, any one of “first advantageous gaming state”, “second advantageous gaming state”, “third advantageous gaming state”, and “fourth advantageous gaming state” based on a random number for hit determination. One advantageous gaming state is identified and executed. Note that the processing in each advantageous gaming state is the same as the configuration of the means 81, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  By the way, at the time of starting the change of the special symbol, the main control means transmits a control command including at least a success / failure command regarding the presence / absence of a hit and a change display command corresponding to the change mode of the special symbol. Then, the sub-control means receives these control commands and performs processing according to the control commands. That is, the sub-control unit recognizes the lottery result of the lottery unit based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit, and stops the decorative symbol at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result.

  In the case of the “first advantageous game state” or the “second advantageous game state”, the decorative symbol relating to the lottery result is displayed, and then “winning” is derived to the effect display means. On the other hand, in the case of the “third advantageous game state” or the “fourth advantageous game state”, it is unclear to the player which player is hit. That is, as the effects that can appear in the effect display means, a plurality of effects (normal state effect, high probability expectation small effect, and high probability expectation large effect) having the same content are provided, and one effect is derived therefrom.

  Further, when the predetermined effect state is reached, the decoration movable body appears in front of the effect display means and moves based on the display mode, so that the image by the effect display means and the effect by the three-dimensional decoration are visually recognized. It is possible to greatly enhance visual interest.

  In addition, according to this structure, it becomes possible to process complicated control comparatively easily by using a some table.

Means 83: “A first special symbol indicator on which a first special symbol is displayed;
A second special symbol indicator for displaying a second special symbol;
A first start port that is arranged in the game area and in which a game medium can always win,
A second start opening that allows a game medium to be awarded when placed in the game area and opened;
First winning state detection means for detecting that a game medium has won a prize at the first start opening;
Second winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has won a prize at the second starting port;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
Gaming state determination means for determining whether or not a specific gaming state;
A winning rate changing means for increasing the frequency of changing the second start port to a state in which the gaming medium can be won, when it is determined by the gaming state determining means that the game state has been reached;
First winning determination random number extracting means for extracting a first winning determination random number based on the winning state detected by the first winning state detection means;
A second winning determination random number extracting means for extracting a second winning determination random number based on the winning state detected by the second winning state detection means;
A first winning design random number extraction means for extracting a first winning design random number based on the winning status detected by the first winning status detection means;
A second winning design random number extraction means for extracting a second winning design random number based on the winning status detected by the second winning status detection means;
The first variation display pattern random number (first variation time random number) used for determining the variation display pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol is used for the first hit determination random number and the first hit symbol Random number extraction means for first variation time to extract based on random numbers,
The second variation display pattern random number (second variation time random number) used for determining the variation display pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is used as the second hit determination random number and the second hit symbol. A random number extracting means for second variation time extracting based on a random number;
A first hit determination table showing a relationship between the extracted first hit determination random number and the winning / failing of winning,
A second hit determination table showing a relationship between the extracted second hit determination random number and whether or not a win is won,
A first winning symbol table showing a relationship between the extracted random number for the first winning symbol and the first variation stop symbol that is fluctuated and stopped as a lottery result in the first special symbol indicator;
A second winning symbol table showing a relationship between the extracted random number for the second winning symbol and the second variable stop symbol that is changed and stopped as a lottery result in the second special symbol indicator;
A first hit time variation time setting table showing a relationship between the first variation time random number to be extracted and extracted and the first special symbol variation time in the first special symbol display;
A second hit time variation time setting table showing a relationship between the second variation time random number to be extracted and extracted and the second special symbol variation time in the second special symbol display;
A first off-time variation time setting table showing a relationship between the first variation time random number to be extracted and extracted and the first special symbol variation time on the first special symbol display;
A second off-time variation time setting table showing a relationship between the second variation time random number to be extracted and the variation time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display;
When the first hit determination random number is extracted, first hit determination means for determining whether or not a hit is determined from the first hit determination random number and the first hit determination table;
When the second hit determination random number is extracted, second hit determination means for determining whether or not a hit is determined from the second hit determination random number and the second hit determination table;
When the first per symbol random number is extracted, the first stop symbol for determining the first variation stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator from the first per symbol random number and the first per symbol symbol table Decision means,
When the second per symbol random number is extracted, a second stop symbol for determining a second variation stop symbol in the second special symbol indicator from the second per symbol random number and the second per symbol table Decision means,
When the first variation time random number is extracted and determined to be a hit by the first success / failure determining means, the first variation time random number and the first variation time variation time setting table When determining the variation time of the first special symbol, on the other hand, when the first variation time random number is extracted and determined to be out of place by the first hit / fail determination means, the first variation time random number and First variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the first special symbol from the first out-of-range variation time setting table;
When the second variation time random number is extracted and determined to be a hit by the second success / failure determination means, the second variation time random number and the second variation time variation time setting table When the variation time of the second special symbol is determined, on the other hand, when the second variation time random number is extracted and determined to be out by the second success / failure determination means, the second variation time random number and Second variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the second special symbol from the second out-of-range variation time setting table;
The first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display in accordance with the detection order of the game media by the first winning status detection means and the second winning status detection means. Is determined by the first stop symbol determination unit or the second stop symbol determination unit after the variation time determined by the first variation time determination unit or the second variation time determination unit elapses. Special symbol variation control means for varying and stopping the first variation stop symbol or the second variation stop symbol;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for giving a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of
When it is determined that the first hit is determined by the first hit / fail determination means or the second hit / fail determination means, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit giving means, and at least in the subsequent lottery The probability that the specific profit is given is set to a probability fluctuation state that is set higher than normal, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol that fluctuates in the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. (2) The advantageous game state that gives a short game state when the variation time of the special symbol is made relatively shorter than normal time and the ease of winning a prize at the second starting port is increased more than usual is provided. One advantageous gaming state control means,
When it is determined by the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination means that the second win is achieved, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability variation state is set. A second advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state in which the short-time gaming state is maintained until at least the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times without being generated;
When it is determined by the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination means that the third win is achieved, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit and at the time of the lottery. A third advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state that generates the probability varying state but not the short-time gaming state when the gaming state is not at least the probability varying state and not the short-time gaming state;
When it is determined that the first win / loss determination means or the second win / fail determination means is the fourth hit, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit, but an advantageous gaming state occurs. Fourth advantageous gaming state control means,
And a main control having command sending means for sending a control command including at least a success / failure command relating to the presence / absence of each hit and a change display command corresponding to a change mode (change time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Means,
Production display means for displaying the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol,
A decorative movable body that appears in front of the effect display means and is movable based on the display mode by the display control means;
A first decorative design that causes the effect display means to change the first decorative design, receives a control command transmitted from the main control device, and stops the first decorative design at a predetermined design based on the control command. Variation control means,
A second decorative design that causes the effect display means to change the second decorative design, receives a control command transmitted from the main control device, and stops the second decorative design at a predetermined design based on the control command. Variation control means,
A display control unit that specifies a display mode related to the lottery based on the control command and derives the display mode to the effect display unit,
When the determination result of either the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination, which can be performed sequentially or in parallel, is the first hit or the second hit, a decoration symbol related to the hit / failure determination means is displayed. A hit display means for displaying "winning" after
In addition, when the judgment result of either the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination that can be performed sequentially or in parallel is the third hit or the fourth hit, it is determined which game is hit. A sub-control means having a winning state apocalyptic means to make the person unclear
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination means is the third hit or the fourth hit,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
High probability expectation small effect indicating that a probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means,
In addition, it is an effect that can appear when a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected small effect, and it is highly possible that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means A common production execution means capable of executing the high-probability expected production shown in FIG.
As the display mode unique to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination means is the third hit and not the fourth hit,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is established in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, The game machine is characterized by having a third specific performance execution means that can execute "."

  According to the configuration of the means 83, the main control means extracts the first winning determination random number and the first winning design random number based on the gaming state detected by the first winning state detecting means, Extract random numbers for first variation time based on random numbers. Thereafter, whether or not to win is determined from the first hit determination random number and the first hit determination table. Further, the first variation stop symbol in the first special symbol display is determined from the first hit symbol random number and the first hit symbol table. Furthermore, when it is determined that the winning is, the changing time of the first special symbol is determined from the first changing time random number and the first changing time setting table, and on the other hand, it may be out of place. If determined, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from the first variation time random number and the first deviation variation time setting table. Then, the first special symbol display starts the variation of the first special symbol, and after the lapse of the variation time determined using the first variation time variable table, the first symbol determined using the first hit symbol table is used. Fluctuate and stop with one variable stop symbol.

  Similarly, the main control means extracts the second winning determination random number and the second winning design random number based on the gaming state detected by the second winning state detection means, and based on these random numbers. Extract random numbers for second variation time. Thereafter, whether or not to win is determined from the second hit determination random number and the second hit determination table. Further, the second variation stop symbol in the second special symbol display is determined from the second per symbol random number and the second per symbol table. Furthermore, when it is determined that the winning is, the changing time of the second special symbol is determined from the second changing time random number and the second hitting time changing time setting table, and on the other hand, it may be out of place. If determined, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from the second variation time random number and the second outlier variation time setting table. Then, the second special symbol display unit starts the variation of the second special symbol, and after the lapse of the variation time determined using the second variation time variable table, the second special symbol display unit is determined using the second hit symbol table. Fluctuate and stop with the double-variable stop symbol.

  Further, the main control means is configured to increase the frequency of changing the second start port to a state in which a game medium can be won when the gaming state becomes a specific gaming state. For this reason, in normal times, lottery will be performed based on the winning at the first starting opening, and the first special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner. It becomes easy to win, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is often performed in order.

  Further, when it is determined that the game is a win, after the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped from being changed, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Specifically, based on the first winning determination random number or the second winning determination random number, “first advantageous gaming state”, “second advantageous gaming state”, “third advantageous gaming state”, and “fourth One of the advantageous game states is identified and executed. Note that the processing in each advantageous gaming state is the same as the configuration of the means 10, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  By the way, in the main control means, at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, at least a winning / missing command relating to the presence / absence of winning in both lottery means, and a fluctuation display command corresponding to the fluctuation mode of these special symbols are included Send a control command. Then, the sub-control means receives these control commands and performs processing according to the control commands. That is, the sub-control means recognizes the lottery results of the first lottery means and the second lottery means by the control command transmitted from the main control means, and based on those lottery results, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are recognized. Stop at a predetermined stop pattern.

  In the case of the “first advantageous game state” or the “second advantageous game state”, the decorative symbol relating to the lottery result is displayed, and then “winning” is derived to the effect display means. On the other hand, in the case of the “third advantageous game state” or the “fourth advantageous game state”, it is unclear to the player which player is hit. That is, as the effects that can appear in the effect display means, a plurality of effects (normal state effect, high probability expectation small effect, and high probability expectation large effect) having the same content are provided, and one effect is derived therefrom.

  Further, when the predetermined effect state is reached, the decoration movable body appears in front of the effect display means and moves based on the display mode, so that the image by the effect display means and the effect by the three-dimensional decoration are visually recognized. It is possible to greatly enhance visual interest.

  In addition, it has any one structure of means 1 to means 83, and "the first special symbol display on which at least the first special symbol is displayed and the second on which the second special symbol is displayed. "With a special symbol indicator, and changing the first special symbol based on the winning to the first starting port, and changing the second special symbol based on the winning to the second starting port" The following configurations (configurations of the means 84 to 88) can be adopted.

  Means 84: “The first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed according to the detection order of the game medium by the first winning state detecting unit and the second winning state detecting unit, and the first display mode determining unit Or, it further comprises special symbol fluctuation control means for stopping fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the stop symbol determined by the second display mode determining means.

  According to the configuration of the means 84, since the two types of special symbols change sequentially according to the winning order of the game media, it is possible to prevent the two lotteries from being performed in parallel, and thus the big hit state is overlapped and executed. It is possible to prevent the complexity of the production contents and the unnaturalness of the game.

Means 85: In the configuration of the means 84, “if the game medium is detected by the first winning state detection means during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first number is set to a certain number of times as an upper limit. A first holding / digesting means for storing the starting memory number and causing the first special symbol to be changed by the stored first starting memory number;
When the game medium is detected by the second winning state detecting means during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second starting memory number is stored up to a certain number of times, and the first It further comprises a second holding / digesting means that allows the two special symbols to be changed by the stored second start-up memory number ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 85, the holding / digesting process is performed for both the first lottery means and the second lottery means, and the first winning state is detected during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When a game medium is detected by the means, the first start memory number is stored up to a predetermined number of times, and the first display mode is derived by the stored first start memory number. In addition, when a game medium is detected by the second winning state detection means during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second start memory number is stored up to a certain number of times and the second start memory number is stored. Derivation of the display mode is sequentially performed by the number of stored second start memory numbers. In particular, since the variation of the two types of special symbols is sequentially derived according to the winning order of the game media, even if there is a difference in the ease of winning for the two starting points, the proportion according to the ease of winning For example, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of effects due to the fact that only one start memory number is left and a corresponding display mode is continuously derived.

Means 86: In the configuration of means 85, “the first lottery means extracts a first hit determination random number based on the winning state detected by the first winning state detection means. Having means,
The second lottery means has a second winning determination random number extracting means for extracting a second winning determination random number based on the winning state detected by the second winning state detection means,
The first display mode determining means has first winning symbol random number extracting means for extracting a first winning symbol random number based on the winning state detected by the first winning state detector.
The second display mode determining means has second winning design random number extraction means for extracting a second winning design random number based on the winning status detected by the second winning status detection means,
Random number storage means capable of storing the extracted first random number for determination, the second random number for determination, the first random number for symbol, and the second random number for symbol; Random number storage means comprising m storage areas respectively associated with the value of the total start memory number (“1” to “m”), which is the sum of the first start memory number and the second start memory number Further comprising
The first holding / digestion means is:
When the game medium is detected by the first winning state detection means during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first starting memory number has not reached the upper limit, The value of the first start memory number is increased by “1”, and at least the first hit determination random number and the first hit design random number are extracted. The extracted random numbers and these random numbers are the first lottery means. A first holding control means for storing a determination flag indicating that the random number is a random number in a storage area corresponding to the value of the total starting storage number;
If the total starting memory number is not “0” after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, the determination flag stored in the storage area corresponding to the total starting memory number “1” is used. In addition, it is determined whether or not the random number stored in the storage area is a random number related to the first lottery means, and if it is a random number related to the first lottery means, it corresponds to the total starting storage number “1”. The first hit determination random number and the first hit design random number are read from the storage area, the first start storage number is decreased by “1”, and each random number value stored in each storage area n And a first digestion control means for shifting the discrimination flag to n-1 storage areas,
The second holding / digestion means is:
When the game medium is detected by the second winning state detection means during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the second starting memory number has not reached the upper limit, The value of the second start memory number is increased by “1”, and at least the second hit determination random number and the second hit design random number are extracted. The extracted random numbers and these random numbers are the second lottery means. A second holding control means for storing a determination flag indicating that the random number is a random number in a storage area corresponding to the value of the total starting storage number;
If the total starting memory number is not “0” after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, the determination flag stored in the storage area corresponding to the total starting memory number “1” is used. In addition, it is determined whether or not the random number stored in the storage area is a random number related to the second lottery means, and if it is a random number related to the second lottery means, it corresponds to the total starting storage number “1”. The random number for determination of the second hit and the random number for symbol of the second hit are read from the storage area, the value of the second starting storage number is decreased by “1”, and each random value stored in each storage area n And a second digestion control means for shifting the discrimination flag to an n-1 storage area.

  According to the configuration of the means 86, the first lottery means extracts the first winning determination random number based on the winning state at the first starting port, and determines whether the first winning lottery is successful based on the random value. . Similarly, the second lottery means extracts a second determination random number based on the winning state at the second starting port, and determines whether or not the second winning lottery is successful based on the random value. On the other hand, the first display mode determining means extracts the first winning design random number based on the winning state detected by the first winning state detecting means, and based on this random number value, whether or not the first winning lottery is determined. The stop symbol corresponding to the result is determined. Similarly, the second display mode determining means extracts a second winning design random number based on the winning state detected by the second winning state detecting means, and based on the random number value, the second winning lottery The stop symbol corresponding to the result of the success or failure is determined.

  By the way, when a game medium wins at the first starting port or the second starting port, a random number for determination and a random number for winning symbol are extracted based on the winning state, but the first special symbol or the second special symbol When winning a prize during a change, the display mode determined based on these random numbers cannot be derived immediately. Therefore, these extracted random numbers are stored in a predetermined storage area as start-up storage, and are sequentially read out from the storage area when a new first special symbol or second special symbol can be changed.

  By the way, in the present invention, since the first lottery and the second lottery are performed and the respective starting memory numbers are counted individually, the first lottery means is used as the random number storage means for storing the extracted random numbers. If the first random number storage unit corresponding to the second random number storage unit corresponding to the second extraction unit is provided, and each random number storage unit is constructed from a plurality of storage areas, Values (for example, “1” to “4”) can be associated with a predetermined number (for example, four) of storage areas. In other words, the first lottery means will be described. When a game medium is won at the first starting slot, the first starting memory number is increased by “1”, and the extracted random number is stored in correspondence with the value of the first starting memory number. On the other hand, after the derivation (variation display) of the first display mode or the second display mode is completed, it is stored in the storage region associated with the value of the first start memory number. It is possible to read the random number value. The same applies to the second lottery means, and the random number value corresponding to the second reserved value can be stored and read out independently of the first starting stored number.

  However, the first random number storage means (multiple storage areas) corresponding to the first lottery means and the second random number storage means (multiple storage areas) corresponding to the second lottery means are separately constructed in this way. Then, since each lottery means is not associated with the winning order of the game media, it is difficult to specify one random number storage means according to the winning order. In other words, in order to derive the display mode according to the winning order of the game media, a storage means for storing the correspondence between the type of lottery and the winning order must be provided separately, and the processing contents in the hold / digestion are accordingly reduced. The complexity increases and the required capacity of the storage means increases.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 86, a common random number storage means is provided as means for storing the random numbers extracted in the two lotteries. The random number storage means has a total start memory number (“1” to “m”) that is the sum of the first start memory number corresponding to the first lottery means and the second start memory number corresponding to the second lottery means. It consists of m storage areas each associated with a value.

  The first lottery means will be described. When a game medium is detected by the first winning state detection means while any special symbol is changing, the first starting memory number has reached the upper limit (for example, “4”). If not, the value of the first start memory number is increased by “1”, and at least the first hit determination random number and the first hit design random number are extracted. Further, each extracted random number and a discrimination flag indicating that these random numbers are random numbers relating to the first lottery means are stored in a storage area corresponding to the value of the total start memory number. After that, when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, that is, when it becomes possible to vary the new special symbol, the total of the starting memory number is not “0”. Based on the determination flag stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting storage number “1”, it is determined whether the random number stored in the storage area is a random number related to the first lottery means, and the first lottery means Is read, the first hit determination random number and the first hit symbol random number stored in the storage area are read out, the value of the first start memory number is decreased by “1”, and each storage Each random number value and determination flag stored in the area n are shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  On the other hand, the same applies to the second lottery means. When a game medium is detected by the second winning state detection means during any special symbol change, the second starting memory number is set to the upper limit (for example, “4”). If not reached, the value of the second start memory number is increased by “1”, and at least the second hit determination random number and the second hit design random number are extracted. Further, each extracted random number and a discrimination flag indicating that these random numbers are random numbers relating to the second lottery means are stored in a storage area corresponding to the value of the total start memory number. Thereafter, when a new special symbol can be changed, the random number stored in the storage area is related to the second lottery means based on the determination flag stored in the storage area corresponding to the total starting storage number “1”. It is determined whether or not it is a random number, and if it is a random number related to the second lottery means, the second hit determination random number and the second hit symbol random number stored in the storage area are read and the second start The value of the stored number is decreased by “1”, and each random number value and the determination flag stored in each storage area n are shifted to n−1 storage areas.

  As described above, when a game medium wins one of the first start opening and the second start opening, each random number is extracted, and the extracted random numbers are stored in the storage area in the order of winning. Therefore, it becomes possible to associate the winning order of the game media with the random value. Moreover, in addition to the extracted random number, a determination flag indicating the type of the lottery means is stored in each storage area, so when deriving the display mode, is it derived as the first special symbol for the first lottery means? It is possible to determine whether to derive the second special symbol for the second lottery means. In addition, since the pending digest process in the two lottery means can be executed by one random number storage means, the reserve digest process is simplified and the capacity of the storage means is reduced.

Means 87: “The first decorative design is changed by the effect display means in accordance with the change of the first special design, and the first decorative design is stopped at a predetermined stop design based on the lottery result of the first lottery means. First decorative design variation control means for causing,
A second decorative symbol is changed by the effect display means in accordance with the change of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol is stopped at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result of the second lottery means. It further includes a decorative symbol variation control means. ”

  According to the configuration of the means 87, at least a decoration symbol is derived as the contents of the effect relating to each lottery means, and the decoration symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the first decorative symbol variation control means varies the first decorative symbol and stops the first decorative symbol at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result of the first lottery means. The second decorative symbol variation control means varies the second decorative symbol and stops the second decorative symbol at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result of the second lottery means. That is, when the game medium wins at the first start port and the second start port, the decorative symbol sequence is sequentially changed and stopped.

Means 88: In the structure of means 87, “having a common decorative symbol sequence associated with both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol,
It further comprises a decorative symbol sequence fluctuation control means for changing the common decorative symbol sequence by the effect display means when either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol is variably displayed. To do.

  By the way, the first decorative design and the second decorative design can be sequentially changed, and are not changed at the same timing. Therefore, when displaying the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol on the display means, only one decorative symbol may be selectively displayed while switching the display state. However, according to this, the display screen is frequently switched, and there is a fear that the player may be hard and annoyed by the change of the display screen. In order to alleviate this burden, etc., it is possible to make the respective decorative symbols the same or similar to each other, but according to this, the displayed decorative symbol is the first lottery means applied to the first lottery means. It is difficult to identify whether it is a decorative symbol or a second decorative symbol related to the second lottery means. On the other hand, it is also conceivable to divide the display screen into a first decorative design area and a second decorative design area so that two decorative designs are always displayed. However, according to this configuration, one of the areas is always meaningless display, i.e., no change, and the display area for one decorative design is halved. There is a concern that it will be difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 88, the display means displays the first decorative design and the second decorative design, and further displays a common decorative design sequence associated with both decorative designs at the same time. When either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol is variably displayed, the common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as a common decorative symbol sequence) also varies. Therefore, by recognizing the display position of a fluctuating decorative symbol among the decorative symbols displayed at the same time, it is possible to easily grasp which lottery is being performed, and to produce an effect by a decorative symbol sequence. The contents and stop symbols can be recognized by the common decorative symbol sequence. In other words, even if the size of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is relatively small, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of fluctuation, and accordingly, the display area of the common decorative symbol sequence is increased, for example, the entire screen It is possible to produce a powerful effect by displaying a common decorative design row.

  Means 89: The structure of any one of Means 1 to 88 is characterized in that “the gaming machine is a pachinko machine”. A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium, which is a medium that a player inputs into the gaming machine, and a game medium, which is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player, are the same. For example, it is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, and “typical state detection means for detecting the state of entrance to the entrance (typically, game state detection) represented by what is generally called“ digipachi ” Means), a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the entry is detected by the entrance state detecting means, and a special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. "In addition, what further includes an effect display means for causing a decorative symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols to change and display characters etc. at a predetermined timing while the special symbols are changing", Generally represented by what is commonly referred to as “Honeymono” “Represented by those having lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in the role”, generally represented by “Alepati” For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls such as 16, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out in accordance with the manner of entering the game balls into a plurality of entrances in one game. can do.

  According to the configuration of the means 89, the pachinko machine can achieve any of the operational effects of the means 1 to means 88.

  Means 90: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 88, “the gaming machine is a pachislot machine”. A pachislot machine is used to insert a medal, which is a game medium, and after a medal is inserted, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever), and then a stop This is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of an operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  According to the means 90, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the operational effects of means 1 to means 88 can be achieved.

  Means 91: The structure of any one of Means 1 to 88 is characterized in that “the gaming machine is a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine”. Here, “a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused” means that a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as one unit of input medium, and after the input medium is input, the starting operation means A symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed in response to an operation of the operation lever (for example, an operation lever), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in response to an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  According to the means 91, in a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, any of the effects of means 1 to means 88 can be achieved.

  At first glance, there is a game medium in a game machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the medium to be inserted, such as a pachislot machine exemplified above or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even with such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that a game played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

In this way, in the present invention, even if a low-winning hit occurs, the player can be inferred that the win is a high-winning advantage, and a decrease in the willingness to play is suppressed. be able to. Moreover, since the possibility that the probability fluctuation state has occurred is gradually increased by the effects that appear in stages, a decrease in expectation can be suppressed. In particular, since the decorative movable body appears in front of the effect display means and moves based on the effect, attention can be paid to the contents of the effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the end of the game due to a decrease in game motivation as much as possible.

It is a front view which shows the whole front side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the main body frame was opened by the one side of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and the front frame was opened by the one side of the main body frame. It is a perspective view which isolate | separates the main body frame and game board of a pachinko machine, and shows from diagonally upper right front. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine from upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover body, various control boards, etc. from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows a main-body frame simple substance from diagonally upper right back. It is a back perspective view of a game board. It is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of a game board having a game area. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally backward. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main control board box, a sub control board box and the like in FIG. 12 are removed. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a game board and shows from diagonally forward. It is a front view of a former main character. It is a perspective view which shows the front main character from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the front main character from diagonally backward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the front main character and shows from diagonally forward. It is an enlarged front view which expands and shows the stage vicinity of a front main character. It is a perspective view which shows a right-and-left decoration movable body and a decoration body drive unit. (A) is a perspective view which shows a left decoration movable body from diagonally backward, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a left decoration movable body and shows from diagonally forward. (A) is a perspective view which shows a right decoration movable body from diagonally backward, (B) is an exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a right decoration movable body and shows from diagonally forward. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the left decorative movable body drive unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the right decorative movable body drive unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a decoration movable body on either side. It is a perspective view which shows the main winning a prize mouth unit, the game area decoration body, and the discharge | emission guidance member from diagonally forward. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the principal part of the starting port in a main winning opening unit, (B) is the side view. (A) is a perspective view which shows the principal part of the attacker apparatus in a main winning opening unit, (B) is the side view. It is a perspective view which shows a main winning opening unit from diagonally backward lower side. It is a back perspective view which shows the decoration body in a game area | region from diagonally backward. It is sectional drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball | bowl in the main winning a prize port unit, a game area decoration, and a discharge guide member. It is a perspective view which shows a back main character from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a rear main character and shows from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a rear main character and shows from diagonally backward. It is a perspective view which shows the 1st movable accessory unit in a back main actor from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a 1st movable accessory unit for every main part, and shows from diagonally forward. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the 1st movable combination in a 1st movable combination unit, and shows from diagonally forward, (B) is an enlarged front view which shows the lens part in a 1st movable combination. It is a perspective view which shows the 1st movable combination drive unit in a 1st movable combination unit from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows a 1st movable accessory drive unit from diagonally backward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a 1st movable accessory drive unit for every principal part. It is a disassembled perspective view further disassembled and shown than FIG. (A) is a perspective view which shows the 1st raising / lowering member in a 1st movable accessory drive unit, (B) is an exploded perspective view of a 1st raising / lowering member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 1st movable accessory solenoid in a 1st raising / lowering member, and a rotation transmission member. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd decoration movable body unit in a back main decoration body from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a 2nd decoration movable body unit for every principal part, and shows from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the 2nd decoration movable body in a 2nd decoration movable body unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd decoration movable body drive unit in a 2nd decoration movable body unit from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a 2nd decoration movable body drive unit for every main part. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows further than FIG. (A) is a perspective view which shows the 2nd raising / lowering member in a 2nd decoration movable body drive unit, (B) is an exploded perspective view of a 2nd raising / lowering member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd decoration movable body solenoid in a 2nd raising / lowering member, and a link mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows a decoration movable body unit cover from diagonally forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part of a decoration movable body unit cover. It is a part of block diagram which shows a control structure roughly. It is another part of the block diagram which shows a control structure schematically. It is a front view of the game field which shows the state where the decoration movable body in the front main character turned to the approximately perpendicular direction. FIG. 56 is a front view of a game area showing a state in which the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body of the rear decorative body are further moved from the state of FIG. 55. It is a front view of the game field showing the state where the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body of the rear decorative body are moved. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate, and the process at the time of a power-off occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol and special electric accessory control process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening prize process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern setting process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fluctuation | variation in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game start process in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game start process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric utility jackpot control process in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory small hit control process in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a sub integration board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the 16ms steady process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a sub integration board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in a 16ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process in a 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the background selection process in a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the special background process in a background selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the Katakata 1A background process in a special background process. It is a flowchart which shows Katakata 1B (2) background processing in special background processing. It is a flowchart which shows the talk 1 background process in a special background process. It is a flowchart which shows the talk 2 background process in a special background process. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 1st lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 2nd lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding an advantageous game state. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the normal lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the production | presentation display control and decoration design variation control in an electrical decoration control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is explanatory drawing which shows a winning probability, distribution, state transition, etc. in the big hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the winning probability in the normal lottery, the opening time of a 2nd start port, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a specific production | presentation and the display of a pending | holding state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state transition of an effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the background image in a big hit state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the background image in a small hit state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an item distribution table and an item conversion table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the Katakata selection table at the time of the 4th hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a slot production | presentation distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a continuous derivation number table, an accessory Katakata notice effect distribution table, and an Katakata final distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fall point distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode number distribution table in a talk production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode number distribution table in a talk production. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure with respect to a 1st normal state effect. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure with respect to a 2nd normal state effect. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure with respect to a high probability expectation small production. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure with respect to a high probability expectation large production. It is a specific production example in the first normal state production. It is a specific production example in the first normal state production. It is an example of a specific effect in the second normal state effect. It is an example of a specific effect in the second normal state effect. It is a specific example of production in a high probability expectation small production. It is a specific example of production in a high probability expectation small production. It is a specific example of production in a high probability expectation production. It is a specific production example in a high probability state production.

Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine] A description will be given based on FIGS. 1 and 2.
FIG. 1 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened on one side of the outer frame of the pachinko machine and the front frame is opened on one side of the main body frame. It is. In FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the decorative member in the game area is omitted.
The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape using upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. On one side of the front surface of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 is attached by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[Configuration of Main Body Frame] A description will be given based on FIGS. 1 and 3.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main frame of the pachinko machine and the game board separated from the front right and diagonally.
The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12, and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 2). A main body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the front frame body 11, and a hinge pin and a hinge are connected to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed by a hole. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is configured by the outer frame side hinge tool 14, the main body frame side hinge tool 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting plate 17. In addition, in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[Configuration of Front Frame] A description will be given based on FIGS. 1 and 2.
The front frame 4 is mounted on one side of the front surface of the front frame body 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30 so as to be opened and closed forward by a hinge mechanism 36. Yes. In addition, a substantially circular opening window 38 through which the game area 37 of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. Further, a window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is mounted on the window frame 39. . Further, substantially the entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, around the opening window 38, a side decoration device 52 is mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic decoration device 53 is mounted on the upper portion. The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to a light source disposed on the lamp substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit. A button 59 that can be operated by the player is provided on the left side of the upper plate 51.

[Configuration of Locking Device] A description will be given based on FIGS. 2 and 3.
A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a function of locking the front frame 4 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11 The locking device 70 having both of the above is mounted. That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that detachably engage with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that detachably engage with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the front end of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. A cylinder lock 75 that is exposed through the front frame 11 and the lower front plate 30 is provided so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[Configuration of Game Board Mounting Frame] A description will be given based on FIGS. 2 to 4.
FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11, and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. . The game board 5 is formed in a substantially square plate shape having a size to be fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 (see FIG. 9). A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5, and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78. A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. It is configured to be guided to the lower plate 31. Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the game board 5 in the outer region of the guide rail 78.

  The guide rail 78 of this example corresponds to the “guide means” of the present invention.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower part on the rear side of the game board 5 receives a game ball that has flowed into the various winning devices in a portion extending from the center part to the lower part, and serves as a collective bag for guiding the game ball to a predetermined position. A box mounting base 91 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion is provided. A sub-control board box 93 in which a sub-control board 92 such as a sound control board and a lamp control board is housed is mounted on the box mounting base 91 and is superposed on the rear side of the sub-control board box 93. A main control board box 95 in which the main control board 94 is accommodated is mounted. Further, in a state where the box mounting base 91, the sub control board box 93 and the main control board box 95 are respectively mounted on the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is moved from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The box mounting base 91, the sub control board box 93, and the main control board box 95 are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the outline of the game board 5 so as to be fitted and mounted.

[Configuration of Main Body Frame Mechanism Mounted Body, Ball Tank, and Tank Rail] A description will be given based on FIGS. 7 and 8.
FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right rear, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the main body frame from diagonally upper right rear.
A tank mounting portion 111, a rail mounting portion 112, a dispensing device mounting portion 113, and the like are formed on the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3, and a ball tank 114 is mounted on the tank mounting portion 111. The ball tank 114 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape opening upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from the island facility can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 114 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 114. In addition, a discharge port 116 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 115 of the ball tank 114, and the bottom plate portion 115 is formed on an inclined surface inclined downward toward the discharge port 116. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 112 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 111 downward, and the rail component 117 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 112 so that the tank rail 118 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 111 is formed in a state where the upper lateral direction portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the rear side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 119 of the tank rail 118. An inclined rail shelf 120 that is inclined downward from one end (left end toward FIG. 8) to the other end (right end toward FIG. 8) is formed along the lower edge of the recess. An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 120 is used as a rail receiving portion 121.

  A rail constituting member 117 which is mounted on the rail mounting portion 112 and constitutes the tank rail 118 includes a rear wall portion 122 which forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 112 and the front wall portion 119, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation. The rail constituting member 117 is attached to the rail attaching portion 112 by an appropriate attachment means, thereby forming a tank rail 118 having a plurality of front and rear rows of rail passages. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 116 of the ball tank 114 (dropped by its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 118, the game balls are moved along the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage. Further, in this embodiment, the rail constituent member 117 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 122 of the rail constituent member 117. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 119 of the tank rail 118 (rail mounting portion 112) is separated from the first space portion in order to avoid interference with the upper end portion of the rear portion of the equipment (for example, an accessory) protruding to the rear side of the game board 5. It is provided in the state. In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 120 that is the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 118 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 114. In other words, the tank rail 118 is arranged rearwardly from the rear surface of the game board 5 until the rear wall portion of the ball tank 114 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 114. As a result, a first space portion is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 119 of the tank rail 118 to avoid interference with the rear portion of the equipment (for example, an accessory). .

  Above the tank rail 118, a rectifying body 123 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping each other is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 124. The rectifier 123 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.

[Configurations of Dispensing Device Mounting Unit and Ball Dispensing Device] A description will be given based on FIGS. 7 and 8.
A vertically long paying device mounting portion 113 corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 125 described below is formed in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3. The dispensing device mounting portion 113 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side. In addition, an opening 127 through which a payout motor 126 (see FIG. 3) of the ball payout device 125 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 113. Yes.

  In a state where the ball payout device 125 is mounted in the recess of the payout device mounting portion 113, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion that is substantially at the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the payout device mounting portion 113, the rear end of the rail shelf 120, the ball tank 114, the tank rail 118, and the ball payout device 125 are substantially the same surface. ing.

  The ball payout device 125 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 113, and is unitized by mounting various components related to payout. The ball payout device 125 is fitted from the rear opening of the recess of the payout device mounting portion 113 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). It has become.

  Although not shown, the ball payout device 125 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 118 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). Also, the downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are bifurcated to form front and rear rows of prize balls, a ball rental ball passage and a ball removal ball passage. In addition, a payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at a branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear part of the main body frame] A description will be given based on FIGS.
On the rear side of the front frame 11 of the main body frame 3, on one side (left side in FIG. 4) of the rear lower region of the front frame 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, A launching device unit 130 that is assembled with a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the tilted end, a launching motor 128 that operates the launching hammer, and the like, assembled on the mounting substrate 129. Is installed. In addition, a power supply board box 132 that accommodates the power supply board 131 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 133 is placed in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 132. A payout control board box 134 to be accommodated is mounted. The payout control board 133 includes a RAM for storing the number of game balls to be paid out, and transmits a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 94 to a relay circuit board (not shown). Thus, the operation of the payout motor 126 is controlled.

[Configuration of Rear Cover Body] A description will be given based on FIGS. 4 and 5.
FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine from the upper right rear.
The rear end portions of the display device control board box 135 (see FIG. 9) and the main control board box 95 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 protrude toward the window opening portion opened in the center portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. . And between the side wall part which comprises one side wall of the window opening part of the mechanism mounting body 13, and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting part 113 which comprises the other side wall, a substantially square box shape is formed by an opaque synthetic resin material. The formed rear cover body 136 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 137.

  The rear cover body 136 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 138 and a peripheral wall portion 139 protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 138. Of the peripheral wall portion 139 of the rear cover body 136, the wall portion 139 a on one side is attached and detached from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 140 formed at a total of three positions above and below the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 142 having a hinge pin 141 that can be fitted downward is integrally formed. Further, of the peripheral wall portion 139 of the rear cover body 136, the other wall portion 139 b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 113. The elastic closing body 143 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 136, the hinge pins 141 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 142 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 140 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 136 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 141, and the elastic closing body 143 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 113. The rear cover body 136 is held in a closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 136 covers the entire display device control board box 135 (see FIG. 9) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 95 by the rear cover body 136. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 94 exposed to the upper part of the main control board box 95 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the display apparatus control board) is hidden from view from behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 95 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 136. The inspection connector 144 arranged on the main control board 94 is exposed at the lower part of the main control board box 95, and the inspection connector on the main control board 94 is closed with the rear cover body 136 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 144 for inspection.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 145, 146, 147, and 148 are provided in the rear cover body 136, and internal heat is released from the large number of heat radiation holes 145, 146, 147, and 148. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 136 is provided with a number of slit-like heat radiation holes 145 extending from the peripheral wall portion 139 to the rear wall portion 138, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 138 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 146 are provided therethrough, and a large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 147 and a predetermined number of laterally rectangular heat radiation holes 148 pass through the lower portion of the rear wall 138. It is installed.

  Further, the horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation hole 148 has a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of a plurality of parallel seal portions 149 sealed by the seal screw (sealing member) of the main control board box 95. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 136 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 149 of the main control board box 95 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 148. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 136 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 149 of the main control board box 95 can be easily visually confirmed. In addition, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled compared to the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 136 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 139 of the rear cover body 136, at a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper side wall portion 139c, a power cord (not shown) is held in a substantially folded state so as to be appropriately folded. An elastically deformable cord holder 150 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 118 (the rear wall surface of the rail component member 117). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 150 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 150.

  One end of the power cord is removably connected to the board connector 152 of the distribution board 151, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet. As described above, by forming the cord holder 150 integrally with the rear cover body 136 and holding the power cord, the power cord hangs when the pachinko machine 1 is transported and stored, or it may become an obstacle. The trouble which is caught can be prevented.

[Configuration of Sphere Derivative for Lower Plate, etc. at Lower Lower Side of Main Body Frame] A description will be given based on FIGS.
6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover body and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.
A lower dish ball derivative 153 is attached to the other side portion (hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3 in the recessed portion of the rear stepped portion of the speaker box portion 16. The lower tray ball derivative 153 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connection path (not shown) from the winning ball and rental ball passage of the ball dispensing device 125 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 155 that houses the interface board 154 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower dish ball derivative 153. The interface board 154 is interposed between the ball lending machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 133, and transmits / receives a signal related to ball lending between the ball lending machine and the payout control board 133. Electrical connection is possible.

[About the configuration of the game board]
FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a configuration of a game board having a game area. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the game board from an oblique front, and FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the game board from an oblique rear. 13 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main control board box, the sub control board box and the like in FIG. 12 are removed. FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing the game board disassembled and shown obliquely from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 14, the game board 5 has a substantially circular opening 210 and a front component member including a guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 for guiding a game ball in the opening 210. 79, the front component member 79 is attached to the front side, and a plate-like game board base 212 having a plurality of through holes 211 having an appropriate shape, and the game board base 212 so as to cover the through holes 211 of the game board base 212 Main character 213 attached to the front side of the player, main prize port unit 214 and game area decoration 215, rear decoration 216 corresponding to the main character 213 and attached to the rear side of the game board base 212, and rear decoration 216 which is placed behind the game board base 212 and a play invitation that guides the game balls won in the main winning opening unit 214 to be discharged. And a member 218 mainly includes.

  In the game board 5, a game area 37 is mainly defined inside the opening 210 in the front component member 79 and on the front side of the game board base 212. In the game area 37, as shown in FIG. A large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill 219 is provided at an appropriate position in the middle of the nail, and the above-mentioned main character 213, main winning port unit 214, and game area A decorative body 215 is arranged. Note that an out-port 220 is provided at the lowermost center of the game area 37 to discharge game balls that have not won a prize-winning hole or the like from the game area 37.

  The effect display device 217 of the present example corresponds to the effect display means of the present invention. Further, the inner peripheral surface of the through hole 211 of this example corresponds to the “inner peripheral surface” of the present invention. Further, the out port 220 corresponds to the “discharge port” of the present invention.

(About the composition of the main character)
Next, a specific configuration of the main character 213 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a front view of the main character, FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the main character from an oblique front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view showing the main character from an oblique rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the main character disassembled and shown obliquely from the front. FIG. 19 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the stage of the main character in an enlarged manner. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the left and right decorative movable bodies and the decorative body drive unit. FIG. 21A is a perspective view showing the left decorative movable body obliquely from the rear, and FIG. And it is a disassembled perspective view shown from diagonally forward. FIG. 22A is a perspective view showing the right decorative movable body from obliquely rearward, and FIG. 22B is an exploded perspective view showing the right decorative movable body from obliquely forward. 23A is an exploded perspective view of the left decorative movable body drive unit, and FIG. 23B is an exploded perspective view of the right decorative movable body drive unit. Further, FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the left and right decorative movable bodies.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, the main character 213 in the game board 5 is a frame-shaped decorative body 230 formed in a frame shape, and a character body 231 attached to the lower right edge on the front side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. And a decorative member 232 that is attached to the upper edge of the front side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 and slightly to the right, and is attached to the rear side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 so as to close the opening of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. A transparent plate-shaped partition plate 233, a right decorative movable body 234 and a left decorative movable body 235 disposed on the lower front side of the upper edge of the frame-shaped decorative body 230, and a rear surface of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. And a right decorative movable body drive unit 236 and a left decorative movable body drive unit 237 for rotating the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 around predetermined axes, respectively.

  The main character 213 further includes a chucker 238 capable of detecting a game ball passing through a predetermined area in the game area 37. The chucker 238 is attached to the left edge of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 and detects a passage of the game ball, and has an opening that covers the passage detection sensor 239 from the front and allows the game ball to pass in the vertical direction. The chucker cover 240 is provided. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 37 enters from the upper side of the chucker cover 240, the chucker 238 detects the game ball by the passage detection sensor 239, and then detects the detected game ball on the lower side of the chucker cover 240. The game area 37 is returned to the game area 37 again.

  The main decorative body 213 has a frame-shaped decorative body 230 provided with a warp inlet 250 below a portion to which the passage detection sensor 238 is attached, and below the warp inlet 250 the inner side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. A warp outlet 251 is formed in the frame-shaped decorative body 230, and a warp passage 252 that connects the warp inlet 250 and the warp outlet 251 is formed inside the frame-shaped decorative body 230. The warp passage 252 is formed by closing an opening portion of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 formed in a U-shape in cross section by a part of the partition plate 233, and a game ball that flows down along the game board surface Can be taken in from the outer side (outer periphery) of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 to the inner side through the warp passage 252.

  The frame-shaped decorative body 230 of the main character 213 has a rolling surface 253 that can be continuously rolled from the warp outlet 251 of the warp passage 252 on the upper surface of the lower edge portion, and can roll the game ball in the left-right direction. A stage 256 is provided which is provided on the front side of the surface 253 and includes a weir portion 255 having a predetermined height and having open portions 254 on the left and right. In this stage 256, the game ball taken in through the warp passage 252 is rolled in the left-right direction so that various changes can be made in its movement, and the game ball rolling on the stage 256 is It flows out from the opening part 254 to the front of the stage 256. The game balls on the stage 256 are prevented from flowing out behind the stage 256 by the partition plate 233 attached to the rear side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. Further, an inclination 284 (see FIG. 11) is provided on the left end side of the stage 256, so that an appropriate potential energy can be added to the game ball taken in via the warp passage 252. As a result, the game ball is supplied to the center side of the stage 256 in a moderately vigorous state and can be rolled well, so that the player can enjoy the rolling effect of the game ball more. Further, on the left end side of the stage 256, a groove 305 is formed between the step-shaped members extending from the front end side and the rear end side of the stage 256. The groove 305 is formed with a width substantially equal to one game ball, and suppresses the shake of the game ball supplied from the warp outlet 251 (force toward the front side or the rear side of the stage 256). There is an effect as a trajectory correcting means for rolling better.

  The warp outlet 251 corresponds to the “supply port” of the present invention.

  In addition, the frame-shaped decorative body 230 of the main character 213 further includes a ball guiding path 257 for guiding the game ball on the stage 256 so as to flow down almost right above the center of the main winning prize opening unit 214. The ball guide path 257 is disposed substantially at the center so as to sandwich the left and right opening portions 254 of the stage 256, guides the game ball to the rear side of the stage 256, and below the ball guide portion 258 and on the stage 256. A ball receiving portion 259 that extends to the rear side and is capable of receiving a game ball from above, and a ball outlet that opens the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 259 below the ball guide portion 258 and on the front side of the stage 256 And a sphere guiding portion 261 that guides the fluid so as to flow out from 260. Note that a ball guiding recess 262 that protrudes rearward is formed in a substantially central lower portion of the partition plate 233, and the game ball guided to the rear side of the stage 256 by the ball guiding portion 258 is guided to the ball guiding recess 262. Thus, the ball receiving portion 259 can be satisfactorily received without flowing out to the rear side of the partition plate 233. Further, on the rear side of the stage 256, a ridge member 302 formed so as to protrude toward the front side of the stage is integrally formed from the partition plate 233. Further, the edge portion 303 of the ridge member 302 is formed obliquely with respect to the left-right direction of the stage 256, and the game ball that has collided with the edge of the opening 304 of the partition plate 233 is moved forward of the stage 256. It is configured to guide in the left-right direction instead of the side.

  Further, the frame-shaped decorative body 230 of the main character 213 has a surface on the opposite side of the warp passage 252 across the stage 256 so that the central side in the left-right direction of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 is slightly lowered. Further provided is an extended rolling surface 263 that is continuous with the rolling surface 253. The extended rolling surface 263 is taken in from the warp inlet 250 and supplied to the stage 256 at a predetermined initial speed via the warp passage 252, gets over the weir portion 255 of the stage 256 and flows out of the stage 256. This is intended to prevent this. As shown in the figure, a decorative member 301 that is a part of the character body 231 is arranged on the front side of the extended rolling surface 263. The decorative member 301 cooperates with the partition plate 233 to have a predetermined depth. Thus, even if the game ball bounces on the extended rolling surface 263, it is difficult for the game ball to drop off from the extended rolling surface 263 (see FIG. 19). In addition, the decorative member 301 is composed of a game medium arranged behind it and a member that can visually recognize various effects (transparent member 360: see FIG. 19). The rolling effect and the effect image displayed by the effect display device 217 can be viewed through the member 360, which is preferable because it does not get in the way.

  In addition, the open part 254 corresponds to the “downflow opening” of the present invention.

  The operation of the extended rolling surface 263 will be described in detail. A game ball supplied at a predetermined initial speed through the warp passage 252 rolls from the left end of the stage 256 to the right end and is placed on the extended rolling surface 263. At that time, the stage 256 is shaped so that the center thereof is low and the left and right ends are high, so that the speed of the game ball decreases as it rolls to the right end of the stage 256, but the warp path Since the speed of the game ball circulating in the 252 is different, the initial speed when supplied to the stage 256 is also different. For example, instead of the extended rolling surface 263, a ball contact portion is provided at the right end of the stage 256. If it is provided, depending on the speed of the game ball, it will be bounced by contact with the ball contact portion, get over the weir portion 255 of the stage 256 and drop off from the stage 256, so that the game ball is satisfactorily placed on the stage 256. Can no longer be dynamic, there is a possibility that not be entertained movement of game balls.

  On the other hand, in this example, the extended rolling surface 263 is provided at the right end of the stage 256, and even when a game ball that rolls at a predetermined speed reaches the right end of the stage 256, the extended rolling surface 263 is moved to. So that it can be prevented from falling off the stage 256 by being bounced at the right end of the stage 256. Further, in the extended rolling surface 263, a groove having a predetermined depth is formed in cooperation with the decorative member 301 and the partition plate 233 which are part of the character body 231, so that the game ball is formed on the extended rolling surface 263. Even if it bounces, it is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping off from the extended rolling surface 263. Furthermore, since the extended rolling surface 263 is a flat surface with the central side (left end) of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 slightly lowered, the speed of the game ball rolling from the extended rolling surface 263 to the stage 256 is increased. The game ball can be returned to the stage 256 at a suitable speed, and the game ball can be favorably rolled on the stage 256.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11, a protruding wall portion 280 and a step 281 are provided on the right end side (the bump) of the extended rolling surface 263. The protruding wall portion 280 is a member integrally formed from the frame-shaped decorative body 230, and is formed on the right end side of the extended rolling surface 263 so as to protrude toward the center side of the extended rolling surface 263. Yes. The step 281 is a member integrally formed from the extended rolling surface 263 and is formed so as to protrude upward at the right end portion of the extended rolling surface 263.

  The operation of the protruding wall 280 and the step 281 will be described in detail. A game ball supplied at a predetermined initial speed via the warp passage 252 rolls from the left end to the right end of the stage 256 and extends the rolling surface 263. Supplied on top. Here, since the speeds of the game balls flowing in the warp passage 252 are different, the initial speed when supplied to the stage 256 is also different, for example, on the extended rolling surface 263 at a relatively slow speed. When the game ball is supplied to the ball, there is a possibility that the game ball ends rolling on the extended rolling surface 263 and stays on the extended rolling surface 263 as it is. In particular, at the terminal end portion (that is, the right end portion side) of the extended rolling surface 263, the rolling energy of the game ball is attenuated by colliding with the standing wall portion 282 and the decorative member 301 by the frame-shaped decorative body 230, and the momentum is easily lost. From this, it is conceivable that the ball is in a clogged state without returning to the stage 256.

  On the other hand, in this example, since the protruding wall portion 280 is provided on the right end portion side of the extended rolling surface 263, the game ball that has rolled to the end hits the protruding wall portion 280 and moves to the stage 256 side. Is pushed back. Further, the collision with the step 281 causes the ball to be bounced and pushed back toward the stage 256, so that the possibility that the game ball stays on the extended rolling surface 263 is further reduced. Thereby, the game ball can be rolled on the stage 256 satisfactorily.

  Furthermore, in this example, an edge 283 is provided at the boundary between the stage 256 and the extended rolling surface 263.

  By the way, as described above, the stage 256 has a shape in which the vicinity of the center is low and the left and right ends are high. Further, the extended rolling surface 263 is formed as a flat surface in which the center side (left end) of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 is slightly lowered (that is, inclined so as to become lower toward the stage 256), and protrudes. A wall portion 280 and a step 281 are provided. Therefore, even if the rolling energy of the game ball rolling from the stage 256 to the extended rolling surface 263 is relatively low, it is pushed back to the stage 256 and urged to roll at a good speed. On the contrary, when a game ball is supplied from the stage 256 to the extended rolling surface 263 at a relatively high speed, that is, at a higher speed than necessary, the ball is repelled on the protruding wall 280 or the like. It can be considered that the decorative member 301 and the like are overturned and fall off from the extended rolling surface 263.

  On the other hand, in this example, since an edge 283 is provided at the boundary between the stage 256 and the extended rolling surface 263, the game ball that has rolled from the stage 256 to the extended rolling surface 263 has its rolling. The traveling direction of the dynamic motion is changed abruptly and moderately decelerated. For example, when the boundary portion between the stage 256 and the extended rolling surface 263 is integrally and smoothly formed (without the edge 283), the game ball is reduced in kinetic energy due to an increase in potential energy, and extended. Although the rolling speed is decelerated only by the energy attenuating means including the rolling surface 263, in this example, since the edge 283 is formed, the game ball is further decelerated by resistance caused by overcoming this. Therefore, since the game ball enters the extended rolling surface 263 at an appropriate speed, the possibility of dropping off excessively is reduced. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball more.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the frame-shaped decorative body 230 of the main character 213 is provided with a ball guide path 270 capable of guiding a game ball downward along the outer periphery on the left outer periphery thereof. The ball guide path 270 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface 271 of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 and the front side of the game board base 212 and extends outward so as to close the corresponding through hole 211 of the game board base 212. And a decorative flange portion 273 that extends outward at a position separated from the flange portion 272 by a predetermined distance and is decorated on the front surface. The ball guide path 270 has a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward along the board surface of the game board 5 by the outer peripheral surface 271, the flange part 272, and the decorative flange part 273 of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. It is formed, and a game ball can be distributed in the inside.

  The ball guide path 270 is provided with a plurality of protrusions (protrusions) 274 on the inner surface side (surface surfaces facing each other) of the flange portion 272 and the decorative flange portion 273, and the protrusion 274 on the flange portion 272 side The protrusions 274 on the decorative flange portion 273 side are alternately formed at positions that do not face each other. The ball guide path 270 has a plurality of protrusions 274 so that the game balls flowing down the ball guide path 270 come into contact with the protrusions 274, thereby reducing the flow speed of the game balls and increasing the flow speed of the game balls. Can be suppressed. The ball guide path 270 is formed so as to guide the game ball to the vicinity of the lower side of the main winning opening unit 214.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the ball guide path 270 guides the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 37 to the vicinity of the lower side of the main winning opening unit 214. When the game ball is guided by the game ball, the possibility of winning the main prize opening unit 214 is reduced. Therefore, the game ball can be driven so that the game ball is not guided to the ball guide path 270. Becomes monotonous and can prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, when the game ball is guided by the ball guide path 270, the flow rate of the game ball is suppressed by the projection 274, so that the game ball is prevented from being released from the ball guide path 270 and released. Prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the main prize opening unit 214, the game area decoration body 215, etc., or even if it comes into contact, the speed is reduced to reduce the impact as much as possible. It is possible to prevent 214 and the like from being damaged.

  Next, the configurations of the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235, and the right decorative movable body drive unit 236 and the left decorative movable body drive unit 237 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. First, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 of the main character 213 are rotatable between a horizontal state extending in a substantially horizontal direction and a vertical state extending in a substantially vertical direction. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 24, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are configured to be continuous decorative bodies when in a horizontal state, and there are a plurality of decorative elements on the front side. Characters (in this example, alphabets) are three-dimensionally shaped, and these characters become predetermined words when the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are integrated.

  The right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 include a decorative portion 291 in which the character portion 290 is a translucent member, a frame-shaped main body portion 292 disposed on the rear side of the decorative portion 291, A light emitting substrate 294 provided with a plurality of LEDs 293 disposed in the main body 292, a back plate 295 disposed on the rear side of the light emitting substrate 294 and closed within the frame of the main body 292, and extending rearward from a predetermined position. And a rotation shaft 296. A mounting boss 297 having a screw hole is formed on the rear side of the decorative portion 291, and a through hole 298 is formed in the back plate 295 at a position corresponding to the mounting boss 297 of the decorative portion 291. By screwing a screw (not shown) into the mounting boss 297 through the through hole 298 from the rear side of the back plate 295 with the main body 292 and the light emitting substrate 294 sandwiched between the decorative portion 291 and the back plate 295. These are assembled together (see FIGS. 21 and 22).

  The rotating shaft 296 is press-fitted and fixed in a mounting hole provided in the back plate 295, and the rotating shaft 296 is located near the right end of the right decorative movable body 234, and the left end portion of the left decorative movable body 235. Each is located and fixed in the vicinity. Further, each back plate 295 is formed with a protrusion 299 at a predetermined position in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 296 on the rear surface thereof. As will be described in detail later, the protrusion 299 has a right decorative movable body 234 and a left decorative movable body. This is for detecting the respective rotational positions of 235.

  On the other hand, the right decorative movable body drive unit 236 and the left decorative movable body drive unit 237 rotate the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 around the axis of each rotational shaft 296. The right decorative movable body drive unit 236 and the left decorative movable body drive unit 237 are a decorative movable body drive motor 310 for rotating the right decorative movable body 234 or the left decorative movable body 235, and a decorative movable body drive motor 310. A drive gear 312 fixed to the rotating shaft 311, a transmission gear 313 that meshes with the drive gear 312 and transmits the rotation of the drive gear 312, and meshes with the transmission gear 313 to rotate the right decorative movable body 234 or the left decorative movable body 235. An output gear 314 to which the moving shaft 296 is fixed, a decorative movable body drive motor 310 that can be attached to the rear surface, a gear casing 315 that can accommodate the drive gear 312, the transmission gear 313, and the output gear 314, and a gear casing 315 Through-hole 3 through which the rotating shaft 296 of the right decorative movable body 234 or the left decorative movable body 235 can pass. And a front plate 317 having a 6 (see FIG. 20, FIGS. 23 and 24).

  In the right decorative movable body drive unit 236 or the left decorative movable body drive unit 237, when the decorative movable body drive motor 310 is driven to rotate, the drive gear 312 fixed to the rotation shaft 311 rotates, and the drive gear 312 The rotation is transmitted to the output gear 314 via the transmission gear 313, and the rotation shaft 296 of the right decorative movable body 234 or the left decorative movable body 235 fixed to the output gear 314 rotates with the output gear 314, respectively. The right decorative movable body 234 or the left decorative movable body 235 can be rotated around the rotation shaft 296.

  The right decorative movable body drive unit 236 and the left decorative movable body drive unit 237 include a rotating member 318 that rotates with the rotation of the right decorative movable body 234 or the left decorative movable body 235, and a rotational position of the rotating member 318. And a rotational position detection sensor 319 for detecting the above. The rotating member 318 has a contact pin 320 that can contact the protrusion 299 of the right decorative movable body 234 or the left decorative movable body 235 at one end, and a detected portion 321 detected by the rotational position detection sensor 319 at the other end. And is pivotally supported on the back side of the front plate 317 so as to be rotatable at a predetermined position between the contact pin 320 and the detected portion 321. The front plate 317 is formed with an arc-shaped elongated hole 322 into which the contact pin 320 of the rotating member 318 can be inserted, and the right decorative movable body drive unit 236 and the left decorative movable body drive unit 237 are assembled. In this state, the contact pin 320 protrudes to the front side of the front plate 317 through the long hole 322, and rotates within a predetermined rotation angle range by the arc-shaped long hole 322. ing.

  As shown in the figure, the rotating member 318 has a shape that is bent by a rotating shaft supported by the shaft, and is formed so that the detected portion 321 side is heavier than the contact pin 320 side. The contact pin 320 rotates upward due to the weight difference. The contact pin 320 of the rotating member 318 is disposed at a position so as to contact the lower side of the protrusion 299 of the right decorative movable body 234 or the left decorative movable body 235, and the contact pin 320 and the detected portion 321. The protrusion 299 prevents the contact pin 320 from rotating upward due to the weight difference between the protrusion 299 and the contact pin 320. In other words, the contact pin 320 rotates and moves as the protrusion 299 rotates, and the protrusion 299, that is, the right decorative movable body 234 or the left decorative movable body is detected by detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 318. The rotational position of 235 can be detected.

  In this example, the rotational position detection sensor 319 is a photosensor, and the detected portion 321 is a shielding plate for the photosensor. Further, in this example, when the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are in the horizontal state, the detected portion 321 of each rotating member 318 is detected by the rotational position detection sensor 319, that is, the detected portion. 321 shields the photosensor.

  Here, the “right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235” correspond to the “front movable body” of the present invention. Also, the state in which the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 in FIG. 56 are substantially horizontal is the “first arrangement state” of the present invention, and the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body in FIG. The state in which 235 is substantially vertical corresponds to the “second arrangement state” of the present invention.

(About the composition of the main prize opening unit, the game area decoration, and the discharge guiding member)
Next, the configuration of the main winning a prize opening unit 214, the game area decoration body 215, and the discharge guiding member 218 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing the main winning a prize opening unit, the game area decoration body, and the discharge guiding member obliquely from the front. FIG. 26A is an enlarged perspective view showing the main part of the start port in the main winning a prize opening unit, and FIG. 26B is a side view thereof. FIG. 27A is a perspective view showing the main part of the attacker device in the main winning opening unit, and FIG. 27B is a side view thereof. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing the main winning opening unit from the obliquely rear lower side, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing the game area decoration body from the obliquely rear side. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view showing the flow path of the game ball in the main winning opening unit, the game area decoration, and the discharge guiding member.

  First, as shown in the figure, the main winning opening unit 214 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion on the front side in the left-right direction and opened upward, and disposed below the first starting port 330 and the first starting port. 330 and a pair of movable pieces 331 can be closed or opened, and the rectangular large winning opening 333 and the large winning opening 333 that are disposed below the second starting opening 332 and extend in the left-right direction can be closed. And an attacker device 335 having an opening / closing door 334 whose upper side pivots forward, and a general winning opening 336 which is arranged on both the left and right sides of the attacker device 335 and opens obliquely upward so as to be separated from each other. Note that each of the pair of movable pieces 331 is rotatably supported at one end side, and provided with a projecting pin that protrudes rearward at a position eccentric from the rotating shaft.

  The main winning opening unit 214 further includes a start port opening / closing drive unit 350 that opens / closes a pair of movable pieces 331 that open / close the second start port 332 (see FIG. 26). The start port opening / closing drive unit 350 includes a start port solenoid 352 having a plunger 351 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal direction and a left-right direction (on the game board surface) as the plunger 351 moves forward and backward in the start port solenoid 352. And a transmission member 353 that rotates about a shaft extending in the vertical direction and can move a protruding pin 337 extending rearward from the pair of movable pieces 331 in the vertical direction. The transmission member 353 is formed with a locking portion 356 that locks the flange 355 at the tip of the plunger 351 on the upper side and the rear side of the rotation shaft 354, and on the front side of the rotation shaft 354. A transmission portion 357 having a U-shaped side view through which the protruding pin 337 of the movable piece 331 is inserted is formed.

  In the main winning port unit 214, when the plunger 351 of the start port solenoid 352 in the start port opening / closing drive unit 350 moves forward, the engaging portion 356 of the transmission member 353 is pressed forward, and the transmission member 353 is rotated counterclockwise in the figure. And the height of the transmission part 357 is relatively lowered, and the projecting pin 337 of the movable piece 331 is lowered with the lowering of the transmission part 357, so that the free end side of the movable piece 331 is raised. Will be. Accordingly, the pair of movable pieces 331 are in an upright state, and the second start port 332 is closed by the pair of movable pieces 331 and the first start port 330. When the plunger 351 is retracted, the reverse operation is performed, and the free end sides of the pair of movable pieces 331 are lowered so as to be separated from each other as shown in the figure, and the second start port 332 is opened. It comes to become. In addition, in the state where the second starting port 332 is opened, the opening width is wider than the opening width of the first starting port 330 so that the game ball can easily win.

  Further, as shown in the figure, a second start port sensor 358 is provided below the start port solenoid 352, and a game ball winning the second start port 332 passes through the through hole of the second start port sensor 358. By passing, it is detected by the second start port sensor 358 and discharged from the discharge port 359 formed on the lower side of the main winning port unit 214 (see FIG. 28).

  Also, the attacker device 335 of the main winning opening unit 214 has a large winning opening sensor 370 that detects a game ball that has won a winning winning opening 333, and a rectangular shape that can close the large winning opening 333 in the left-right direction. An open / close door 334 that is pivotally supported and whose upper side is rotatable forward from an upright state, an attacker solenoid 372 having a plunger 371 that can advance and retract in the front-rear direction, and a forward and backward movement of the plunger 371 in the attacker solenoid 372 in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, a transmission member 373 that rotates around an axis extending in the horizontal direction and in the left-right direction (the direction along the game board surface) to rotate the opening / closing door 334, a prize winning opening sensor 370, the opening / closing door 334, and an attacker solenoid 372 The game ball that supports the transmission member 373 and wins the prize winning opening 333 is detected by the prize winning opening sensor 370. And a casing 375 having a guide path 374 for inducing sea urchin (see FIG. 27).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 27, the attacker solenoid 372 and the transmission member 373 are housed and supported in the casing 375 at a position on the left side and the rear side of the big winning opening 333. A contact protrusion 376 that contacts the transmission member 373 is formed at the lower left end of the open / close door 334. Further, the transmission member 373 of the attacker device 335 is disposed on the upper side of the rotating shaft 377 and is disposed on the front side of the rotating shaft 377 and the engaging portion 379 that engages with the flange 378 at the tip of the plunger 371. A contact pin 380 that contacts the contact protrusion 376 of the open / close door 334 from above is provided.

  In this attacker device 335, when the plunger 371 of the attacker solenoid 372 moves forward, the engaging portion 379 of the transmission member 373 is pressed forward, and the transmission member 373 rotates counterclockwise in the figure to rotate the rotation shaft of the transmission member 373. The contact pin 380 provided in front of 377 is rotated and lowered, and the contact protrusion 376 of the opening / closing door 334 that contacts the contact pin 380 is lowered by the lowering of the contact pin 380 so that the opening / closing door 334 has its supporting shaft core. Rotate clockwise relative to. That is, as shown in the drawing, the open side with the upper side rotated forward about the lower side of the open / close door 334 rotates from the open state to the closed state in which the open / close door 334 is substantially upright, and the big prize opening 333 is closed. It has become. When the plunger 371 of the attacker solenoid 372 is retracted, the operation reverse to the above is performed so that the upper side of the open / close door 334 rotates forward and the special winning opening 333 is opened.

  In this attacker device 335, the width in the left-right direction of the special winning opening 333 is wider than the width when the pair of movable pieces 331 are opened and the second start opening 332 is opened. The game balls are easier to win. In addition, the game ball that enters from the big prize opening 333 and is detected by the big prize opening sensor 370 is discharged directly below the main prize opening unit 214 (see FIG. 28).

  The main winning opening unit 214 has a first starting opening 330, a large winning opening 333, and a general winning opening 336 formed on the front side, and an attacker device 335, a starting opening / closing drive unit 350, etc. attached to the rear side. A unit base 381 is further provided. A ball cage 382 for guiding the game ball to the rear by a predetermined distance is formed at a position corresponding to the first starting port 330, the second starting port 332, and the general winning port 336 on the rear side of the main winning port unit base. (See FIG. 25 and FIG. 28). The main winning opening unit base 381 has an outer shape larger than that of the corresponding through hole 211 formed in the game board base 212, and an attacker device 335 attached to the rear side and a start port opening / closing drive. The unit 350 has a size that can pass through the corresponding through hole 211.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the main winning opening unit 214 is attached to the game board base 212 so that the first starting port 330 is located immediately below the ball outlet 260 in the ball guiding path 257 of the main player 213. It is fixed and is arranged so that the game ball that has flowed out from the ball outlet 260 of the main character 213 is likely to win the first starting port 330 of the main winning port unit 214.

  The main winning port unit 214 of this example is attached to the game board base 212 from the front side. More specifically, the attacker device 335 and the starting port of the main winning port unit 214 are started from the front side of the game board base 212. The opening / closing drive unit 350 is inserted into the corresponding through hole 211, the rear face of the main winning hole unit base 381 is brought into contact with the front surface of the game board base 212, and the main winning hole unit base 381 is connected to the game board base 212 with screws (not shown). By fixing to, the main winning opening unit 214 is attached to the game board base 212. At this time, the corresponding through hole 211 of the game board base 212 is hidden by the main winning port unit base 381 so as not to be seen from the front side (see FIGS. 11 and 14).

  Next, the game area decoration body 215 mainly includes a special symbol display 390, a holding lamp 391, a light emission decoration portion 393, and two general winning ports 394. This special symbol display 390 is composed of four LEDs capable of emitting a plurality of colors in this example, and in accordance with the winning of a game ball to the first start port 330 and the second start port 332, Each LED is turned off, turned on, blinked, discolored, etc., and a special symbol corresponding to each starting port is displayed.

  The hold lamp 391 is composed of four LEDs, and each LED can be turned off, blinking, and lit. The combination of blinking and lighting of these LEDs leads to the first start port 330 and the second start port 332. The number of starting suspensions due to winning of the game balls is displayed, and up to four starting suspensions can be displayed respectively.

  Further, the light emitting decoration part 393 is provided with a light emitting substrate 396 having a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting various colors on the rear side of the translucent lens part 395 arranged on the front side. The LED can emit light for decoration.

  In addition, the general prize opening 394 on the left side of the front view of the game area decoration body 215 is a drainage hole in which a winning game ball passes through the inside of the game area decoration body 215 and opens to the lower rear side of the game area decoration body 215. The gas is discharged from the outlet 397 to the outside. Also, the general winning opening 394 on the right side of the front view is such that the winning game ball is discharged from a discharge portion 398 provided substantially above the discharge port 397, and the game ball is slightly discharged from the discharge portion 398 to the right. It is designed to be discharged to the outside so that it can be guided to. The game area decoration 215 is provided with a sensor mounting portion 399 so that a game ball won in the general winning opening 394 on the left side when viewed from the front can be detected (see FIG. 29).

  The in-game area decorative body 215 is provided with a flange portion 400 extending outward from the outer shape of the corresponding through hole 211 of the game board base 212 at a substantially middle position in the front-rear direction. Then, the rear side is inserted into the corresponding through hole 211 and the rear surface side of the flange part 400 is brought into contact with the front side of the game board base 212 so as to hide the through hole 211 from the front side. Is attached to the game board base 212 with screws (not shown) from the front side thereof, so that the game area decoration body 215 is fixed to the game board base 212 (see FIGS. 11 and 14).

  Next, the discharge guiding member 218 is disposed on the rear side of the main prize opening unit 214 and the game area decoration 215 with the game board base 212 interposed therebetween, and the main prize opening unit 214 and the game fixed to the game board base 212. A game ball that is formed so as to cover a part of the in-area decoration body 215 that protrudes to the rear side from the rear surface of the game board base 212 and that has won the main prize opening unit 214 and the winning opening of the in-game area decoration body 215. Are provided with various guiding paths (see FIG. 25).

  The discharge guide member 218 includes an attachment fixing portion 411 having an insertion hole 410 that is in contact with the rear surface of the game board base 212 and through which a screw (not shown) for attachment and fixation to the game board base 212 is inserted, and a main prize opening unit. The first start port corresponding to the starting recess opening / closing drive unit 350 of 214 and the housing recess 412 that can accommodate a part of the casing 375 of the attacker device 335 and the ball cage 382 that continues from the first start port 330 of the main winning port unit 214. A ball that continues from the first start port discharge guide path 413 that guides and discharges the game ball received in 330 to the lower side of the discharge guide member 218 and the general winning port 336 arranged on the right side of the main winning port unit 214 in front view. A right general winning port outlet flow path 414 for discharging the game ball corresponding to the base 382 and received in the general winning port 336 from below the discharge guiding member 218; The left general winning opening discharge which discharges from the lower part of discharge guidance member 218 the game ball corresponding to the ball bowl 382 continuing from the general winning opening 336 arranged in the front view left side of the prize opening unit 214 and received in the general winning opening 336 A first start port sensor 416 for detecting that a game ball has won the first start port 330 by detecting a game ball flowing in the flow path 415, the first start port discharge flow path 413, and a right general prize A right general winning port sensor 417a that detects that a game ball has won the right general winning port 336 by detecting a gaming ball in the mouth discharging channel 414, and a gaming ball in the left general winning port outlet channel 415 And a left general winning opening sensor 417b for detecting that a game ball has won the left general winning opening 336.

  The discharge guiding member 218 discharges the game ball received in the two general winning ports 394 of the game area decoration body 215 to the lower side of the discharging guiding member 218 via the left general winning port discharge channel 415. It has become. Specifically, the left general winning a prize outlet discharge channel 415 receives a game ball discharged from the outlet 397 of the game area decoration body 215 and guides it to the left general winning prize sensor 417b, A second guiding portion 419 that receives the game ball discharged from the discharge portion 398 of the game area decoration body 215 and guides it to the left general winning a prize port sensor 417b. The second guide portion 419 is formed with a sensor mounting portion 420 so that a game ball in the second guide portion 419 can be detected.

  As described above, the discharge guiding member 218 detects the game balls received at the first start port 330 and the general winning ports 336 and 394 in the main prize opening unit 214 and the game area decoration body 215 and discharge guidance. It can discharge | emit below the member 218 (refer FIG. 30). It should be noted that the left general prize opening sensor is not only a game ball received in the general prize opening 336 on the left side of the main prize opening unit 214 but also a game ball received in the two general prize outlets 394 of the ornament 215 in the game area. Can also be detected, and the number of detection sensors can be reduced with respect to the number of winning holes. The game area decoration body 215 and the discharge guide member 218 are provided with a sensor attachment portion 399 and a sensor attachment portion 420, respectively, and by attaching a detection sensor of a game ball to these sensor attachment portions 399 and 420, It is possible to discriminate which of the above winning holes has received the game ball, so that each winning port can be differentiated.

(Regarding the configuration of the back decoration)
Next, the configuration of the rear decoration body 216 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 52. FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing the rear decorative body from an oblique front, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear decorative body from the oblique forward. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the rear decoration body shown obliquely from the rear. FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the first decorative movable body unit in the rear decorative body from obliquely forward, and FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing the first decorative movable body unit disassembled for each main part and shown obliquely from the front. 36A is an exploded perspective view showing the first decorative movable body in the first decorative movable body unit disassembled and shown obliquely from the front, and FIG. 36B is an enlarged front view showing the lens portion in the first decorative movable body. It is. FIG. 37 is a perspective view showing the first decorative movable body drive unit in the first decorative movable body unit obliquely from the front, and FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing the first decorative movable body drive unit from the oblique rear. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the first decorative movable body drive unit disassembled for each main part. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view further exploded than FIG. 41A is a perspective view showing a first elevating member in the first decorative movable body drive unit, and FIG. 41B is an exploded perspective view of the first elevating member. FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the first decorative movable body solenoid and the rotation transmitting member in the first elevating member. FIG. 43 is a perspective view showing the second decorative movable body unit in the rear decorative body from obliquely forward, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view showing the main part of the second decorative movable body unit disassembled from the diagonally front. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view showing the second decorative movable body in the second decorative movable body unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 46 is a perspective view showing the second decorative movable body drive unit in the second decorative movable body unit obliquely from the front. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the second decorative movable body drive unit disassembled for each main part. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view further exploded than FIG. 49A is a perspective view showing a second elevating member in the second decorative movable body drive unit, and FIG. 49B is an exploded perspective view of the second elevating member. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second decorative movable body solenoid and the link mechanism in the second elevating member. FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the decorative movable body unit cover obliquely from the front, and FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing the main part of the decorative movable body unit cover.

  After this, the decorative body 216 is attached and fixed on the rear side of the game board base 212 on the right side of the center in front view, and moves mainly in the vertical direction, and the upper part of the face including the upper jaw of a predetermined character is shaped. First decorative movable body unit 431 having 430, and mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of game board base 212 on the opposite side in the left-right direction with respect to first decorative movable body unit 431, and vertically below first decorative movable body 430 A second decorative movable body unit 433 having a second decorative movable body 432 in which the lower jaw corresponding to the first decorative movable body 430 is formed, and the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit. A decorative movable body unit cover 435 that covers the outer peripheral side and the rear side of 433, has a rectangular opening 434 in the center, and can be mounted with an effect display device 217 on the rear side, and a first decorative movable body unit. A first decorative body 436 disposed between 431 and the decorative movable body unit cover 435, and a second decorative body 437 disposed between the second decorative movable body unit 433 and the decorative movable body unit cover 435. I have.

  Thereafter, the decorative body 216 causes the first decorative movable body 430 of the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body 432 of the second decorative movable body unit 433 to approach or separate from each other. By moving each of them up and down, it is possible to perform an effect operation such that the mouth of a predetermined character opens or closes.

  Thereafter, the first decorative movable body unit 431 of the decorative body 216 moves the first decorative movable body 430 in which the upper part of the face between the upper jaw and the eyebrows of the predetermined character is shaped, and the first decorative movable body 430 in the vertical direction. And is rotated around an axis extending in the left-right direction of the game board 5 and attached to the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 which is attached and fixed to the rear surface side of the game board base 212, and the first decorative movable body drive unit 450. And a unit decoration body 451 for decoration.

  The first decorative movable body 430 of the first decorative movable body unit 431 has sunglasses 453 having a substantially black lens portion 452 and a first decorative movable body having an opening hole 454 that penetrates at a position corresponding to the eyes of the character. Light emission in which a body main body 455 and a plurality of LEDs 456 that are arranged on the rear side of the first decorative movable body main body 455 and can emit light of a predetermined color are provided on the front side through the opening holes 454 of the first decorative movable body main body 455. The base plate 457 is disposed on the rear side of the light emitting substrate 457, and includes a sunglasses 453, a first decorative movable body main body 455, and a base member 458 assembled integrally with the light emitting substrate 457. The first decorative movable body 430 corresponds to the “optical display device” of the present invention, and the LED 456 corresponds to the “light emitting means”.

  As shown in the drawing, the lens portion 452 of the sunglasses 453 in the first decorative movable body 430 has a pattern appearing on the surface according to the color of light emitted from the LED 456 of the light emitting substrate 457. Specifically, When a red light is emitted from the LED 456, a “crescent-like pattern” appears, and when a blue light is emitted from the LED 456, a “predetermined Chinese character” (here, “place”) related to the character appears. It has become. The lens portion 452 has a structure in which the “crescent-shaped pattern” and the “predetermined Chinese character” are arranged so as to overlap with each other, and the overlapped portion is colorless or white and has a translucent white portion 459. The portion where the “crescent-shaped pattern” does not overlap is the red portion 460 having red translucency, and the portion where the “predetermined Chinese character” does not overlap is the blue portion 461 having blue translucency. The other part is a black part 462 that is substantially black. The red portion 460 is the “first transmitting means” of the present invention, the blue portion 461 is the “second transmitting means”, the white portion 459 is the “overlapping portion”, and the black portion 462 is the “light-shielding member”. Each is applicable. Accordingly, red corresponds to the “first color” and blue corresponds to the “second color” of the present invention.

  In this example, since the lens portion 452 has the above-described configuration, for example, when red light is emitted from the LED 456, the red light is transmitted through the white portion 459 and the red portion 460, and the blue portion 461 and the black portion 462 are transmitted. Then, since red light is not transmitted, a “crescent-shaped pattern” by the white portion 459 and the red portion 460 appears. On the other hand, when the blue light is emitted from the LED 456, the blue light is transmitted through the white portion 459 and the blue portion 461, and the blue light is not transmitted through the red portion 460 and the black portion 462. The “predetermined kanji” will appear. As described above, by appropriately combining the colored light and the colored member having translucency, a desired pattern can be easily displayed without using an expensive display device such as an LCD. .

  By the way, the white portion 459, the red portion 460, and the blue portion 461 in FIG. 36 are replaced with the white portion 500, the red portion 501, and the blue portion 502, so that an effect using a separate new pattern can be performed. . The light transmission state in the white portion 500, the red portion 501, and the blue portion 502 is the same as that of the white portion 459, the red portion 460, and the blue portion 461, and when the red light is emitted from the LED 456, the white portion 500 and the red portion are red. A “crescent-shaped pattern” (an eye pattern of a laughing face) by the part 501 appears. On the other hand, when the blue light is emitted from the LED 456, a “crying eye pattern” by the white portion 500 and the blue portion 502 appears. In this way, the first decorative movable body main body 455 can change the facial expression of the character only with the lens portion 452 and the LED 456, which are sheet-like members, without using a relatively heavy display device such as a liquid crystal display device. A display device can be suitably added to such a movable member. In addition, since the character's facial expression can be changed relatively easily, it is possible to provide an interesting gaming machine that attracts the player's eyes strongly.

  In this example, the light-emitting substrate 457 to which the LED 456 is attached is formed as a highly light-shielding member (corresponding to the “light-shielding means” in the present invention). Specifically, a light shielding member made of a black paint or black film having a high light shielding property is provided on the back side of the light emitting substrate 457. As a result, light other than the LED 456 is prevented from entering from the rear side of the lens unit 452, and the white part 459, the red part 460, and the blue part 461 other than the black part 462 can be seen when the LED 456 is turned off. It comes to suppress. In addition, the LED 456 is used as the light source, and the wavelength band of the emitted color is narrow compared with other light sources, and the content of other color components is small, so that a desired color pattern can be more reliably displayed. It has become.

  Further, the first decorative movable body 430 is provided with a fixing portion 463 for fixing and supporting the first decorative movable body driving unit 450 on the base member 458, and the first decorative movable body is provided by the fixed portion 463. 430 is supported by the first decorative movable body drive unit 450.

  Next, the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 supports the first decorative movable body 430 and moves the first decorative movable body 430 in the vertical direction together with the first decorative movable body 430, and the first vertical movable member 470 in the vertical direction. A guide rail 471 for guiding, a first upper support member 472 for supporting the upper end portion of the guide rail 471, a first lower support member 473 for supporting the lower end portion of the guide rail 471, the first upper support member 472, and the first A first base 475 which has a mounting contact surface 474 which supports the lower support member 473 at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction and abuts against the rear surface side of the game board base 212 and is formed by bending a sheet metal; A first drive motor 477 that is disposed on the opposite side of the first upper support member 472 of the 475 and that projects through the first base 475 and the first upper support member 472 and whose rotating drive shaft 476 protrudes; A drive pulley 478 that rotates as the drive shaft 476 of the first drive motor 477 rotates, a driven pulley 479 disposed near the first lower support member 473 so as to be paired with the drive pulley 478, and a drive pulley 478 and a driven pulley 479, and a belt fixing portion 481 for connecting and fixing a part of the driving belt 480 to the first elevating member 470.

  In this example, the rotation of the drive pulley 478 by the first drive motor 477 is performed when the rotation of the drive gear 482 fixed to the drive shaft 476 of the first drive motor 477 is arranged above the drive gear 482. The drive pulley 478 is rotationally driven by being transmitted to a transmission gear 483 that meshes with 482 and rotates integrally with the drive pulley 478. By using the drive gear 482 and the transmission gear 483, the position of the drive pulley 478 is made higher than the drive shaft 476 of the first drive motor 477 so that the vertical movable range of the first elevating member 470 is increased. It has become. Further, the inner peripheral surface of the drive belt 480 is provided with engagement teeth 484 at predetermined intervals over the entire circumference, and the drive pulley 478 has engaged teeth 485 that engage with the engagement teeth 484. The rotational drive of the drive pulley 478 is reliably transmitted to the drive belt 480 by the engagement between the engaged teeth 485 and the engagement teeth 484. The driven pulley 479 is a flat pulley without engaged teeth.

  The first decorative movable body drive unit 450 is further provided with first rotation preventing means 490 for preventing the first elevating member 470 from rotating about the axial direction in which the guide rail 471 extends. The first rotation preventing means 490 includes a guide rod 491 supported at the upper and lower ends thereof by the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473, and disposed substantially parallel to the guide rail 471, and the front-rear direction. A guide member 492 that can be brought into contact with the guide rod 491 and attached to the first elevating member 470. As shown in the figure, the first rotation preventing means 490 has a guide rod 491 disposed on the right side of the guide rail 471 at a predetermined distance and a guide member 492 having a substantially U-shaped cross section. The first elevating member 470 can be satisfactorily prevented from rotating around the axis of the guide rail 471 by abutting on any one of the front and rear sides.

  In this example, the guide rail 471 and the guide rod 491 are both metal round bars, and a friction reducing layer for reducing sliding resistance is formed on the surface of the guide rail 471. The friction reducing layer is coated with, for example, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE, (for example, Teflon (registered trademark))) as a fluororesin with a predetermined thickness, and is thereby guided by the guide rail 471. The value of the dynamic friction resistance of the first elevating member 470 and the value of the static friction resistance can be made as close as possible, and when the stationary first elevating member 470 starts moving, the movement can be started smoothly, The durability of the guide rail 471 and the like can be reduced by reducing wear. Further, the surface of the guide rod 491 is chrome-plated to prevent corrosion such as rust and improve durability, and it is less expensive than the guide rail 471 and prevents an increase in cost. It can be done.

  The first decorative movable body drive unit 450 further includes a tension mechanism 493 that applies a predetermined tension to the drive belt 480. The tension mechanism 493 is guided by the guide rail 471 and rotatably supports the driven pulley 479, and one end is attached to the moving body 494 and the other end is attached to the first base 475, and the moving body 494 is moved downward. And a tension spring 495 for biasing.

  The moving body 494 of the tension mechanism 493 includes a guide hole 496 through which the guide rail 471 is inserted, a hook-shaped locking portion 498 that locks the shaft portion 497 that is opened downward and protrudes from both ends of the driven pulley 479, and a guide. A spring mounting portion 499 that is disposed between the hole 496 and the locking portion 498 and attaches one end of the tension spring 495 is provided. As a result, the driven pulley 479 can be supported by the movable body 494 in a state where the drive belt 480 is wound around the driven pulley 479, and assembly is facilitated. Further, since the drive belt 480 is pulled by the tension spring 495 between the guide hole 496 and the locking portion 498 that locks the shaft portion 497 of the driven pulley 479, the guide hole is guided with respect to the shaft of the guide rail 471. The shaft of 496 can be prevented from being greatly inclined, the sliding resistance of the moving body 494 on the guide rail 471 is prevented from increasing, the moving body 494 can move smoothly, and the moving body The posture of 494 is prevented from changing greatly, and the drive belt 480 is tensioned well.

  In the first decorative movable body drive unit 450, as shown in the figure, the drive pulley 478 is disposed on the upper side and the driven pulley 479 is disposed on the lower side, and the drive wound around the drive pulley 478 and the driven pulley 479 is driven. The belt 480 is urged downward by the tension mechanism 493 via the driven pulley 479. Further, since the first elevating member 470 is fixed to the driving belt 480, the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 is applied to the driving belt 480 and pulled downward only to one side of the driving belt 480. A force is applied, and the driving belt 480 is strongly wound around the driving pulley 478 by the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430.

  On the other hand, the upper drive pulley 478 is provided with engaged teeth 485 that engage with the engagement teeth 484 of the drive belt 480, and the drive belt depends on the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430. When 480 is tightly wound around the drive pulley 478, the engagement between the engagement tooth 484 of the drive belt 480 and the engaged tooth 485 of the drive pulley 478 becomes stronger, and the drive pulley 478 is driven by the first drive motor 477. By blocking the rotation, the rotation of the drive belt 480 is blocked, and the weights of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 are supported by the drive pulley 478 via the drive belt 480. The weight of the elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 is not applied to the lower driven pulley 479 or the tension mechanism 493. As a result, the first elevating member 470 and the like can be moved up and down satisfactorily without applying an extra load to the tension mechanism 493, and the cost of the tension mechanism 493 and the like with the urging force by the tension mechanism 493 being minimized. Can be reduced.

  By the way, when the vertical arrangement of the driving pulley 478, the driven pulley 479, and the tension mechanism 493 is reversed, the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 is applied to the driven pulley 479 via the driving belt 480. The driven pulley 479 is not provided with an engaged tooth that engages with the engaging tooth 484 of the drive belt 480, and the driven pulley 479 is configured to freely rotate. The weights of the lifting member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 cannot be supported, and the first lifting member 470 is lowered and the drive belt 480 is rotated in a predetermined direction. Further, since the driving belt 480 is pulled downward by the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 in the lower driving pulley 478, the winding force of the driving belt 480 on the driving pulley 478 is weakened. That is, the engagement between the engagement teeth 484 of the drive belt 480 and the engaged teeth 485 of the drive pulley 478 is weakened, and it becomes easy to slip.

  When slippage occurs between the drive pulley 478 and the drive belt 480, the drive belt 480 is rotated by the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 regardless of the rotation of the first drive motor 477. As a result, the first elevating member 470 is lowered, and the first elevating member 470 cannot be moved up and down satisfactorily. Therefore, it is conceivable to prevent slippage between the drive pulley 478 and the drive belt 480 by increasing the urging force by the tension mechanism 493. However, when the urging force is increased, not only the tension mechanism 493 but also the drive pulley 478, It is necessary to increase the strength of the driven pulley 479, the drive belt 480, the first base 475, and the like, which causes a problem that the cost of the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 is increased. It is desirable to arrange the pulley 478 on the upper side and the driven pulley 479 on the lower side.

  In the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 of this example, the positioning hole 510 is formed on the support surface 509 for positioning the mounting positions of the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473 on the first base 475. Are formed, and positioning protrusions 511 that fit into the positioning holes 510 are formed at the contact portions of the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473 with the first base 475, respectively. Yes. As a result, the positioning protrusions 511 of the corresponding first upper support member 473 and first lower support member 473 are fitted into the positioning holes 510 of the first base 475 and then fixed to the first base 475. Thus, the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473 can be accurately positioned at predetermined positions, and the assembly accuracy of the guide rail 471, the drive pulley 478, the driven pulley 479, and the like can be highly accurately and easily performed. Can be assembled. A mounting hole 512 for mounting and fixing to the game board base 212 is formed in the mounting contact surface 474 of the first base 475.

  In the first decorative movable body drive unit 450, as shown in the drawing, the mounting contact surface 474 of the first base 475 is provided on the upper portion of the first base 475, and the first base 475 has a first contact surface 474. Only the upper part of one base 475 is fixedly attached. Thereby, the attachment location to the game board base 212 can be decreased, and an assembly cost can be reduced. In addition, the first base 475 is fixed to the game board base 212 at the upper part, that is, fixed above the center of gravity of the weight applied to the first base 475. Even if the first base 475 is fixed only at its upper part even if it swings to the left and right around the contact surface 474, the first base 475 is in a good condition even if the first base 475 is fixed only at its upper part. It can be fixed with. That is, the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 can be satisfactorily attached and fixed to the game board base 212.

  Next, the first elevating member 470 of the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 includes a rod-like support shaft 530 on which the first decorative movable body 430 is attached and supported, and two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530. The two support bushes 532 inserted into the guide rail 471 and the two support bushes 532 having the insertion holes 533 through which the guide rail 471 can be inserted and positioned through the guide rail 471 are positioned at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. In addition, a main body 534 capable of positioning the two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and a rear side of the main body 534 and cooperating with the main body 534 The positions of the two support bushes 532 inserted through the guide rail 471 and the two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 And a bushing fixing member 535 for fixing.

  The main body portion 534 of the first elevating member 470 is formed with a stepped recess 536 into which the support bush 532 inserted into the guide rail 471 can be fitted at both ends of the insertion hole 533 and the insertion hole 533. The inner diameter is a diameter at which the guide rail 471 does not contact, and a clearance of a predetermined dimension is formed between the insertion hole 533 and the guide rail 471. In addition, a semi-cylindrical fitting recess 537 in which two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 can be fitted is formed on the main body 534 so as to face each other at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. At the same time, a semi-cylindrical housing portion 538 is formed between the two fitting recesses 537 facing each other, so that the support shaft 530 inserted and supported by the support bush 531 does not come into contact with the main body portion 534. Yes.

  On the other hand, the bush fixing member 535 of the first elevating member 470 is formed with two retaining pieces 539 that are substantially U-shaped in plan view and extend forward, and the distance between these retaining pieces 539 is the main body portion 534. The support bush fitted to the stepped recess 536 of the insertion hole 533 by the two retaining pieces 539 by assembling the bush fixing member 535 to the main body portion 534. The 532 is prevented from coming out of the stepped recess 536.

  Further, the bush fixing member 535 has a semi-cylindrical fitting in which two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the two fitting recesses 537 of the main body portion 534 on the front side. A joint recess 540 is formed, and a semi-cylindrical housing portion 541 is formed between the two fitting recesses 540. The bushing fixing member 535 is assembled and fixed to the main body portion 534 by fitting the supporting bushing 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 into the fitting concave portion 540 of the bush fixing member 535 and the fitting concave portion 537 of the main body portion 534. As a result, the two support bushes 531 are fixedly supported at positions separated by a predetermined distance. Further, the housing 538 of the main body 534 and the housing 541 of the bush fixing member 535 form a clearance having a predetermined dimension between the two support bushes 531 and the support shaft 530.

  Further, the bush fixing member 535 is formed with an extension portion 542 on the rear side thereof, which has a groove extending downward from the lower retaining piece 539 and extending in the vertical direction. The extending portion 542 holds a plurality of wiring cords connected to the light emitting substrate 457 of the first decorative movable body 430.

  As described above, by assembling the bush fixing member 535 to the main body portion 534, the support bushes 531 and 532 are fixed and supported at predetermined positions, and the guide rail 471 is provided by the two support bushes 532 and the support bush 531, respectively. The support shaft 531 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable and slidable in the axial direction thereof. The length of the insertion hole 533 of the main body portion 534 is the maximum length that does not interfere with the other members of the first elevating member 470 guided by the guide rail 471. The distance of the support bush 532 can be made as long as possible, and the backlash of the first elevating member 470 with respect to the guide rail 471 can be reduced.

  In the first elevating member 470 of this example, a first decorative movable body solenoid 551 having a plunger 550 attached to the main body 534 and capable of moving back and forth in the front-rear direction, and one end of the plunger 550 in the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 are at one end. And a rotation transmission member 553 that is fixed to the support shaft 531 so as to be integrally rotatable. The first decorative movable body solenoid 551 is disposed below the support shaft 530 at a position where the support shaft 530 and the plunger 550 intersect with each other, and the plunger 550 is advanced and retracted via the rotation transmission member 553. The support shaft 530 can be rotated around the axis within a predetermined angle range. The main body 534 and the bush fixing member 535 are each formed with an accommodation recess 554 that can accommodate a part of the rotation transmission member 553, and the rotation transmission member 553 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 554. Thus, the movement of the rotation transmission member 553 in the left-right direction can be restricted, that is, the movement of the support shaft 530 in the left-right direction (its axial direction) is restricted, and the support shaft 530 is the main body. The support bush 531 fixedly supported by the portion 534 and the bush fixing member 535 is prevented from coming off.

  A belt fixing portion 481 for fixing the drive belt 480 is attached to the main body portion 534 of the first elevating member 470 on the front side of the insertion hole 533, and an attachment portion to which the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 is attached. A guide member 492 of the first rotation preventing means 490 is attached to the lower side of 555. Reference numeral 556 in the drawing is a decorative body attached to the front side of the main body 534.

  The first elevating member 470 is provided with a position detection piece 557 on the rear side of the bush fixing member 535. The position detecting piece 557 is detected by a first decorative movable body position detection sensor 558 attached to a predetermined position of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. In this example, the first elevating member 470 is disposed at the upper end. Is detected by the first decorative movable body position detection sensor 558.

  As shown in the figure, the first elevating member 470 supports the first decorative movable body 430 by extending a support shaft 530 greatly to the left side of the insertion hole 533 through which the guide rail 471 is inserted, and at the right side of the insertion hole 533. The first decorative movable body solenoid 551 is disposed on the first through-hole 533 so that the unbalance of the left and right weight balance of the first elevating member 470 is reduced, and the guide rail 471 and the support bush 532 are provided. It suppresses uneven wear.

  Next, the unit decoration body 451 of the first decoration movable body unit 431 is attached to the left side surface of the first decoration movable body drive unit 450, as shown in the figure, and guide rails 471 of the first decoration movable body drive unit 450, The driven pulley 479, the drive belt 480, the tension mechanism 493, and the like are covered so that it is difficult to see from the front side of the game board 5, and the first decorative movable body unit 431 is decorated by decoration on the surface. A support shaft 530 extending from the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 can pass through the unit decorative body 451, and an opening 570 extending in the vertical direction so that the support shaft 530 can move in the vertical direction. It has.

  The first decorative movable body unit 431 of the present example can move the first elevating member 470, that is, the first decorative movable body 430 in the vertical direction by the rotational drive of the first drive motor 477, and also the first decorative movable body unit 431. The first decorative movable body 430 can be rotated in the front-rear direction by the movable body solenoid 551.

  In addition, the first decorative movable body unit 431 of this example is configured so that the first decorative movable body 430 supported by the support shaft 530 of the first elevating member 470 is placed on the surface of the game board 5 by the rotational drive of the first drive motor 477. Even if the guide rail 471 is moved in the vertical direction so as to be substantially along, the first rotation preventing means 490 prevents the guide rail 471 from rotating around the axis, thereby preventing the first decorative movable body 430 from unnecessarily shaking. It is possible to suppress unintentional shake and to surely perform a desired performance operation, to prevent a decrease in interest, and to make the first decorative movable body 430 larger. Thus, the first decorative movable body 430 can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the first decorative movable body 430 can be further enhanced.

  In addition, according to the first decorative movable body unit 431 of this example, the first decorative movable body 430 is moved in the vertical direction in which the guide rail 471 extends by the rotational drive of the first drive motor 477, and The decorative movable body solenoid 551 can be rotated around the axis of the support shaft 530, and the first decorative movable body 430 can perform complicated movements. As a result, the forward / backward direction of the plunger 550 in the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 is set to the substantially horizontal direction (front / rear direction). The influence of gravity can be reduced as much as possible, and the first decorative movable body 43 can be obtained by reliably moving the plunger 550 back and forth. Reliably move in it is possible to cause the desired effect operation and sufficiently to exhibit the performance effect according to the movement, interest of the player and is capable of preventing a decrease.

  Further, in the first decorative movable body unit 431 of this example, the material of the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473 is made of resin, and the material of the first base 475 is made of sheet metal. Yes. And since the magnitude | size of the 1st upper support member 472 and the 1st lower support member 473 which consist of resin can be made as small as possible, while being able to make the distortion by resin molding relatively small, accuracy Since the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473 are positioned and supported at predetermined positions by the first base 475 made of a high sheet metal, the support accuracy of the guide rail 471 can be maintained well. That is, even if the guide rail 471 is lengthened, the guide rail 471 is supported at a desired position, and the first decorative movable body 430 can be guided and guided satisfactorily by the guide rail 471 via the first elevating member 470. Thus, the first decorative movable body 430 can be moved more greatly, the presentation operation of the first decoration movable body 430 can be easily recognized, and the entertainment can be prevented from being reduced by the presentation operation. It can be done.

  Subsequently, the second decorative movable body unit 433 of the rear decorative body 216 is configured to move the second decorative movable body 432 in the up-down direction, and the second decorative movable body 432, which is a model of the lower jaw portion of a predetermined character of the first decorative movable body 430. A second decorative movable body drive unit 610 that is moved and rotated around an axis extending in the left-right direction of the game board 5 and attached to the rear surface side of the game board base 212 and attached to the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 And a unit decoration body 611 for decoration.

  The second decorative movable body 432 of the second decorative movable body unit 433 is arranged in the second decorative movable body main body 612 in which the lips and lower teeth of a predetermined character are formed, and in the jaw of the second decorative movable body main body 612. And a tongue member 613 that is shaped as a tongue of a predetermined character and has translucency, and is disposed between the tongue member 613 and the second decorative movable body main body 612 so as to emit light toward the tongue member 613. A light emitting substrate 615 having a plurality of LEDs 614, and a lens unit 616 disposed between the light emitting substrate 615 and the tongue member 613, supported by the second decorative movable body drive unit 610, and diffusing light from the light emitting substrate 615. And a base member 617 having.

  The second decorative movable body 432 is configured such that the tongue member 613 shines when the LED 614 of the light emitting substrate 615 emits light.

  Further, the second decorative movable body 432 is provided with a fixing portion 618 for fixing and supporting the second decorative movable body driving unit 610 on the base member 617, and the second decorative movable body is provided by the fixing portion 618. 432 is supported by the second decorative movable body drive unit 610.

  Next, the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 supports the second decorative movable body 432, and moves the second decorative movable body 432 up and down together with the second decorative movable body 432, and the second vertical movable member 630 in the vertical direction. A guide rail 631 for guiding, a second upper support member 632 for supporting the upper end portion of the guide rail 631, a second lower support member 633 for supporting the lower end portion of the guide rail 631, a second upper support member 632, and a second A second base 635 that supports the lower support member 633 at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction and has a mounting contact surface 634 that contacts the rear side of the game board base 212 and is formed by bending a sheet metal; A second drive motor 637 disposed on the opposite side of the second upper support member 632 and penetrating through the second base 635 and the second upper support member 632 and projecting a rotating drive shaft 636; A drive pulley 638 that rotates as the drive shaft 636 of the second drive motor 637 rotates, a driven pulley 639 that is disposed in the vicinity of the second lower support member 633 so as to be paired with the drive pulley 638, and a drive pulley 638 And the driven pulley 639, and a belt fixing portion 641 for connecting and fixing a part of the driving belt 640 to the second elevating member 630.

  In this example, the rotation of the drive pulley 638 by the second drive motor 637 is arranged so that the rotation of the drive gear 642 fixed to the drive shaft 636 of the second drive motor 637 is substantially below the drive gear 642. The drive pulley 638 is driven to rotate by being transmitted to a transmission gear 643 that meshes with the drive gear 642 and rotates integrally with the drive pulley 638. In addition, engagement teeth 644 are provided on the inner peripheral surface of the drive belt 640 at predetermined intervals over the entire circumference, and the engaged teeth 645 that engage with the engagement teeth 644 are provided on the drive pulley 638 as gears. The rotational drive of the drive pulley 638 is reliably transmitted to the drive belt 640 by the engagement of the engaged teeth 645 and the engagement teeth 644. The driven pulley 639 is a flat pulley without engaged teeth.

  The second decorative movable body drive unit 610 is further provided with second rotation preventing means 650 for preventing the second elevating member 630 from rotating around the axial direction in which the guide rail 631 extends. The second anti-rotation means 650 includes a guide rod 651 that is supported at the upper and lower ends thereof by the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 and arranged substantially parallel to the guide rail 631, and from the left-right direction. And a guide member 652 that can be brought into contact with the guide rod 651 and attached to the second elevating member 630. As shown in the figure, the second rotation preventing means 650 includes a guide rod 651 disposed on the rear side of the guide rail 631 at a predetermined distance and a guide member 652 having a substantially U-shaped cross section. By abutting on either of the left and right sides of 651, the second elevating member 630 can be well prevented from rotating around the axis of the guide rail 631.

  In this example, the guide rail 631 and the guide rod 651 are both metal round bars, and a friction reducing layer for reducing sliding resistance is formed on the surface of the guide rail 631. The friction reducing layer is coated with, for example, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE, (for example, Teflon (registered trademark))) as a fluororesin with a predetermined thickness, and is thereby guided by the guide rail 631. The value of the dynamic frictional resistance and the value of the static frictional resistance of the second elevating member 630 can be brought as close as possible, and when the stationary second elevating member 630 starts moving, the movement can be started smoothly, The durability of the guide rail 631 and the like can be reduced by reducing wear. Further, the surface of the guide rod 651 is chrome-plated to prevent corrosion such as rust and improve durability, and it is less expensive than the guide rail 631 and prevents an increase in cost. It can be done.

  The second decorative movable body drive unit 610 further includes a tension mechanism 653 that applies a predetermined tension to the drive belt 640. The tension mechanism 653 is the same mechanism as the tension mechanism 493 provided in the first decorative movable body drive unit 450. The tension mechanism 653 is guided by the guide rail 631 and rotatably supports the driven pulley 639, and one end. The movable body 654 includes a tension spring 655 that is attached to the second base 635 at the other end and biases the movable body 654 downward.

  The moving body 654 of the tension mechanism 653 includes a guide hole 656 that passes through the guide rail 631, a hook-shaped locking portion 658 that locks the shaft portion 657 that opens downward and protrudes from both ends of the driven pulley 639, and a guide. A spring mounting portion 659 is provided between the hole 656 and the locking portion 658 and to which one end of the tension spring 655 is attached. Accordingly, the driven pulley 639 can be supported by the moving body 654 in a state where the drive belt 640 is wound around the driven pulley 639, so that the assembly can be easily performed. Further, since the drive belt 640 is pulled by the tension spring 655 between the guide hole 656 and the locking portion 658 for locking the shaft portion 657 of the driven pulley 639, the guide hole is guided with respect to the shaft of the guide rail 631. The shaft of 656 can be prevented from being greatly inclined, the sliding resistance of the moving body 654 in the guide rail 631 is prevented from increasing, and the moving body 654 can move smoothly, and the moving body The posture of 654 is prevented from changing greatly, and the drive belt 480 is tensioned satisfactorily.

  In the second decorative movable body drive unit 610, as shown in the figure, the drive pulley 638 is disposed on the upper side and the driven pulley 639 is disposed on the lower side, and the drive wound around the drive pulley 638 and the driven pulley 639 is driven. The belt 640 is biased downward by a tension mechanism 653 via a driven pulley 639. Further, since the second elevating member 630 is fixed to the driving belt 640, the weights of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 are applied to the driving belt 640 and pulled downward only to one side of the driving belt 640. A force is applied, and the driving belt 640 is strongly wound around the driving pulley 638 by the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432.

  On the other hand, the upper drive pulley 638 is provided with engaged teeth 645 that engage with the engagement teeth 644 of the drive belt 640, and the drive belt depends on the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432. By strongly winding the drive pulley 638 around the drive pulley 638, the engagement between the engagement tooth 644 of the drive belt 640 and the engaged tooth 645 of the drive pulley 638 becomes stronger, and the drive pulley 638 of the drive pulley 638 is driven by the second drive motor 637. By blocking the rotation, the rotation of the drive belt 640 is blocked, and the weights of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 are supported by the drive pulley 638 via the drive belt 640, and the second The weight of the elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 is not applied to the lower driven pulley 639 or the tension mechanism 653. As a result, the second elevating member 630 and the like can be moved up and down satisfactorily without applying an extra load to the tension mechanism 653, and the cost required for the tension mechanism 653 and the like with a minimum biasing force by the tension mechanism 653 can be achieved. Can be reduced.

  By the way, when the vertical arrangement of the driving pulley 638, the driven pulley 639, and the tension mechanism 653 is reversed, the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 is applied to the driven pulley 639 via the driving belt 640. The driven pulley 639 is not provided with an engaged tooth 645 that engages with the engaging tooth 644 of the drive belt 640, and the driven pulley 639 is configured to freely rotate. The weights of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 cannot be supported, and the second elevating member 630 descends and the drive belt 640 rotates in a predetermined direction. Further, since the drive belt 640 is pulled downward by the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 in the lower drive pulley 638, the winding force of the drive belt 640 on the drive pulley 638 is weakened. In other words, the engagement between the engagement teeth 644 of the drive belt 640 and the engaged teeth 645 of the drive pulley 638 is weakened, making it easier to slip on each other.

  When slippage occurs between the drive pulley 638 and the drive belt 640, the drive belt 64 is rotated by the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 regardless of the rotation of the second drive motor 637. As a result, the second elevating member 630 is lowered, and the second elevating member 630 cannot be moved up and down satisfactorily. Therefore, it is conceivable to prevent slippage between the drive pulley 638 and the drive belt 640 by increasing the urging force of the tension mechanism 653. However, when the urging force is increased, not only the tension mechanism 653 but also the drive pulley 638, It is necessary to increase the strength of the driven pulley 639, the driving belt 640, the second base 635, and the like, which causes a problem of increasing the cost of the second decorative movable body driving unit 433. It is desirable to arrange the pulley 638 on the upper side and the driven pulley 639 on the lower side.

  In the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 of this example, a support surface 669 positioning hole 670 for positioning the mounting positions of the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 is formed in the second base 635. In addition, positioning protrusions 671 that fit into the positioning holes 670 are respectively formed at the contact portions of the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 with the second base 635. As a result, the positioning projections 671 of the corresponding second upper support member 632 and second lower support member 633 are fitted into the positioning holes 670 of the second base 635 and then fixed to the second base 635. Thus, the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 can be accurately positioned at predetermined positions, and the assembly accuracy of the guide rail 631, the drive pulley 638, the driven pulley 639, etc. can be assembled with high accuracy and ease. It is supposed to be. A mounting hole 672 for mounting and fixing to the game board base 212 is formed in the mounting contact surface 634 of the second base 635.

  In the second decorative movable body drive unit 610, as shown in the figure, the mounting contact surface 634 of the second base 635 is provided on the upper portion of the second base 635, Only the upper part of the two bases 635 is attached and fixed. Thereby, the attachment location to the game board base 212 can be decreased, and an assembly cost can be reduced. Further, the second base 635 is fixed to the game board base 212 at the upper part, that is, fixed above the center of gravity of the weight applied to the second base 635. Even if it swings left and right around the contact surface 634, it tends to return to its original position due to the gravity applied to its center of gravity. Therefore, even if the second base 635 is fixed only at its upper part, the second base 635 is excellent. It can be fixed in the state. That is, the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 can be satisfactorily attached and fixed to the game board base 212.

  Next, the second elevating member 630 of the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 includes a rod-shaped support shaft 690 on which the second decorative movable body 432 is attached and supported, and two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690. The two support bushes 692 inserted into the guide rail 631 and the two support bushes 692 having the insertion holes 693 through which the guide rail 631 can be inserted and positioned through the guide rail are positioned at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. The two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690 can be positioned at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and the main body 694 is disposed on the rear side of the main body 694 and guided in cooperation with the main body 694. The positions of the two support bushes 692 inserted through the rail 631 and the two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690 are fixed. That and a bushing fixing member 695.

  The main body portion 694 of the second elevating member 630 has stepped recesses 696 into which the support bushes 692 inserted into the guide rails 631 can be fitted at both ends of the insertion holes 693. The inner diameter is a diameter at which the guide rail 631 does not contact, and a clearance of a predetermined dimension is formed between the insertion hole 693 and the guide rail 631. In addition, a semi-cylindrical fitting recess 697 capable of fitting two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690 is formed on the main body 694 so as to face each other at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. At the same time, a semi-cylindrical housing portion 698 is formed between two opposing fitting recesses 697 so that the support shaft 690 inserted and supported by the support bush 691 does not come into contact with the main body portion 694. Yes.

  On the other hand, the bush fixing member 695 of the second elevating member 630 has two retaining pieces 699 that are substantially U-shaped in plan view and that extend forward, and the distance between these retaining pieces 699 is the main body 694. The support bush fitted to the stepped recess 696 of the insertion hole 693 by the two retaining pieces 699 by assembling the bush fixing member 695 to the main body 694. 692 is prevented from coming out of the stepped recess 696.

  Further, the bush fixing member 695 is fitted in a semi-cylindrical shape capable of fitting two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690 at positions corresponding to the two fitting recesses 697 of the main body 694 on the front side. A joint recess 700 is formed, and a semi-cylindrical housing portion 701 is formed between the two fitting recesses 700. The bushing fixing member 695 is assembled and fixed to the main body part 694 after the supporting bushing 691 inserted through the supporting shaft 690 is fitted into the fitting concave part 700 of the bushing fixing member 695 and the fitting concave part 697 of the main body part 694. By doing so, the two support bushes 691 are fixedly supported at positions separated by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. Further, the housing portion 698 of the main body 694 and the housing portion 701 of the bush fixing member 695 form a clearance of a predetermined dimension between the two support bushes 691 and the support shaft 690.

  As described above, by assembling the bush fixing member 695 to the main body 694, the support bushes 692 and 691 are fixedly supported at predetermined positions, and the guide rail 631 is supported by the two support bushes 692 and the support bushes 691, respectively. The support shaft 690 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable and slidable in the axial direction thereof. The length of the insertion hole 693 of the main body 694 is the maximum length that does not interfere with the other members of the second elevating member 630 guided by the guide rail 631. The distance of the support bush 692 can be made as long as possible, and the backlash of the second elevating member 630 with respect to the guide rail 631 can be reduced.

  The second elevating member 630 of this example includes a second decorative movable body solenoid 711 having a plunger 710 attached to the bush fixing member 695 and capable of moving back and forth in the vertical direction, and the forward and backward movement of the plunger 710 in the second decorative movable body solenoid 711. And a link mechanism 712 for rotating the support shaft 690. The second decorative movable body solenoid 711 has a flange 713 formed at the tip of the plunger 710 and a spring 714 that urges the plunger 710 in the forward direction. In this example, the plunger 710 The second decorative movable body solenoid 711 moves forward and backward from the lower side.

  The link mechanism 712 is disposed so as to extend in the front-rear direction, one end side (rear side) is rotatably supported by the bush fixing member 695, and the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 is provided between the one end side and the other end side. The first flange member 717 has a locking portion 715 that locks the flange portion 713 at the tip of the plunger 710 and a connecting portion 716 that is a long hole on the other end side, and the connecting portion 716 of the first flange member 717. And a second flange member 719 fixed to the support shaft 690 at the other end. One end of the first flange member 717 is pivotally supported by the bush fixing member 695 at a position further rearward than the plunger 710 of the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 disposed on the rear side of the support shaft 690. The other end side is disposed in front of the support shaft 690. Note that the second shaft member 719 of the link mechanism 712 is fixed to the end portion of the support shaft 690 so that the support shaft 690 is prevented from moving in the axial direction so that it does not come out of the support bush 691.

  In the second decorative movable body unit 433, when the plunger 710 of the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 is advanced (projected) by the link mechanism 712, the second decorative movable body 432 is connected via the link mechanism 712 and the support shaft 690. When the distal end (front side) is turned up and the plunger 710 is retracted (immersed), the second decorative movable body is turned down via the link mechanism 712 and the support shaft 690. Yes.

  A belt fixing portion 641 for fixing the drive belt 640 is attached to the main body 694 of the second elevating member 630 on the front side of the insertion hole 693, and a bush fixing member 695 is provided on the rear side of the insertion hole 693. A guide member 652 of the second rotation preventing means 650 is attached with being sandwiched. Reference numeral 730 in the figure denotes a decorative body attached to the front side of the main body 694.

  Further, the second elevating member 630 is provided with a position detection piece 731 on the left side of the bush fixing member 695 when viewed from the front, and the position detection piece 731 can be detected at a predetermined position of the second lower support member 633. A second decorative movable body position detection sensor 732 is attached. In this example, when the second elevating member 630 is positioned at the lower end, the position detecting piece 731 of the second elevating member 630 is detected by the second decorative movable body position detection sensor 732.

  As shown in the figure, the second elevating member 630 supports the second decorative movable body 432 by extending a support shaft 690 greatly on the right side of the insertion hole 693 through which the guide rail 631 is inserted, and the insertion hole 693. The second decorative movable body solenoid 711 is disposed on the left side of the first and second guide members 631 and the support bush so as to reduce the imbalance between the left and right weight balances of the second elevating member 630 with the insertion hole 693 interposed therebetween. 692 is prevented from being unevenly worn.

  Next, the unit decoration body 611 of the second decoration movable body unit 433 is attached to the right side surface of the second decoration movable body drive unit 610 as shown in the figure, and the guide rail of the second decoration movable body drive unit 610 is shown. 631, the driving pulley 638, the driven pulley 639, the driving belt 640, the tension mechanism 653, and the like are covered so that it is difficult to see from the front side of the game board 5, and the second decorative movable body unit 433 is attached by surface decoration. It is something to decorate. A support shaft 690 extending from the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 can pass through the unit decorative body 611, and an opening 733 extending in the vertical direction so that the support shaft 590 can move in the vertical direction. It has.

  The second decorative movable body unit 433 of this example can move the second elevating member 630, that is, the second decorative movable body 432 in the vertical direction by the rotational drive of the second drive motor 637, and the second decorative movable body unit 433. The tip of the second decorative movable body 432 can be rotated in the vertical direction by the movable body solenoid 711.

  In addition, the second decorative movable body unit 433 of the present example causes the second decorative movable body 432 supported by the support shaft 690 of the second elevating member 630 to move to the surface of the game board 5 by the rotational drive of the second drive motor 637. Even if the guide rail 631 is moved in the vertical direction so as to substantially follow, the second rotation preventing means 650 prevents the guide rail 631 from rotating around the axis, so that the second decorative movable body 432 is prevented from unnecessarily shaking. It is possible to suppress the unintentional shake and to surely perform a desired performance operation, to prevent the interest from deteriorating, and to make the second decorative movable body 432 larger. Thus, the second decorative movable body 432 can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the second decorative movable body 432 can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the second decorative movable body unit 433 of this example, the second decorative movable body 432 is moved in the vertical direction in which the guide rail 631 extends by the rotational drive of the second drive motor 637, and the second decorative movable body. The solenoid 711 can be rotated around the axis of the support shaft 690, and the second decorative movable body 432 can be complicatedly moved, so that the movement of the second decorative movable body 432 can be made difficult to get tired. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating due to tiredness.

  In addition, since the forward and backward direction of the plunger 710 in the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 is substantially vertical, the overall size of the support shaft 690 in the extending direction is increased, or the support shaft 690 and the second decorative movable body solenoid are extended. 711 becomes larger, the size of the second decorative movable body 432 supported by the support shaft 690 is relatively small when the pachinko machine 1 is provided, and the second decorative movable body 432 is hardly noticeable. The second decorative movable body 432 can be enlarged as much as possible, and the impact of the second decorative movable body 432 can be increased, and an effect that can enhance interest can be expected. It can be done. Moreover, since it can suppress that the dimension of the axial direction of the support shaft 690 becomes large, it becomes possible to make it difficult to buffer with another member, and it can be easily equipped now in the pachinko machine 1. Yes.

  Furthermore, in the second decorative movable body unit 433 of this example, the material of the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 is made of resin, and the material of the second base 635 is made of sheet metal. . And since the magnitude | size of the 2nd upper support member 632 and the 2nd lower support member 633 which consist of resin can be made as small as possible, while being able to make the distortion by resin molding relatively small, precision of Since the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 are positioned and supported at predetermined positions by the second base 635 made of a high metal plate, the support accuracy of the guide rail 631 can be maintained well. That is, even if the guide rail 631 is lengthened, the guide rail 631 is supported at a desired position, and the second decorative movable body 432 can be guided and guided satisfactorily by the guide rail 631 via the second elevating member 630. Therefore, the second decorative movable body 432 can be moved more greatly, the presentation operation of the second decorative movable body 432 can be easily recognized, and the entertainment can be prevented from being lowered by the presentation operation. It can be done.

  Further, in the second decorative movable body unit 433 of this example, the second decorative movable body 432 is held by the second elevating member 630 via the support shaft 690 at a position inside the guide rail 631 and the guide rod 651. As a result, the guide rail 631 and the guide rod 651 are arranged side by side as compared with the case where the second elevating member 630 holds the second decorative movable body 432 outside the guide rail 631 and the guide rod 651. It becomes possible to suppress an increase in the width of the direction, and it can be reduced in size as a whole, and can be easily provided in the pachinko machine 1 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be further enhanced. Yes.

  It should be noted that the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 of the present example are replaced with the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 and the second decorative movable body of the present example. The drive unit 610 corresponds to the first drive unit and the second drive unit of the present invention, respectively. Further, the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 of this example correspond to the guided member of the present invention, and the guide rail 491 and the guide rail 631 of this example correspond to the guiding member of the present invention, respectively. Further, the first upper support member 472 and the second upper support member 632 of the present example are the first support member of the present invention, and the first lower support member 473 and the second lower support member 633 of the present example are the first support member of the present invention. In the two support members, the first base 475 and the second base 635 of this example correspond to the base of the present invention, respectively. Furthermore, the first drive motor 477 and the second drive motor 637 of this example correspond to the rotational drive means of the present invention, and the tension springs 495 and 655 of this example correspond to the biasing means of the present invention.

  Further, the first rotation preventing means 490 and the second rotation preventing means 650 of the present example are the rotation preventing means of the present invention, the guide rods 491 and 651 of the present example are the guide members of the present invention, and the guide member 492 of the present example. Reference numerals 652 correspond to the guided members of the present invention. Further, the support bushes 532 and 692 of the present example are the sliding member of the present invention, the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 and the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 of the present example are transmitted to the solenoid of the present invention, and the rotation transmission of the present example. The member 553 and the link mechanism 712 correspond to the transmission means of the present invention.

  Subsequently, the decorative movable body unit cover 435 is provided with a plurality of attachment portions 750 for attaching and fixing the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433, and each of the attachment portions 750 includes screws. It consists of a hole and a positioning boss. On the other hand, screw insertion holes and positioning holes are formed at corresponding positions of the first base 475 of the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second base 635 of the second decorative movable body unit 433, respectively. By fitting the positioning boss of the part 750 into the corresponding positioning hole of the first base 475 or the second base 635, the screw hole of the mounting part 750 and the screw insertion hole of the first base 475 or the second base 635 The screw is screwed into the screw hole from the front side so as to pass through the screw insertion hole of the first base 475 or the second base 635, so that the first position is set at a predetermined position of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. The decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433 are attached.

  In addition, the decorative movable body unit cover 435 is formed with a plurality of contact surfaces 752 that contact the rear surface of the game board base 212 and have screw holes 751 through which screws can be inserted. The abutment movable body unit cover 435 is screwed into the game board base 212 via a screw hole 751 from the rear side of the abutment surface 752 by abutting against the rear surface of the board base 212 and the game board base 212. It can be mounted on.

  Note that the decorative movable body unit cover 435 of this example is attached to the first base 475 and the second base 635 in the state where the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433 are attached. The mounting holes 512 and 672 of 474 and 634 are positioned outside the outer periphery of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. Thus, the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433 are attached to the decorative movable body unit cover 435, and the mounting holes 512 and 672 of the first base 475 and the second base 635 are attached. The game board base 212 is directly attached to the rear surface side of the game board 212 with screws (not shown).

  Further, the decorative movable body unit cover 435 is provided with wiring holding means 770 at predetermined positions facing the rear sides of the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 and the second decorative movable body drive unit 610, respectively. The wiring holding means 770 is a wiring fixed at a predetermined position of a plurality of wiring cords 771 connected to the light emitting substrate 457 supported by the first lifting member 470 and the light emitting substrate 615 supported by the second lifting member 630. When the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 are moved up and down while holding the band 772, the wiring cord 771 connected to the light emitting substrates 457 and 615 is not entangled or caught between other members. It is for doing so.

  Specifically, the wiring holding means 770 is provided adjacent to a connector passage portion 773 including a through hole through which a connection connector attached to an end portion (tip portion) of the wiring cord 771 can pass, and a connector passage portion 733. The first passing portion 774 in which the wiring band 772 fixed to the wiring cord 771 is not allowed to pass and only the wiring cord 771 is allowed to pass therethrough is provided adjacent to the first passing portion 774 and is fixed to the wiring cord 771. The wiring band 772 is configured to include a second passage portion 775 that cannot pass through and only the wiring cord 771 can pass therethrough. The first passage portion 774 and the second passage portion 775 are formed in an elongated slit shape and are disposed so as to be substantially parallel to each other.

  The wiring holding means 770 communicates with the first passage portion 774 and the second passage portion 775, and the communication portion 776 that allows the wiring cord 771 to pass therethrough. The first passage portion faces the communication portion 776. 774 and a second passage 775, and further includes a protrusion 777 that protrudes in a direction substantially perpendicular to the opening surfaces of the first passage 774 and the second passage 775. In this example, the communication portion 776 is sized to allow the wiring band 772 fixed to the wiring cord 771 to pass therethrough, and the protrusions 777 are on both the front and rear sides of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. Are provided so as to protrude from each other.

  The wiring holding means 770 is configured to connect a wiring cord 771 having a wiring band 772 fixed at a predetermined position from the front side where the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433 are arranged to the rear side. It is inserted so as to pass through the passage portion 773. Subsequently, the proximal end side of the wiring cord 771 of the inserted wiring cord 771 is passed from the rear side to the front side of the decorative movable body unit cover 435 through the communication portion 776 to the first passage portion 774, and further the wiring band. The distal end side of 772 is passed through the second passage portion 775 through the communication portion 776 in the same manner from the front side to the rear side of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. Then, the wiring band 772 fixed to the wiring cord 771 is brought into contact with the opening of the first passage portion 774 (contacts with the front side of the decorative movable body unit cover 435), and the first passage portion 774 and the second passage portion. By preventing the wiring cord 771 from slackening with respect to the terminal 775, even if the wiring cord 771 is pulled from its proximal end side, it can be held so that the distal end side does not move from the wiring band 772. .

  Since the wiring holding means 770 is provided with the protruding portion 777, even if the wiring cord 771 moves along the slit-like first passing portion 774 and the second passing portion 775, the protruding portion 777 Since the movement is restricted, it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 771 from being detached from the first passage portion 774 and the second passage portion 775 via the communication portion 776.

[Functional Configuration of Main Substrate and Peripheral Substrate] A description will be given based on FIG. 53 and FIG.
53 and 54 are block diagrams schematically showing the control configuration. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate the connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate the connection and direction of the signal. The control of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is broadly divided into a group of main boards 810 (shown in FIG. 53) and a group of peripheral boards 811 (shown in FIG. 54). The group controls gaming operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 811 performs staging operations (light emitting decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display, decoration body operation, etc.) ) Is controlling.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the main board 810 includes a main control board 94 and a payout control board 133. The main control board 94 includes a CPU 812 as a central processing unit, a ROM 813 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 814 as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 812 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 813, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 811 or the payout control board 133. The RAM 814 temporarily stores various data generated in various processes executed by the main control board 94 and information such as input signals. The main board 810 is connected to the power supply board 131 via the power supply relay terminal plate 860, and operating power is supplied from the power supply board 131.

  The input interface of the main control board 94 includes a first start port sensor 416 that detects a winning state at the first start port 330 and a second start port sensor 358 that detects a winning state at the second start port 332. An all winning opening winning number counting sensor 870 for counting the number of winning with respect to the winning opening is connected. Also, a gate sensor 990 that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate via the panel relay terminal plate 866, and a right general prize port sensor that detects that a game ball has won the right general prize port 336. 417a is connected to the left general winning opening 336 to the left general winning opening sensor 417b for detecting that a game ball has been won, and via a large winning opening relay terminal plate 867 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 866. A big prize opening sensor 370 is connected. Detection signals from these sensors are input to the main control board 94. Also connected to the input interface of the main control board 94 are an inner frame opening switch 862 for detecting the opening state of the front frame body 11 and a door opening switch 863 for detecting the opening state of the front frame 4.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display substrate 869 is connected to the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 866 via a symbol limiting resistor substrate 868. The normal symbol display 928 (FIG. Reference) and a special symbol display 390 can output a drive signal. Further, an attacker solenoid 372 for driving the attacker device 335 and a starter solenoid 352 for driving the movable piece 331 are connected to the output interface of the special winning opening relay terminal plate 867. A drive signal is output.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 133 includes a CPU 815 as a central processing unit, a ROM 816 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 817 as a readable / writable memory. The payout control board 133 processes the command signal input from the main control board 94 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 125 and the launch motor 128 connected to the launch control board 865. Thereby, the ball payout device 125 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch motor 128 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal. Note that bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 94 and the payout control board 133 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 94 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 133 to the main control board 94. The payout control board 133 is also connected with a lower pan full switch 864 for detecting that the game balls stored in the lower plate 31 are full. “Notice of removal from the dish 31” is notified.

  In addition, an external terminal board 861 is connected to the main control board 94 and the payout control board 133, and the winning state to the start openings 330, 332 and the big winning opening 333, the fluctuation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, and the lottery Various information such as a gaming state based on the result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the gaming facility.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 811 includes a sub-integrated substrate 830 and a liquid crystal control substrate 832 as shown in FIG. Note that only one-way communication is performed between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main control board 94 and the sub-integrated board 830. The command is sent to but not the other way around. In addition, the power for operation is supplied from the power supply board 131 to the peripheral board 811 via the power supply relay terminal plate 860.

  The sub-integrated board 830 also has electronic components such as a CPU 834, a ROM 835, and a RAM 836, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components. In addition, the sub-integrated board 830 is provided with a ROM 883 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 882 that outputs the sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 883. It has been. Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the sub-integrated board 830 and the liquid crystal control board 832 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 217 is connected to the liquid crystal control board 832, and the liquid crystal control board 832 processes a command signal transmitted from the sub-integrated board 830, and produces an effect display device. A drive signal is output to 217. More specifically, the liquid crystal control board 832 includes a CPU 851, a RAM 857, a ROM 854, a VDP 884, and an image ROM 885. The CPU 851 receives the command signal sent from the sub-integrated board 830 via the input interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 884. The RAM 857 provides a work area for the CPU 851 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 854 holds a program for the CPU 851 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 884 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 217. A register is provided in the VDP 884 so that the operation mode of the VDP 884, setting information of various display functions, and the like can be held. Then, the CPU 851 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the effect display device 217 can be changed variously. The image ROM 885 is a nonvolatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  In addition, an electrical decoration control board 831 and a frame decoration relay terminal plate 886 are connected to the sub-integrated board 830, and the electrical decoration control board 831 corresponds to the first decorative movable body 430 as a relay terminal board. A face unit relay terminal plate 887, a lower jaw unit relay terminal plate 888 corresponding to the second decorative movable body 432, a center decorative driving unit relay terminal plate 889 corresponding to the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235, Each is connected. A first decorative movable body position detection sensor 558 for detecting the position of the first decorative movable body 430 is connected to the input interface of the face unit relay terminal board 887, and the first decorative movable body is connected to the output interface. A face unit decoration lamp 456a (LED 346) provided at 430 and a first decoration movable body solenoid 551 for rotating the first decoration movable body 430 are connected. Note that the first drive motor 477 that moves the first decorative movable body 430 up and down is directly connected to the output interface of the electrical decoration control board 831 without going through the face unit relay terminal board 887. Further, a second decorative movable body position detection sensor 732 for detecting the position of the second decorative movable body 432 is connected to the input interface of the lower jaw unit relay terminal plate 888, and the second decorative movable body 432 is provided to the output interface. The lower jaw unit decoration lamp 614 a (LED 614) and the second decoration movable body solenoid 711 for rotating the second decoration movable body 432 are connected. The second drive motor 637 that raises and lowers the second decorative movable body 432 is directly connected to the output interface of the electrical decoration control board 831 without going through the lower jaw unit relay terminal plate 888.

  A left decoration motor sensor 319a that detects the position of the left decoration movable body 235 and a right decoration motor sensor 319b that detects the position of the right decoration movable body 234 are connected to the input interface of the center decoration drive unit relay terminal plate 889. The output interfaces are connected to LEDs 293 (left decoration lamp 293a and right decoration lamp 293b) built in the right decoration movable body 234 and the left decoration movable body 235, respectively. The center decoration left drive motor 310a and the center decoration right drive motor 310b that rotate the right decoration movable body 234 and the left decoration movable body 235 are arranged on the electric decoration control board 831 without the center decoration drive unit relay terminal plate 889. Connected directly to the output interface. In addition, a panel decoration lamp 890 and a center decoration lamp 891 are also connected to the output interface of the lighting control board 831. The lighting control board 831 can also switch the lighting state of these lamps. The frame decoration relay terminal plate 886 connected to the sub-integrated board 830 is connected to the speakers 18 and 57 attached to the front frame 4, the effect selection switch 892, the frame decoration lamp 893, and the like. The board 830 switches the effect mode output to the effect display device 217 based on the operation state of the effect selection switch 892, and outputs a drive signal to the speakers 18, 57 and the frame decoration lamp 893.

[Operations of the main character and the post-decorating body] A description will be given based on FIGS. 55 to 57.
FIG. 55 is a front view of the game area showing a state in which the decorative movable body in the main character is rotated in a substantially vertical direction. FIG. 56 is a front view of the game area showing a state in which the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body of the rear decorative body are further moved from the state of FIG. FIG. 57 is a front view of the game area showing a state in which the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body of the rear decorative body are moved.

  First, in the electrical control board 831, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or reset, the detection signals of the left and right rotational position detection sensors 319 that detect the rotational positions of the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are detected. If there is no detection signal from the rotational position detection sensor 319, the right and left decorative movable body drive motors 310 are moved in such a direction that the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are in a horizontal state. When the rotational drive is performed and a detection signal is received from each rotational position detection sensor 319, the rotation of the decorative movable body drive motor 310 is stopped. As a result, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are in a substantially horizontal state as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined control command for driving and controlling the decorative movable bodies 234 and 235 is transmitted from the sub-integrated board 830 to the lighting control board 831 in accordance with the change in the gaming state, the lighting control board 831 displays the decoration. The movable body drive motor 310 is rotationally driven to rotate the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 in the vertical state as shown in FIG. As shown in the drawing, in this state, a part of the first decorative movable body 430 of the rear decorative body 216 can be seen below the upper edge of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 in the main character 213.

  Depending on the control command from the sub-integrated board 830, the decorative movable body drive motor 310 can be driven so as to vibrate vibrate by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation in a short cycle. It has become.

  In this state, when a predetermined control command for driving and controlling the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 of the rear decorative body 216 is transmitted from the sub-integrated board 830 to the electrical decoration control board 831 In the control board 831, the first drive motor 477 and the second drive motor 637 are rotationally driven in the direction in which the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 approach each other, and the first display motor 217 has a first on the front surface of the effect display device 217. It moves so that the decoration movable body 430 and the 2nd decoration movable body 431 may be located (refer FIG. 56). The first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 431 are driven so as to approach or separate from each other as appropriate in accordance with a control command from the sub-integrated board 830, and the first decorative movable body. The mouth of a predetermined character expressed by the body 430 and the second decorative movable body 431 can be operated to open and close. Here, the electrical decoration control board 831 corresponds to the decorative movable body operation control means of the present invention.

  In addition, in response to a control command from the sub-integrated board 830, the electrical decoration control board 831 drives the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 and the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 so that the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 430 are driven. By rotating the decorative movable body 431 around an axis extending in the left-right direction, the first decorative movable body 430 rotates its face back and forth, and the second decorative movable body 432 rotates its lower jaw back and forth. The movement of the mouth of the character is made more realistic.

  As shown in FIG. 56, since the left and right ends of the first decorative movable body 430 moved downward are blocked by the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235, it is as if the first decorative movable body 430 is in the air. It can be seen as if it is floating. In the second decorative movable body 430, the support shaft 690 that supports the second decorative movable body 432 is concealed by the decorative body 730 attached to the second elevating member 630 of the second decorative movable body unit 433.

  Also, depending on the control command from the sub-integrated board 830, only the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 431 can be driven as shown in FIG. The support shaft 530 that supports the first decorative movable body 430 is concealed by the decorative body 556 attached to the first elevating member 470 of the first decorative movable body unit 431 provided with the first decorative movable body 430. The design is improved by improving the appearance.

  Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 94 (especially the CPU 812) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94, and FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the change start process. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display pattern setting process. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the CPU 812 executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 814 is normal (a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data stored in the RAM 814 is used. Executes processing to return to the power outage (power recovery processing), and if the backup data is abnormal, clears RAM814 and performs CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings: interrupt timing settings, etc.) . If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 814 as backup data. If the RAM erase switch for instructing clearing of backup data stored in the RAM 814 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 814 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If no backup data is stored in the RAM 814 mounted on the main control board 94 in the power-on process, the RAM 814 is cleared and normal initial setting is performed. In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 94 is activated to the sub-integrated board 830 when normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the sub integrated board 830 that the main control board 94 is activated. Note that the backup data is also stored in the RAM 814 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed or the like, and when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again, the power supply Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process ends, the CPU 812 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop processing, the CPU 812 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 94 is stopped. Sent. Then, when the power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4). When the power interruption occurs, the processing of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). This is a process of storing the state at the time of the power outage as backup data in the RAM 814 in order to start from the beginning. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  When the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, random number update processing 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). . The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing an example of the power-off occurrence process (step S4). As described above, the power-off occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the CPU 812 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 814 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 814 (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 814 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 812 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 814 (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 812 prohibits access to the RAM 814 (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the CPU 812 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop of FIG. 58 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 812 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. As described above, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94 during the execution of the main process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 812 executes the process from step S11 to step S18 after executing the register saving process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout control board 133 to pay out the game ball is set based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the ordinary electric accessory (that is, the movable piece 331 opened and closed by the start opening solenoid 352) is changed. The control is executed to change the open / close state of the second start port 332. In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol indicator 390a and the second special symbol indicator 390 based on the progress of the game. Or a special electric accessory (that is, an opening / closing door 334 (attacker device 335) opened and closed by the attacker solenoid 372) is controlled to change the open / closed state of the special winning opening 333. In the output data setting process of step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), a process of outputting a drive signal to a special figure start memory lamp (not shown), Etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the sub integrated board 830 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the sub-integrated board 830 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (including “small hit” described later) (big hit determination), the big hit determination Is a random number for a big hit symbol used to determine whether or not to make a promiscuous big hit when it is determined that a big hit gaming state will be generated (special change determination), special when a big hit gaming state is determined in the big hit determination Random for jackpot symbol used to determine the symbol to stop the symbol, used to determine whether or not to release with a reach mode when it is determined that the big hit gaming state does not occur in the jackpot determination (reach determination) Reach determination random number, the special symbol variable display pattern displayed on the first special symbol display 390a and the second special symbol display 390b ) Are used for determining the variable display pattern random number (variable time random number), the normal hit determining random number used for determining whether or not the movable piece 331 is controlled to be open (normal lottery determination), and the like. is there. In this example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state using a big hit determination random number. It is also determined whether or not to make a probability variation jackpot (the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than usual) using a jackpot symbol random number. Note that the variable display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol that is controlled to be displayed by the effect display device 217 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to occurrence of the big hit gaming state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal symbol per random determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 331 is controlled to be opened. Update. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not the movable piece 331 is controlled to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that a big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece 331 is controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant, It can be prevented that the person becomes disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the reach determination random number and the variable display pattern random number that are not related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and the normal lottery are updated.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S15). In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, the CPU 812 executes the processes from step S20 to step S90. In the start opening winning process of step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 330 or the second start opening 332, and if the winning is won, a process of updating the lottery hold state is executed. In the variation start process of step S30, the number of starting memories (holding number) in each big hit lottery is confirmed, and if the number of starting memories (total number of starting memories) is not 0, the corresponding special symbol variation display is started. Make settings for As will be described in detail later, specifically, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state is to be generated. In the variation pattern setting process in step S40, settings related to variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are performed. More specifically, as will be described later, specifically, a variable display pattern of each special symbol is determined, and a variable time (first special symbol display 390a and second special symbol display) set in correspondence with the variable display pattern. In 390b, the time from when the special symbol variation display is started to when it is stopped is set in the timer.

  In the changing process of step S50, the timer set with the changing time in the changing display pattern setting process (step S40) is monitored, and the first special symbol display 390a or the second special symbol display is performed based on the timer being timed out. Processing to stop the special symbol variation display in the device 390b is performed. At this time, if it is determined in any one of the big win lotteries in the variation start process (step S30), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and the small win game state is set in the same lottery. If the determination is made, the process selection flag is updated to “4”, and if it is not determined to be the big hit or small hit gaming state, the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

  In the jackpot game start process in step S60, settings for starting the jackpot game state are performed. Specifically, as described later, the number of times the attacker device 335 is opened, the opening time, and the like are set according to the type of jackpot. In addition, in the small hit game start process in step S70, setting for starting the small hit game state is performed. Specifically, as described later, the number of times the attacker device 335 is opened in a small hit, the opening time, and the like are set. In the special electric utility jackpot control process in step S80, the big winning opening 333 is opened, and the attacker device 335 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening 333 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Process to make it. In addition, if the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, the processing for opening the attacker device 335 is performed again. When the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has reached the predetermined number, the processing selection flag Is updated to “5”. In addition, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, processing for generating a probability variation state and a short-time gaming state is executed. In the special electric accessory small hit control process in step S90, the big prize opening 333 is opened, and the attacker device 335 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big prize opening 333 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Perform processing to set the status. As will be described in detail later, the opening of the big prize opening 333 in the special electric accessory small hit control process seems to have a very low profit to the player as compared to the special electric bonus hit control process (step S80). Is set to Next, specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the start opening prize process, first, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 358, and when the detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 358, Then, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 332 (YES in step S201), and if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 358 is not output, the game ball has won the second start port 332 (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that a game ball has won at the second starting port 332, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 814. It is determined whether or not the value of the second reserved ball number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (step S202). Then, if the second reserved ball number counter is less than 4 in step S202, a second start hold storage process (step S203) and a hold history update process (step S204) are executed. These processes will be described later. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second start port sensor 358 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or when the value of the second reserved ball number counter is 4 (NO in step S202). Determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 330 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 416. When it is determined in step S205 that a game ball has won the first starting port 330 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are obtained, and the value of the first reserved ball number counter provided in the RAM 814 is obtained. It is determined whether or not the upper limit is less than 4 (step S206). If the first held ball number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “0”. If it is “0” (YES in step S301), the processes after step S302 are executed. If it is not “0” (NO in step S301), the variation start process is terminated. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values of the two reserved ball number counters (the first start memory number and the second start memory number) corresponding to the special symbol indicators 390a and 390b are “0”. . The sum of the values of the two reserved ball number counters indicates the number of random number values stored in the start memory storage area (the special symbol random number storage means 940 (see FIG. 79)). If the value of both of the reserved ball number counters is “0” (YES), it is determined that the start condition regarding the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S317.

  On the other hand, if the value of any of the held ball number counters is not “0” in step S302 (NO), the start memory transfer process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 79, the special symbol random number storage means 940 is provided with eight storage areas (storage area [1] 940a to storage area [8] 940h). That is, eight storage areas 940a to 940h are provided, which are respectively associated with the value of the total start memory number (“1” to “8”), which is the sum of the first start memory number and the second start memory number. It has been. Each of the storage areas 940a to 940h stores a big hit determination random number storage area 946 for storing a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number storage area 947 for storing a big hit symbol random number, and a special symbol determination flag. And a special symbol determination flag storage area 948. As the special symbol determination flag, “0” indicating that the stored random number is a random number related to the first special symbol (first lottery) and “2” indicating that the random number is related to the second special symbol (second lottery) “ 1 "is set. In the start memory transfer process, first, the symbol to be changed next based on the special symbol determination flag stored in the special symbol determination flag storage region 948 of the storage area [1] 940a is the second special symbol. Whether or not (step S303). If it is not the second special symbol, that is, if it is the first special symbol (NO in step S303), each of the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 940b to storage area [8] A process (step S304) for shifting various random numbers stored in 940h) to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 940a to storage area [7] 940g), and storage area [1 ] The process (step S305) which acquires the random number regarding the 1st special symbol memorize | stored in 940a is performed. In addition, “1” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S306), and a process of subtracting “1” from the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is executed (step S307).

  On the other hand, if the next variable symbol that is determined based on the special symbol determination flag stored in the special symbol determination flag storage region 948 of the storage area [1] 940a is the second special symbol (step S303). As in step S304, various random numbers stored in the nth storage areas (storage area [2] 940b to storage area [8] 940h) are stored in the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [ 1] 940a to storage area [7] 940g) (step S308), and a process of acquiring random numbers related to the second special symbol stored in storage area [1] 940a (step S309). Run. Further, “2” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S310), and a process of subtracting “1” from the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed (step S311).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, that is, a table set with a low probability of being a jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability variation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability variation operation, that is, the probability of being a jackpot Select a highly set table. In this example, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the probability variation is not activated (ie, normal), the probability of a big hit is set to 1 / 315.5, and when the probability variation is activated (ie, high). The probability of winning a big hit is set to 1 / 31.55.

  After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, the random number related to any special symbol acquired in step S305 or step S309 based on the table is a random number corresponding to the big hit (big hit value) It is determined whether or not (step S315). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to "ON" (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. On the other hand, if the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S318). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S319), and the process proceeds to step S317. (NO in S318), the process proceeds to step S317 without going through step S319. In step S317, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. Note that the ON / OFF states (set state and reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the RAM 814. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is a value of “1”. Is set.

  In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 63, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “1”. If the process flag is “1” in step S317 (YES in step S401), steps subsequent to step S402 are performed. If the process is not “1” (NO in step S401), the variation pattern setting process is terminated. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is “ON”. If the flag is “ON” in step S316 (YES in step S402), the probability variation jackpot or It is determined which of the big hits is a normal big hit (step S403). If it is a big hit with probability fluctuation (YES in step S403), it is determined whether or not it is a special hit (step S404). As will be described in detail later, any of the probability fluctuation jackpots, “In the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit will be granted is set to a probability fluctuation state higher than usual and fluctuates on any special symbol display. When the special symbol to be changed is shortened (relatively shorter than the normal time), and the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 332 is increased more than usual, a short game state is generated. This is common, but the probability variation jackpots that are special hits and general probability fluctuation jackpots that are not special hits are set so that the degree of profit given to the player is greatly different. In other words, in the general probability fluctuation big hit, the open time per attack device 335 (corresponding to the open / close winning device of the present invention) is such that a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls can be won with plenty of time. The time is set, and the opening / closing operation of the attacker device 335 is controlled to be performed a number of times (for example, 15 times) giving many benefits. On the other hand, in the probability variation big hit which is a special hit, the opening time per attack device 335 is set to such a time that several (for example, one or two) game balls can barely win. The opening / closing operation of the attacker device 335 is controlled to be performed twice, for example.

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is not a special hit, that is, if it is determined that it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO), a probability variation big hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S405), while a special hit is determined. If it is determined that it is a hit (YES in step S404), the probability variation special hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S406). If it is determined in step S403 that the probability variation is not big hit, that is, if it is decided that the normal big hit is made (YES), the normal big hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S408), and “ON” is determined in step S319. If YES (YES in step S408), the small hit change display pattern table is selected (step S409). When the small hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S408), it is determined whether or not the acquired reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to reach (step S410). ) If it is a reach value (YES in step S410), a deviation reach fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step 411). If it is not a reach value (NO in step S410), a deviation fluctuation display is performed. A pattern table is selected (step S412).

  As described above, when the variable display pattern table is selected in any step, the variable display pattern is calculated based on the variable display pattern table and the variable display random number acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Determine (step S413). Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the variation display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern is set to a timer provided in the RAM 814 mounted on the main control board 94. (In this embodiment, the valid period timer) is set (step S415). In step S415, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the effective period timer. Note that the variable display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 830 by command transmission output processing. When a variable display pattern command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 830 by command transmission output processing, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 390a and the second special symbol display 390b, and the special symbol variation display is started. Let Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S416), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In the changing process shown in FIG. 64, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “2” (step S501). If it is “2” in step S416 (YES in step S501), the process proceeds to step S501. The processing after S502 is executed, and if it is not “2” (NO in step S501), the changing processing is ended. In step S502, the first special symbol indicator 390a or the second special symbol indicator 390b determines whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the symbol or the second special symbol is up (step S503). When the fluctuation time is up, that is, when the fluctuation time is ended (YES in step S503), the fluctuation is stopped (step S504). If none of the special symbols have changed (NO in step S502), or if the change time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbols are changing without being stopped. The process ends.

  After stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in step S504, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON” (step S505). If the big hit flag is “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “3”. (Step S506). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S507). Is updated to “0” (step S508). If it is not “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S509). In this way, after the processing flag is updated in any of step S506, step S508, or step S509, the changing process is ended.

  In the big hit game start process shown in FIG. 65, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “3”. If it is “3” in step S506 (YES in step S601), the process after step S602 is performed. If the process is not “3” (NO in step S601), the big hit game start process is terminated. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state. If the probability variation state is present (YES), the operation of the probability variation function is temporarily stopped, and the process proceeds to step S604. To do. If the state is not the probability variation state, that is, if it is the normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state is set. If the time saving gaming state is set (YES), the operation of the time saving function is stopped (step S605). The process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is not the short-time gaming state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process in step S605.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the type of jackpot is a general jackpot or a special jackpot. If the jackpot is a general jackpot (NO in step S606), the attacker unit 335 opens the jackpot 333. The conditions, that is, the number of big hits to be released (for example, a maximum of 15 times), the opening time for each time (for example, a maximum of 18 seconds), and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 333 (for example, a maximum of 10 per time) are set ( Step S607). On the other hand, if the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the special winning opening number (for example, twice) at the big winning opening 333 (for example, six times), the limited number of winnings (for example, six), and the opening per time A time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is set (step S608). Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609), and the big hit game start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the small hit game start process shown in FIG. 66, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “4”. If it is “4” in step S508 (YES in step S701), step The processing of S702 and step S703 is executed, and if the processing flag is not “4” (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is ended without executing the processing of step S702 and step S703. In step S702, the condition for opening the big prize opening 333 in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of small hits for the big prize opening 333 by the attacker device 335, and the opening time per one are set. It should be noted that the number of times of opening in the small hit, the limited number of winnings, and the opening time are set to be the same as the conditions (step S608) set in the case of special hit. That is, the special hit and the small hit are set so that they cannot be visually discriminated. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” (step S703), and the small hit game start process is terminated.

  In the special electric utility jackpot control process shown in FIG. 67, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “5”, and if it is “5” in step S609 (YES in step S801), step The processing after S802 is executed, and if it is not “5” (NO in step S801), the special electric utility jackpot control processing is terminated. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 333 is open. If it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big winning opening 333 is a predetermined time set in advance. Is reached (step S803), and if it has elapsed (YES in step S803), the attacker device 335 is operated to close the special winning opening 333 (step S805). Even if the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 333 after the big winning opening 333 is opened is set in step S607. If the limit number (for example, 10) is exceeded (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805, and the special winning opening 333 is closed. If the opening time of the big winning opening 333 has not reached the set time (NO in step S803), and the number of winning game balls has not reached the limit number (NO in step S804), The special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the big prize opening 333 is not being opened in step S802 (NO), the number of times the big prize opening 333 is opened by the attacker device 335 is set in the number of big hits opened in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the specified number of special hits has been reached (step S806). If not reached (NO in step S806), the attacker device 335 is controlled to open the special winning opening 333 (step S807), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. As a result, a large amount of game balls can be awarded to the grand prize opening 333.

  In step S806, when the number of times of opening of the big winning opening 333 reaches the set number (YES), that is, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the processing of step S808 to step S813 is executed, and the subsequent lottery is performed. Set the game state for. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to “OFF” (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a win that activates the probability variation function (step S809). That is, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit including the special hit or the normal big hit. If the winning is a probability variation jackpot (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability variation function is started and a probability variation state with a high probability is set (step S810). That is, the probability that the big hit is won in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time. If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S811), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function or the short-time function is in operation (step S814). If it is not a special hit, that is, if it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO in step S810), or if the special hit is won when the probability fluctuation function or the time reduction function is already activated, The operation is started (step S812), and then the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S813). In other words, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that fluctuates in the first special symbol indicator 390a or the second special symbol indicator 390b is shortened, and the movable piece 331 is opened to the second start port 332 while the fluctuation time is shortened. Increase the ease of winning a prize. On the other hand, if the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not in operation, that is, if neither the probability variation state nor the time reduction gaming state has occurred and the special win is won (NO in step S814), the time reduction function is activated. The process proceeds to step S813 without being operated.

  On the other hand, if it is not a win that activates the probability variation function in Step S809, that is, if it is a normal big hit (NO), the operation of the time-shortening function is started (Step S815), and the specified number of times of operation in the time-shortening function is set. (Step S816) Then, it transfers to step S813. That is, the time-shortening function is operated until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches a predetermined number (specified number).

  68, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “6”. If the processing flag is “6” in step S703 (YES in step S901), the process proceeds to step S703. The process after step S902 is executed, and if it is not “6” (NO in step S901), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won for the big winning opening 333 has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (step S902). If the maximum number of winnings has not been reached yet (NO) ), It is determined whether or not the special winning opening 333 is open (step S903). If it is determined in step S903 that the big prize opening 333 is being opened (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 333 reaches a predetermined time set in advance. In step S904, if it has elapsed (YES in step S904), the attacker device 335 is operated to close the special winning opening 333 (step S905). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special winning opening 333 has been opened has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (step S906). It is updated to “0” (step S907), and the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. If the opening time of the special winning opening 333 has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the opening number has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is executed. Without doing so, the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. In step S903, if the big prize opening 333 is not open (NO), the big prize opening 333 is opened, and a game ball can be won (step S908). In step S902, if the number of game balls won for the big prize opening 333 reaches the preset maximum number of prizes (YES), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 333 is open (step). S909) If it is open (YES), the special winning opening 333 is closed (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, when the special winning opening 333 is not open (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, processing executed by the integrated CPU 834 mounted on the sub integrated substrate 830 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing.

  As shown in FIG. 69, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the integrated CPU 834 performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the integrated RAM 836 mounted on the sub-integrated board 830 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  In this embodiment, the integrated CPU 834 generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. A process of setting the flag T and resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then a 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 217, the frame lamp, the game board lamp, the speaker and the like based on the effect command received from the main control board 94 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S1002 again, and the above-described steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the sub-integrated CPU 834 executes the processes of steps S1100 to S1600. In the command analysis process in step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 94 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1200, a control process related to the effect display device 217 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, setting of a notice effect, determination of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol, and the like are performed.

  Moreover, in the sound control process of step S1300, the control process regarding a speaker for generating the sound effect (for example, BGM) which promotes a production effect is performed. In the lamp control process in step S1400, control processes related to the game board lamp and the frame lamp are executed. In the information output process in step S1500, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the illumination control board 831 and a display command is transmitted to the illumination control board 832. In the random number update process of step S1600, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S1100 to step S1600 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady processing to the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady processing (step S1100 described later). Do not execute) That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). In the command analysis process, the integrated CPU 834 first determines whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 94 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 94, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt process, and the received command is mounted on the sub-integrated board 830. Are stored in the received command storage area in the integrated RAM 836. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands, and in the command reception interrupt process, the reception command storage areas are stored in the respective areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands. In step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if the effect command is stored, the effect command in the reception order of the reception command storage area is read (step S1102).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103). If the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), a variable display pattern reception flag is set. Then, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the integrated RAM 836 mounted on the sub-integrated board 830 (step S1104).

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variation display pattern command (NO in step S1103), it is determined whether the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command (step S1105), and the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command. If (YES in step S1105), a probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1106). If the read effect command is not a probability change jackpot command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). In the effect control process, the integrated CPU 834 performs one of steps S1210 to S1290 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting for starting the decorative symbol variation display is performed if a variation display pattern command is received. Specifically, the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probability variation jackpot command, and a notice effect is set.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, when the variation stop command is received, the display command is transmitted to the electrical control board 832 to stop the variation display of the decorative symbol. To control.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1290) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, an indication indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the effect display device 217 in accordance with the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 94. Control is performed to display during the big hit gaming state (for example, round display).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). In the decorative symbol variation start process, the integrated CPU 834 first determines whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variation display pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in step S1104 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above and indicates that a variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 94. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221, (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command generates a big hit. It is determined whether it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a).

  If the variable display pattern is not a winning pattern (NO in step S1223a), a stop symbol for the off symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variation display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S1223b). If the probability variation big hit flag is set (YES), the probability variation big hit symbol Is determined (step S1225). If the probability variation big hit flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), the stop symbol of the non-probable big hit symbol is determined (step S1226). In addition, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot gaming state is started in the jackpot display process (step S1230). The time when the probability variation big hit flag is reset is not limited to this. For example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220), specifically, when the variation stop command is received. It may be reset, or may be reset when the jackpot gaming state is ended in the jackpot display process (step S1290).

  In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the second special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol. A common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as “common decorative symbol sequence”) associated with both symbols and corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are composed of combinations of figures such as circles, crosses, sankaku, and the like. , And combinations that are out of place are set in advance. In other words, if the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, stop any combination symbol from the combination set as the probable big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol or the combination set as the non-probable big hit symbol Determine as a symbol.

  On the other hand, the common decorative symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of symbol sequences having numbers (for example, three columns), and if the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, the symbol of any combination among the combinations of the same odd symbols is probable. The symbols are determined as symbols, and any combination of the same even symbols is determined as a non-probable variation big hit symbol. Further, when determining the stop symbol of the off symbol in step S1224, it is determined whether the display pattern is a variation display pattern with a reach mode. The left and right common decorative design sequences are the same design, and the middle decorative design sequence is determined to be a stop design that is different from the left and right decorative design sequences. On the other hand, in the case of a variable display pattern that does not involve a reach mode, the stop symbol is determined so that each of the left, middle, and right common decorative symbol sequences becomes a different symbol.

  Next, the integrated CPU 834 executes a notice selection process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1227), and then enables a background selection process related to the development effect (step S1228). ). Details of this process will be described later. Thereafter, display commands corresponding to the variable display pattern, the advance notice pattern stored in the advance notice type storage area, and the stop symbol of the common decorative design sequence determined in steps S1224, S1225, and S1226 are set (step S1229). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “1” and the process is terminated (step S1230). The display command set in step S1229 is transmitted to the illumination control board 832 in the information output process (step S1500), and the display CPU 851 mounted on the illumination control board 832 receives the display command. Based on this, the effect display device 217 starts execution of variable display of decorative symbols. When the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1229, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after reading the notice pattern. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the previous notice effect from being erroneously executed in the next variation display of decorative symbols.

  Next, a functional configuration related to the effect display including the special symbol, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the common decorative symbol sequence will be described based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 80 shows a functional configuration related to the first big hit lottery on the main control board 94, FIG. 81 shows a functional configuration related to the second big hit lottery on the main control board 94, and FIG. FIG. 83 shows a functional configuration related to the normal lottery on the main control board 94, and FIG. 84 shows the peripheral board 811 (mainly The functional structure regarding the production | presentation in the sub integrated board | substrate 830 and the electrical decoration control board 832) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the main control board 94 includes a first hit determination table 911a, a first hit symbol table 912a, a first hit variation time setting table 913a, and a configuration related to the first big hit lottery. A first off time variation time setting table 914a is stored in advance, and based on these tables 911a to 914a, whether or not the lottery is selected in the first big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 390a, and the variation time Is determined. The first hit determination table 911a shows the relationship between the big hit determination random number value and the success or failure of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio is different between the normal time and the high probability. The first hit symbol table 912a shows the relationship between the big hit symbol random number and the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 390a. The range is associated with the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol). The first hit time variation time setting table 913a is used when the result of success or failure in the first big hit lottery is big hit or small hit, and the first random time random number and the first special symbol display 390a extracted. The first off time variation time setting table 914a is used when the result of the first big lottery lottery is out of the way and is extracted. It shows the relationship between the random time for variation time and the variation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 390a. The first lottery probability selection means 920a performs processing for selecting one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Although not shown, the first winning symbol table 912a includes a probability variation big hit table, a special hit table, a normal big hit table, and a small hit table, respectively. A table corresponding to the type of winning determined by the first winning / failing determining means 930a described later is selected.

  The main control board 94 has a random counter (random number generating means) when a winning to the first starting opening 330 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 416 (corresponding to the first winning state detecting means of the present invention). The first hit determination random number extracting means 916a for extracting the big hit determination random number and the first hit design random number extracting means 917a for extracting the big hit symbol random number are provided. In addition, first variation time random number extraction means 918a is provided for extracting variation time random numbers based on the determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers. When the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extraction means 916a, the first hit determination means 930a for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the first hit determination table 911a, and the first hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number is extracted by the random number extracting unit 917a, the first stop symbol determining unit 931a for determining the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 390a using the first hit symbol table 912a is provided. Yes. Further, when the fluctuation time random number is extracted by the first fluctuation time random number extraction means 918a and the big hit determination is determined by the first winning / failing determination means 930a, the first hit time fluctuation time setting table 913a is used. When the variation time of the first special symbol is determined and the random number for the variation time is extracted and determined to be out of the range by the first success / failure determination means 930a, the variation time setting table 914a for the first out-of-range time is determined. The first variation time determining means 932a is provided for determining the variation time of the first special symbol using.

  The main control board 94 also starts the first special symbol change in the first special symbol display 390a and determines the first stop symbol after the variation time determined by the first variation time determination means 932a elapses. A special symbol fluctuation control means 934 for variably stopping at the stop symbol determined by the means 931a, a success / failure command related to the presence / absence of a big hit determined by the first success / failure determination means 930a before the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and a first Command transmission means 935 for transmitting a control command including a variation display command corresponding to the variation mode (time) of the special symbol is provided. Further, the main control board 94 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when a winning to the first start port 330 is detected by the first start port sensor 416 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed. ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the first starting memory number is counted and stored, and the first reserved digesting means 922a for repeatedly displaying the first special symbol as many times as the starting memory number is provided. In other words, the first holding digesting means 922a for waiting for the execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 416 is provided. The first reservation digesting means 922a will be described in more detail. The first reservation control means 941a and the first digestion control means 942a are provided in the first reservation digesting means 922a, and the first reservation control means 941a is in the process of changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the first start port sensor 416 detects a winning to the first start port 330, if the first start memory number does not reach the upper limit value “4”, the value of the first start memory number is set to “1”. While increasing, the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each of the extracted random numbers is stored in the uppermost storage area in the special symbol random number storage means 940. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the change of the new first special symbol becomes possible, the first digest control means 942a sets the start memory number related to the first special symbol to “ If not "0", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the first starting stored number is reduced by "1", and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas. Here, a combination of the first hit determination random number extraction means 916a, the first variation time random number extraction means 918a, the first hit / fail determination means 930a, the first stop symbol determination means 931a and the like is the first lottery of the present invention. Corresponds to means. The special symbol fluctuation control means 934 corresponds to the display control means of the present invention, and the combination of the first stop symbol determination means 931a and the first fluctuation time determination means 932a corresponds to the display mode determination means of the present invention.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 81, the main control board 94 includes a second hit determination table 911b, a second hit symbol table 912b, and a second hit time variation time setting table 913b as configurations relating to the second big hit lottery. , And a second off-time variation time setting table 914b are stored in advance. Based on these tables 911b to 914b, whether or not the lottery is selected in the second big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 390b, and The variation time is determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first big hit lottery, detailed description is omitted here.

  Further, the main control board 94 has a big hit determination related to the second big win lottery when the second start port sensor 358 (corresponding to the second winning status detection means of the present invention) detects a winning to the second start port 332. Based on the second hit determination random number extraction means 916b for extracting the random numbers for use, the second hit random number extraction means 917b for extracting the big hit symbols related to the second big hit lottery, the determination random numbers and the big hit symbol random numbers Second variation time random number extraction means 918b for extracting variation time random numbers is provided. When the big hit determination random number is extracted by the second hit determination random number extracting means 916b, the second hit determination means 930b for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the second hit determination table 911b, and the second hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number extraction means 917b extracts the big hit symbol random number, second stop symbol determination means 931b for determining the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 390b using the second hit symbol design table 912b is provided. Yes. Further, when the random time for variation time is extracted by the random number extraction means for second variation time 918b and the big hit is determined by the second determination unit 930b, the second variation time setting table 913b is used. When the variation time of the second special symbol is determined, and when the variation time random number is extracted and the second success / failure determination means 930b determines that the variation is out of place, the second variation time variation time setting table 914b is determined. A second variation time determining means 932b is provided for determining the variation time of the second special symbol using the.

  The special symbol variation control means 934 starts the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 390b, and after the lapse of the variation time determined by the second variation time determination unit 932b, The variation is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the stop symbol determining means 931b. That is, the special symbol variation control means 934 sequentially varies the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the detection order of the game balls by the first starting port sensor 416 and the second starting port sensor 358, and determines the first stop symbol. The fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the means 931a or the second stop symbol determining means 931b. Further, when a winning to the second starting port 332 is detected by the second starting port sensor 358 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main control board 94 has a fixed number of balls (four times). ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the second start memory number is counted and stored, and the second reserved digesting means 922b is provided for repeatedly displaying the variation of the second special symbol by the start memory number. In other words, the second reserved digesting means 922b is provided for waiting for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 358. The second reservation digesting means 922b will be described in further detail. The second reservation control means 941b and the second digestion control means 942b are provided in the second reservation digestion means 922b, and the second reservation control means 941b is used during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When a winning to the second start port 332 is detected by the second start port sensor 358, if the second start stored number has not reached the upper limit value “4”, the value of the second start stored number is set to “1”. While increasing, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each extracted random number is stored in the uppermost storage area in the special symbol random number storage means 940. On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing and the second second special symbol can be changed, the second digestion control unit 942b sets the start memory number related to the second special symbol to “ If it is not “0”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the second starting stored number is decreased by “1”, and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  Here, the second lottery of the present invention is a combination of the second hit determination random number extraction means 916b, the second variation time random number extraction means 918b, the second win / fail determination means 930b, the second stop symbol determination means 931b and the like. Corresponds to means. A combination of the second stop symbol determining means 931b and the second variation time determining means 932b corresponds to the display mode determining means of the present invention.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 82, the five advantageous games that give the game state advantageous to the player on the main control board 94 based on the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 930a or the second success / failure determination means 930b. State control means is provided. Here, the advantageous gaming state includes opening the attacker device 335 (corresponding to the open / close winning device of the present invention) and enabling the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 333. The attacker device 335 is controlled to be opened by either the profit granting means 981 or the predetermined profit giving means 982.

  More specifically, the predetermined profit granting means 982 sets the opening time per time of the attacker device 335 as a first predetermined time enough to allow several (for example, 1 to 2) game balls to be won, By performing the opening / closing operation of the attacker device 335 at least once (in this example, twice), a predetermined profit is given to the player. This makes it possible to win a predetermined number of game balls in the big winning opening 333, but since the number of winning balls is extremely small, the profit received by the player is relatively small. On the other hand, the specific profit granting means 981 sets the opening time per time of the attacker device 335 as a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of (for example, ten) game balls to win with a margin, and the attacker device. By performing the opening / closing operation 335 more times (15 times in this example) than the number of opening / closing operations in the case of giving a predetermined benefit, a specific benefit is given to the player. According to this, it becomes possible to make a large number of game balls win a prize winning opening 333, and the player can obtain a large profit.

  The main control board 94 is provided with a first advantageous gaming state control means 933a and a second advantageous gaming state control means 933b as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 981, and a predetermined profit giving means 982 is provided. As a means for giving a predetermined profit, a third advantageous gaming state control means 933c, a fourth advantageous gaming state control means 933d, and a fifth advantageous gaming state control means 933e are provided.

  The first advantageous gaming state (corresponding to the “first big hit” in FIG. 86 (b)) generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 933a is a so-called “probability fluctuation big hit”, and the first win / fail decision means 930a or the second Occurs when the lottery result of the second win / fail decision means 930b is the first result. At this time, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 981, and the probability that the specific profit will be given in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time by the high probability state setting means 983. That is, a probability variation state with a high probability is assumed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 86A, in the jackpot determination table at a high probability, it is determined to generate a jackpot gaming state among 631 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 630. 20 jackpot determination values are set, and the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 20/631. On the other hand, in the normal big hit determination table, two big hit determination values are set out of 631 big hit determination random numbers from 0 to 630, and the big hit probability is 2/631. Further, in the first advantageous gaming state, the first temporary short state setting means 984 sets the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that varies on the first special symbol display 390a or the second special symbol display 390b. While shortening and increasing the frequency with which the movable piece 331 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery), the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 332 is increased more than usual. In other words, the short-time gaming state is set.

  The second advantageous gaming state (corresponding to the “second big hit” in FIG. 86 (b)) generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 933b is a so-called “normal big hit”, and the first win / fail determining means 930a or the second This occurs when the lottery result of the success / failure determination means 930b is the second result. At this time, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 981 in the same way as in the first advantageous gaming state, but in this case, the probability that the specific profit will be given in the subsequent lottery Remains a low probability. That is, the probability fluctuation state is not entered, and the normal probability is maintained. However, in this second advantageous gaming state, after giving a specific profit, until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the second short time state setting means 985 enters the short-time gaming state, shortens the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and increases the frequency of opening and closing the movable piece 331 (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery) to increase the gaming ball Improve the ball holding.

  The third advantageous gaming state (corresponding to the “third big hit” in FIG. 86 (b)) generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 933c is a so-called “special big hit”, and the first win / fail decision means 930a or the second This occurs when the lottery result of the success / failure determination means 930b is the third result. At this time, first, a predetermined profit (a profit having a lower advantage than the specific profit) is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 982. For the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is increased. That is, as in the first advantageous gaming state, the probability variation state is set. However, the short-time gaming state is generated only when the gaming state before the advantageous gaming state is generated satisfies a predetermined condition. In other words, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the gaming state is neither the probability variation state nor the short-time gaming state (in other words, the normal gaming state), the short-time gaming state is not generated. The probability variation state. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short-time gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state is generated, the first short-time state setting unit 984 is operated by the short-time generating unit 989, and the short-time gaming state Is generated.

  The fourth advantageous gaming state generated by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 933d (corresponding to “small hit” in FIG. 86 (a)) is determined by the first lottery determination means 930a or the second winning / failure determination means 930b. Occurs in the case of four results. At this time, as in the third advantageous gaming state, a predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 982. However, for the subsequent lottery, neither a probability fluctuation state nor a short-time gaming state is newly generated. In other words, the gaming state does not change before and after winning, and the level of profit to the player is extremely low compared to other advantageous gaming states. Thus, in this example, such an unattractive hit (that is, a hit that does not cause an advantageous gaming state) is referred to as “small hit” in order to distinguish it from other hits (big hit). As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in this example, it is decided to generate a small hit gaming state among 631 small hit determination random numbers (using a big hit determination random number) from 0 to 630. Eight small hit determination values are set, and the probability of winning a small hit, that is, the probability of occurrence of the fourth advantageous gaming state is 8/631.

  The fifth advantageous gaming state generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 933e (corresponding to the “fourth big hit” in FIG. 86 (b)) is determined by the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 930a or the second winning / failing determining means 930b. Occurs in the case of the fifth result. At this time, giving a predetermined profit to the player by the predetermined profit granting means 982 and giving a predetermined profit by the high probability state setting means 983 are the same as in the third advantageous gaming state. In the advantageous gaming state, the short-time gaming state is generated by the first temporary short state setting means 984 regardless of the gaming state.

  In this example, the winning ratio of each jackpot is distributed as shown in FIG. 86 (b). Specifically, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 933a, that is, the probability fluctuation big hit to which both the probability fluctuation state and the short-time gaming state are given is set to 35% of the whole big hit, The second big hit generated by the advantageous gaming state control means 933b, that is, the normal big hit in which the short-time gaming state is given a certain number of times without being given the probability variation state is set to 35%. Further, the third big hit generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 933c, that is, the probability variation state and the special big hit to which the conditional short time gaming state is given is set to 27%, and the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 933e. Is set to 3%, that is, the special jackpot to which both the probability variation state and the short-time gaming state are given. In other words, the first big hit (probability variation big hit) and the second big hit (normal big hit) are generated at the same rate, and the third big hit (special big hit) is set at a slightly lower rate than them. . Further, the ratio of occurrence of the fourth big hit is set to about 1/9 of the third big hit, so that it occurs very rarely.

  By the way, as described above, the probability of occurrence of a big hit by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 933d is set to 8/631, while the probability of occurrence of a big hit at normal time is set to 2/631. The ratio between the probability of occurrence of a small hit and the probability of occurrence of a third big hit or a fourth big hit is 1: 0.075. Therefore, although these three types of hits are provided as predetermined profits given by the predetermined profit granting means 982, most of them are small hits, and the probability that the probability fluctuation state occurs is about 7%. Become. In other words, “small hits” that do not generate a probability variation state and are less attractive as hits frequently occur. For this reason, if these hits can be clearly distinguished and recognizable, there is a concern that frustration will be caused by frequent occurrence of “small hits” with little advantage, and it is not a big hit. Dissatisfaction with the game may impair the willingness to play.

  Therefore, in this example, if the “third advantageous gaming state” occurs when the gaming state is neither the probability variation state nor the short-time gaming state (that is, the normal time), the probability does not occur without generating the short-time gaming state. It is in a fluctuating state. According to this, the “third advantageous gaming state (big hit)” is “fourth fourth” without any difference in the open state of the second start port 332, that is, the operating state of the movable piece 331 in any gaming state. Compared with “advantageous game state (small hit)”, it becomes impossible to visually distinguish and recognize. In other words, even if a “small hit” occurs, it is assumed that “it may be a third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, that is, “it may have entered a probability variation state”. It is possible to increase the player's expectation. Therefore, the willingness to play is increased, and the end of the game due to dissatisfaction can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the fifth advantageous gaming state, the short-time gaming state is generated regardless of the gaming state. That is, a big hit state that can be clearly distinguished from a “small hit” that does not become a short-time gaming state is generated. However, the fifth advantageous gaming state occurs less frequently than the third advantageous gaming state, and even if it is recognized that the fifth advantageous gaming state is not the fifth advantageous gaming state, the possibility of being the third advantageous gaming state remains. Therefore, the willingness to play is not reduced. On the contrary, when the 5th advantageous gaming state occurs, it is suggested that the state of probability change has occurred due to the occurrence of the short-time gaming state, which greatly increases the feeling of expectation for the lottery and raises the player's mood. Is possible.

  By the way, in the third advantageous gaming state, after giving a predetermined profit, it is in a probability variation state without generating a short-time gaming state. May occur. For example, if the game state is already in the short-time game state and the above control is executed as it is, the short-time game state will end in the middle, giving unnaturalness and becoming a disadvantageous game state for the player. There is a risk of recognition. In addition, when a short-time gaming state has occurred without entering a probability fluctuation state, such as after a specific profit has been granted by the “second advantageous gaming state”, the “third advantageous gaming state” has been reached. In this case, it is possible to easily recognize that the “short advantage game state” (ie, the “fourth advantageous game state”) is not reached because the short-time game state ends in the middle. . In other words, the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state” are clearly distinguished, and it is impossible to suppress a decrease in expectation due to the “fourth advantageous gaming state”.

  Therefore, in this example, the transition of the gaming state in the third advantageous gaming state is individually set corresponding to the gaming state before the occurrence. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when neither the probability variation state nor the short-time gaming state has occurred, the probability variation state is generated without generating the short-time gaming state as described above. However, in other combinations, that is, when at least one of the short-time gaming state and the probability variation state has already occurred, the short-time gaming state is generated (or continued) and the probability variation A state is generated (or continued).

  That is, when the “third advantageous game state” occurs in the short-time game state, the probability variation state is generated without stopping the short-game state at that time. That is, when the short-time gaming state has already occurred, a part of the functions in the third advantageous gaming state is changed and given to the player. According to this, it is possible to prevent the short-time gaming state from suddenly ending, to suppress distrust to the gaming machine, and to make a visual distinction between the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state”. It can be made clear.

  In addition, even if the gaming state is not the short-time gaming state when the “third advantageous gaming state” is entered, if the probability-changing state is already maintained, the short-time gaming is maintained while maintaining the probability varying state. A state is generated. In other words, in the case where the probability variation state has been caused by the previous “third advantageous gaming state”, the “first advantageous gaming state” or the “second advantageous gaming state” is again given a “ In the case of “3rd advantageous game state”, the short-time game state is given, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 390a or the second special symbol display 390b. And the ease of winning a prize at the second starting port 332 is increased more than usual. As a result, it becomes possible to give a profit more than a predetermined profit (same profit as the fourth advantageous gaming state) as a profit by the “third advantageous gaming state” again, and further increase the expectation for the big hit. Can do. In this case, since the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 332 increases, it can be distinguished from the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, but the “third advantageous gaming state” is twice. Since the control is limited to the case where it occurs continuously, it does not affect the decrease in expectation due to the “fourth advantageous gaming state”. This is because, in the previous time and the current time, the “fourth advantageous game state”, when the previous time was the “fourth advantageous game state”, but when this time became the “third advantageous game state” for the first time this time, This is because the time reduction state does not occur in any of the three advantageous game states and the current “fourth advantageous game state”.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 83, the main control board 94 has a normal lot determination random number extracting means 924 as a configuration related to the normal lottery (lottery for increasing the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 332). A normal hit determination table 926 and a normal hit determination unit 925 are provided. Random number extracting means 924 for determining a normal hit is used for determining a normal hit from a random counter (random number generating means) when a ball entering a passing gate (not shown) is detected by the ball state detecting means 990 (gate sensor). A random number is extracted. The normal hit determination table 926 is divided into a high probability table and a normal probability table. As shown in FIG. 87A, the normal hit determination table 926 has a high probability of 0 to 99. Of the 100 normal hit determination random numbers, five determination values for normal hit are set, and the probability of normal hit is 5/100. On the other hand, in the normal normal hit determination table, out of 100 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 99, 99 normal hit determination values are set, and the probability of normal hit is 99/100. ing. In the normal lottery at high probability, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.136 seconds, the opening time of the movable piece 331 by the start port solenoid 352 is 1654 ms, the number of times of opening is 3, and the interval between opening is It is set to 856 ms. On the other hand, in the normal lottery at the normal time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 14.7 seconds on average, the opening time of the movable piece 331 is set to 1650 ms, the number of times of opening is set to 2, and the interval between opening is set to 2600 ms.

  Further, when the normal hit determination random number extraction unit 924 extracts the normal hit determination random number, the normal hit determination unit 925 extracts the random number and the normal hit determination value stored in the normal hit determination table 926. Are determined to be normal hits if they match. At this time, the game state is determined by the game state determination means 923, that is, a specific game state, that is, a game state (probability variation state) after a probability change big hit or a game state (time saving game) in a certain period after a big hit (for example, a normal big hit). In the case of a specific gaming state, a table with a high probability is selected, and when it is not a specific gaming state, a normal table is selected.

  Further, when the normal lottery determination means 925 determines whether or not the normal lottery is successful, the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display unit 928 in a variable manner and the change time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the elapse of time, a normal symbol fluctuation control means 927 is provided for displaying the result of success / failure. In addition, when the normal hit determination unit 925 determines that the normal hit is determined, after the normal symbol fluctuation is stopped, the movable piece 331 is opened, and the opening control unit 929 makes it easy to win the game ball in the second start port 332. Is provided.

  Next, a configuration relating to effects in the peripheral board 811 including the sub-integrated board 830 will be described with reference to FIG. In the effect image displayed on the effect display device 217 of this example, a plurality of images are displayed in stages according to a predetermined order while the decorative symbol is variably displayed with periodicity and the decorative symbol is changing (before the reach state). This includes step effects that can be displayed in an expanded manner, and development effects that can be displayed in a step-by-step manner after the third advantageous game state or the fourth advantageous game state occurs. Hereinafter, the decorative design, the step effect, and the development effect will be described in detail.

(About decorative designs)
In this example, as the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 217, as shown in the example of the effect in FIG. 88, a first decorative symbol 991, a second decorative symbol 992, and a common decorative symbol sequence 993 are provided. Yes. The first decorative symbol 991 corresponds to the first special symbol indicator 390a, the second decorative symbol 992 corresponds to the second special symbol indicator 390b, and these are arranged in parallel at the lower right of the display screen. . The first decorative symbol 901 and the second decorative symbol 902 are composed of combinations of figures such as circles and triangles. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change, the corresponding decorative symbol is displayed. It fluctuates and stops at the stop symbol based on the lottery result almost simultaneously with the special symbol change stop.

  On the other hand, the common decorative design row 993 is displayed large over the entire display screen. The common decorative symbol row 993 is a symbol row common to both the first decorative symbol 991 and the second decorative symbol 992, and during the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol 991, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (that is, the first big hit lottery drawing). ), And during the change of the second decorative symbol 992, the effect corresponds to the change of the second special symbol (that is, the second big hit lottery). In the common decorative design row 993, for example, three decorative design rows, left, middle, and right, are set, and are variably displayed for each decorative design row. A series of decorative symbols is composed of a main decorative symbol with numbers "0" to "9" and a sub-decorative symbol made up of pictures. The main decorative symbols are displayed in ascending or descending numerical order. In addition, a sub-decoration pattern is arranged between the main decoration symbols to form a series of decoration symbol sequences. The main decorative design and the secondary decorative design are displayed in a variable manner from top to bottom with periodicity, and the display is changed in the order of left decorative design sequence → right decorative design sequence → middle decorative design sequence. When the game stops and the three decorative symbols are aligned with a combination of jackpot decorative symbols (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”), the special game animation is displayed as a jackpot. In particular, two decorative symbols that have already stopped on the active line (the left decorative symbol and When the right decorative symbols are the same as each other, the reach state is established with these decorative symbols as reach formation symbols. In addition, the main decorative symbol consists of a plurality of normal symbols indicating “normal jackpot” and a plurality of probability variable symbols indicating “probable big hit”. When a jackpot combination is established with the probability variation symbol, a “probability variation jackpot” is generated.

  88, on the lower side of the display screen, the first state display means 995a and the second state display means 995b indicating the holding state in the two lotteries are displayed on the display area deriving means 944 (FIG. 84). In addition, a changing display section 998 is provided between the first state display means 995a and the second state display means 995b to indicate which lottery is used for the special symbol that is currently changing. On the left side of the display means 995a, there is provided a point display section 999 for displaying the total of effect points (hereinafter simply referred to as “points”) given in a specific effect. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 88 (b), the first state display means 995a and the second state display means 995b each include four first reserved state display areas 996a to 996a corresponding to the special symbol random number storage means 440, respectively. 996d and four second hold state display areas 997a to 997d, which are arranged in descending order from the inside to the outside. In these hold state display areas, graphics corresponding to each special symbol are displayed in accordance with the number of starting memories (holding number). That is, in this example, the number of starting memories in the first special symbol (first big hit lottery) is “3”, and the number of starting memories in the second special symbol (second big hit lottery) is “2”. ing. In addition, symbols that can be displayed in each hold state display area are basically displayed in a lit state, but symbols corresponding to special symbols that change in the next lottery are displayed in a blinking state. . For this reason, the player can recognize which lottery means the special symbol that is currently changing corresponds to the symbol displayed on the changing display unit 998, and blinking. Recognizing the type of the next lottery by visually checking which of the first hold state display area 996a or the second hold state display area 997a the displayed symbol is displayed in become able to. In the example of production shown in FIG. 88 (b), a numerical value indicating the order of the lottery performed in order is displayed on the upper stage, and a symbol indicating the type of the lottery is displayed on the lower stage. In this example, the shapes of the symbols “cans” are substantially the same, and the colors of the symbols are different from each other.

(About step production)
In the step effect, the period from the first step to the last step is divided in time series, and different images (moving images) are defined for each step. A plurality of effect patterns are set so that the number of steps developed and displayed in stages is different from each other. In other words, a plurality of effect patterns having different numbers of steps are stored in the effect pattern storage means (not shown) as step effects. For example, when an effect pattern with one step is selected, the first step When only the effect image is displayed and an effect pattern having four steps is selected, the images in the first step to the fourth step can be developed and displayed step by step. In addition, this step effect can be derived as a jackpot notice display within a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation of the common decorative symbol sequence 993 in the effect display device 217 to the reach state. The appearance rate is distributed so that the greater the number of steps developed and displayed, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. The jackpot reliability is generated depending on the selection ratio when there are a plurality of effects having different probabilities of being selected as effects at the time of losing. For example, the performance with a lower selection rate at the time of losing becomes higher in reliability for the big hit and the expected value becomes higher.

(About development effects)
The development effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of each effect included in a series of development effects, and FIG. 90 is a table showing the relationship between the current situation, the type of jackpot, and the background to be shifted accordingly, FIG. 91 is a table showing the relationship between the current situation and the background to be shifted when a small hit occurs, FIGS. 92 to 98 are tables used in the development effect, and FIGS. 99 to 102 are related to the development effect. It is a block diagram which shows a functional structure, and FIG. 103 thru | or 110 is an image which shows an example of an effect.

  The development effect is a series that can appear after a predetermined profit is given, particularly in the third advantageous gaming state (special big hit that becomes a probability fluctuation state) or the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit that does not become a probability fluctuation state). This is the production. In this example, as shown in FIG. 89, it is possible to develop in stages between a “normal background effect” 1001 derived in a normal game state and a “big hit state effect” 1006 derived during a big hit game. There are four productions, “place slot production” 1002, “katakata night chance production” 1003, “talking time production” 1004, and “super chatting time production” 1005, and “Tokoro Mega” which can be shifted from these productions. "Heaven mode effect" 1007. In addition, this development effect is not developed and displayed step by step in one lottery like the step effect described above, but can be developed in order over a plurality of lotteries (variation display). is there. Here, the “normal background effect” 1001 corresponds to the first normal state effect of the present invention, the “place slot effect” 1002 corresponds to the second normal state effect of the present invention, and the “katakata night chance effect” 1003 is the main effect. This corresponds to the high probability expectation small effect of the invention, “Talking time effect” 1004 corresponds to the high probability expectation large effect of the present invention, “Super chat time effect” 1005 corresponds to the high probability state effect of the present invention, “ Tokorosan mega heaven mode effect "1007 corresponds to a high probability short-time effect.

About “Normal Background Effect” (First Normal State Effect) This effect is an effect performed in the normal game state before the advantageous game state occurs. As a specific effect example, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, an effect with the content that the character C is playing the guitar in a predetermined room (for example, a living room) is performed. In addition, the decorative symbol row 993 is variably displayed together with this effect, and on the lower side of the effect, a first hold display portion 995a indicating a hold state corresponding to the first special symbol and a hold corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. A second hold display unit 995b indicating the state, a lottery state display unit 998 indicating which special symbol the currently selected lottery corresponds to, and a point display indicating the total number of points generated in this effect Part 999 is displayed. Detailed production contents will be described later.

About the “place slot effect” (second normal state effect) This effect is generated when the third advantageous game state, the fourth advantageous game state, or the fifth advantageous game state occurs while the “normal background effect” 1001 is derived. It is a production that appears. As a specific effect example, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the character C moves from a predetermined room displayed as a background in the “normal background effect” 1001 to a specific room (slot room H). The effect of the content is performed, and then the character C presses the button B of the slot S and determines the points acquired and the transition destination using the output display of the slot S.

About “Katakata Night Chance Production” (High Probability Expectation Small Production) This production is an production showing that there is a possibility that the probability fluctuation state is hidden, and the transition destination determined in “place slot production” 1002 This is an effect that appears when “Katakata Night Chance” becomes. As a specific production example, as shown in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, the production is performed such that the background is night and the point card P displaying the points falls from above the room. Then, when the total of points reaches 100 points, the transition to the next production “Talking time production” 1004 is confirmed. If a “war place card” that is different from the normal point card P falls before the total of points reaches 100 points, the “normal background effect” 1001 is returned from the “katakata night chance effect” 1003. At the same time, all or a part of the accumulated points are cleared by the point erasing means 1103. In this effect, prior to the point card P dropping, the left decorative movable body 235 and the right decorative movable body 234 are controlled so as to move in a rattling manner, and these decorative movable bodies 234 and 235 and the effect image The realism of the production is enhanced through collaboration. Also, at the bottom of this effect screen, there is provided a point display part PT for displaying the accumulated points and a hold state display part H indicating the hold state of each lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has been. A total of 100 points in this effect corresponds to the first condition of the present invention.

About “Talking Time Production” (High Probability Expectation Production) This production is a production showing that there is a high probability that a probability variation state has occurred, and the accumulated points in “Katakata Night Chance Production” 1003 This is an effect that can appear when the total reaches 100 points (that is, when the first condition is satisfied). It may appear when the transition destination determined in “place slot effect” 1002 becomes “talking time”. As a specific effect example, as shown in FIG. 109, the left decorative movable body 235 and the right decorative movable body 235 are rotated and suspended, and the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body are placed. The bodies 432 (corresponding to the decorative movable body of the present invention) operate to move away from each other or approach each other. That is, the state of the talking mouth is created by the pair of decorative movable bodies 430 and 432. In addition, words (sentences) (for example, “I am fine today” or “Ye weather”) are displayed on the effect display device 217 so as to be positioned between them. It is also output by voice. In addition, the dialogue changes based on the progress of the game, and the background of the image gradually changes from the morning landscape to the night landscape. Note that the more the same word (line) continues and the slower the switching of the landscape, the higher the expectation for “super chatting time production” 1005 increases. In addition, this effect can subsequently appear until the special symbol changes 30 times, and when a predetermined profit is given by the occurrence of the third advantageous gaming state (a big hit that becomes a probability changing state) Only then, the process proceeds to the next “super chat time production” 1005. In other words, even though the probability variation state is caused by the occurrence of the third advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state or the second even if the lottery is performed 30 times or more after the “talking time effect” appears. Only when the specific profit is not given due to the advantageous gaming state, the process shifts to “super chat time production” 1005. When a predetermined profit is given due to the occurrence of the fourth advantageous gaming state, the “normal background effect” 1001 is returned before the number of lotteries reaches 30 after the “talking time effect” appears. It will be. Here, the fact that the number of lotteries reaches 30 corresponds to the second condition of the present invention.

About “Super Talking Time Effect” (High Probability State Effect) This effect is an effect indicating that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous game state control means 933c, and is determined according to the third advantageous game state. This is an effect that appears when a profit is given and the “Talking Time Effect” 1004 effect is repeated 30 times, that is, when the second condition is satisfied. In other words, the production so far suggests that there is a possibility that the probability variation state is latent, or that the probability is high, but this production has confirmed that the probability variation state is latent. It suggests. When this effect appears, this effect is repeated until the first big hit or the second big hit occurs, that is, until a specific profit is given by the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state. It is. This effect is similar to the “Talking time effect” 1004, and it is added that the background appears in lightning (lightning).

About “Tokoro Megaten Mode Effect” (High Probability Short State Effect) This effect is an effect that can be shifted from any of the above-mentioned effects 1002 to 1005, and when a probability variation state and a short time game state occur It is an effect that appears only for a limited time. As shown in FIG. 86 (c), even when the third advantageous gaming state occurs, if the previous gaming state is the short-time gaming state or the probability variation state, the probability with the short-time gaming state is included. As described above, the change state is changed, but in such a case, the process shifts to “Tokoro Megaten Mode Production” 1007 so that the probability change state is clearly recognized. . In other words, when a short-time gaming state is entered after a predetermined profit has been granted, it becomes possible to recognize that a probability variation state has occurred due to the third advantageous gaming state. A special production that deviates has appeared, and the expectation for the lottery is greatly increased. Even when the fifth advantageous gaming state (fourth big hit) occurs, the short-time gaming state occurs together with the probability variation state, so that this effect appears after giving a predetermined profit to the player. . In addition, as a specific production example, as shown in FIG. 110, the first decoration movable body 430 and the second decoration movable body 432 are operated, and the cooperation with the decoration pattern displayed on the production display device 217 is performed. The effect of the content that the decorative design is shown to be broken is performed. At this time, red light is emitted from the second decorative movable body 432, and a sound that causes a tension to the player is output, thereby increasing the player's expectation.

  90 and 91 summarize the state transition in the development effect. These tables show the correspondence between the current state of play (ie, the background before the hit occurs) and the state of play (background) after each hit occurs. The background after a specific profit is given by the first advantageous gaming state (probability variation jackpot), that is, the background when the probability variation state and the short-time gaming state occur. This is a background after a specific profit is given by an advantageous gaming state (usually a big hit), that is, a background when a short-time gaming state with a limited number of times occurs. In addition, the “probability change latency” is a state in which the probability variation state is internally caused by the occurrence of the third advantageous gaming state, but the player cannot determine that the probability variation state is present (it appears on the surface). No state). In addition, “gase” indicates that a probability variation state has occurred, but is actually “small hit” and no probability variation state has occurred. As can be seen from FIG. 90, when the “normal background effect” is displayed and the third advantageous game state (the third big hit) occurs, Transition to either “Chance Production” or “Talking Time Production”, and the “3rd Advantage Game State” occurs when “Kata Kata Night Opportunity Production” is displayed in the state that is not in the probability fluctuation state (Gasse) If so, the process shifts to “Talking time production”. On the other hand, as can be seen from FIG. 91, when the “normal background effect” is displayed and the fourth advantageous game state (small hit) occurs, Transition to either “Chance Production” or “Talking Time Production”, and when “Katakata Night Chance Production” is displayed in a state where the probability is not changed (Gasse), the fourth advantageous gaming state occurs. If so, the process shifts to “Talking time production”.

  In other words, if neither the probability fluctuation state nor the short-time gaming state, even if a big hit (probability fluctuation state) occurs due to the third advantageous gaming state, even if a small hit occurs due to the fourth advantageous gaming state, the same Progressive production is performed in the flow. For this reason, it is impossible to distinguish both hits. For example, even if a “small hit” occurs, “it may be the third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, that is, “the probability variation state. "It may have rushed in."

  If the 3rd advantageous game state occurs when the “Talking time effect” is displayed in the state of the gas, the game shifts to the “Super chatting time effect”, but the 4th advantageous game state (small hit) ) Does not shift to “Super Chat Time Production”. For this reason, the “super-talking time effect” can be positioned as an effect in which the latency of the probability variation state is fixed, and the “chat time effect” can be changed from “the chatting time effect” to “ There will be a pattern that can be shifted to "Super Talking Time Production", and the change in production will become more noticeable due to the complexity of the production flow.

  In addition, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the probability variation state is hidden, it will shift to “Tokoro Megaten Mode Effect” regardless of what effect is being performed. Yes. According to this, the expectation to the lottery can be greatly enhanced by a special performance. The same applies when the fifth advantageous gaming state (fourth big hit) occurs.

  Also, if the first big hit (first advantageous gaming state) occurs, no matter what kind of performance is performed, after giving a certain profit, it will always be the background of "heaven", the second big hit ( When the second advantageous game state) occurs, it always becomes a background of “chance time” after giving a specific profit, regardless of what kind of effects are performed.

Next, a functional configuration of the peripheral substrate 811 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 84, when the control information command transmitted from the main control board 94 (corresponding to the main control means) is received by the command receiving means 951, the peripheral board 811 (corresponding to the sub control means) Various functions for controlling the effect display device 217 are provided.

  That is, as the effect table corresponding to the first big hit lottery, the first hit effect mode table 952a and the first off time effect mode table 953a are stored in advance, and based on these tables 952a and 953a, The production mode in the step production and the development production is determined.

  First, the production mode tables 952a and 953a will be described in detail. The first hit time effect mode table 952a is used in the case of big hit (or small hit), and shows the relationship between the random number for determining the effect (described later) and the effect mode (in this case, the effect pattern in the step effect and the development effect). It is shown. The first off-time effect mode table 953a is a table used in the case of a loss, and indicates the relationship between the effect determination random number and the effect pattern.

  The peripheral board 881 is provided with first effect random number extraction means 957a for extracting effect determination random numbers from a random counter (not shown) and first effect mode determination means 958a for determining effect patterns. When receiving the control command via the command receiving means 951, the first effect mode determining means 958a extracts the effect random number by the first effect random number extracting means 957a and the success / failure command included in the control command is a big hit (or In the case of a small hit), the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extracting means 957a and the effect effect table 952a at the time of the first effect. In the case of indicating an outage, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 957a and the effect mode table 953a during the first effect. Since the development effects are developed step by step over a plurality of performances, when the third advantageous gaming state (big hit) or the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit) occurs, the basics in the subsequent lottery The flow of production (that is, in what pattern until which production is developed) is determined.

  The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 958a is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 975a. The first effect display control means 975a reads out the images of those effects from the image storage means (not shown) to the effect display device 217. Here, the combination of the first effect mode determining means 958a and the first effect display control means 975a corresponds to the display control means of the present invention. The first effect display control means 975a corresponds to the common effect execution means and the third unique effect execution means of the present invention.

  On the other hand, a first decorative symbol variation control means 976a is provided as a functional configuration relating to the effect of the first decorative symbol 991. Based on the control command received by the command receiving unit 951, the first decorative symbol variation control unit 976a reads and varies the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage unit (not shown), and includes variations included in the control command. The decorative design is stopped based on the time, the success / failure command, etc. (that is, the lottery result).

  In the above description, the effects related to the first big hit lottery have been described, but the peripheral board 881 is also provided with a functional configuration for performing effects related to the second big hit lottery. Specifically, a second winning effect mode table 952b and a second off-time effect mode table 953b are stored in advance as performance tables corresponding to the second big hit lottery. These tables 952b and 953b are stored in advance. Based on this, the production mode in the step production and the development production is determined. The production mode tables 952b and 953b have the same configuration as the production mode tables 952a and 953a corresponding to the first big hit lottery, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Further, on the peripheral board 881, corresponding to the second big hit lottery, the second effect random number extraction means 957b, the second effect mode determination means 958b, the second effect display control means 975b, and the second decorative symbol variation control means. 976b is provided, but since these configurations also have the same functions as the functional configurations corresponding to the first big hit lottery, detailed description will be omitted.

  Further, the peripheral board 881 is provided with a decorative symbol sequence variation display means 960 and a big hit display means 964. The decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 960 is based on the outputs of the first decorative symbol fluctuation control means 976a and the second decorative symbol fluctuation control means 976b or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 951. The column 993 is changed, and the common decorative design row 993 is sequentially stopped based on the change time and the success / failure command included in the control command (that is, the lottery result). In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stopped symbols) that have already stopped on the active line at the stage before the final stopped symbol sequence that is stopped last among a plurality of common decorative symbol sequences 993 is a specific decoration. When the combination of symbols is satisfied, the reach state is established with the decorative symbol already stopped as the reach formation symbol.

  The jackpot display means 964 performs the lottery when the lottery result of the first jackpot lottery or the second jackpot lottery is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, that is, when the “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”. After stopping the variation of the common decorative design row 993, it is displayed that “big hit”. In addition, when the lottery result of the first big hit lottery or the second big hit lottery is the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the small hit, the “decision” is not displayed and the common decorative design column 993 is displayed. After the change is stopped, the effect related to the lottery is finished.

  Further, the peripheral board 881 is provided with a winning state implicit means 995 and a winning state indicating means 996. The winning state implied means 995 makes the player uncertain which of the winnings is given when a predetermined profit is given to the player by the third advantageous gaming state and the fourth advantageous gaming state. . Specifically, as described above, the “place slot effect”, the “katakata night chance effect”, and the “talking time effect” are to be allowed to appear in any advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, the winning state indication means 996 is specified by the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state even if a predetermined number of lotteries have been carried out from the provision of the profit when the predetermined benefit is given by the third advantageous gaming state. It is clear that the probability fluctuation state is hidden when the benefit of is not granted. Specifically, as described above, the “super chat time production” is to appear. According to this, it is possible to suppress “a game is ended halfway because it is not noticed even though it is in a probability variation state”.

  Next, the functional configuration and the flow of effects related to the development effect will be described in detail. The first effect display control means 975a and the second effect display control means 975b are the first normal state effect control means 1100 (shown in FIG. 99) related to the normal background effect and the second normal state related to the slot effect for the development effect. Production control means 1200 (shown in FIG. 100), high-probability expected small production control means 1300 (shown in FIG. 101) related to the Katakata night chance production, and high-probability expected large production control means 1400 (shown in FIG. 102) related to the chatting time production. ).

  As shown in FIG. 99, the first normal state effect control means 1100 has a special effect execution means 1101 and a point generation permission means 1103 as functional configurations. The special effect execution means 1101 executes a special effect that can appear during normal background effects, especially when the second special symbol is changed, and requests operation of the operation button (push button) 1102 during the effects. . When the special effect is derived, the point generation permission unit 1103 permits an item (including a point and an item symbol) to be provided when the operation button 1102 is pressed. In other words, if the normal background effect is performed in the normal gaming state, it is not a special effect, or if the operation button 1102 is not operated by the player even if the special effect is performed, the item is not displayed. ing. Here, the operation button 1102 corresponds to a push button of the present invention.

  As a specific effect example, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), when a special effect is executed, a character “PUSH” is displayed in the lottery state display section 998 and the operation button 1102 is pressed. Required. When the operation button 1102 is operated, a lottery is performed, and an item to be given is displayed on the lottery status display unit 998. The item may be a point (score) as shown in FIG. 104 (a) or an item symbol other than the point as shown in FIG. 104 (b) (T-shirt in this example). When points are given as items, the points are accumulated and displayed on the point display unit 999.

  As described above, since the special effect can be executed only when the second special symbol is changed and the operation button 1102 is operated when the special effect appears, the item is allowed to be given. It is possible to suppress the frequency at which the item is given, and to add a sharpness between the case where the item is given and the case where the item is not given, and it is possible to increase the interest in displaying the item. Further, it is possible to visually distinguish the lottery based on the first special symbol and the lottery based on the second special symbol, and it is possible to easily recognize that two types of lotteries are being performed. In particular, since the second start port 332 for starting the variation of the second special symbol suppresses the winning of the game ball unless it becomes a specific gaming state, the frequency of the item being given even in the normal gaming state is effective. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the operation of the operation button 1102 is requested, it is possible to actively participate in the production and acquire the item as if it were a game, instead of a passive production that is merely seen.

  Further, the first normal state effect control means 1100 includes privilege provision control means 1104, item display control means 1120, and first point totaling means 1121. The privilege grant control means 1104 gives an item based on the output of the point generation permission means 1103, the item selection table 1105 storing a plurality of types of items including points, and item selection prior to the derivation of the special effects. The item selection random number extraction unit 1106 for extracting the random number for use and the item determination unit 1107 for determining one item based on the extracted item selection random number and the item selection table 1105 are provided. In particular, the item selection table 1105 includes an item distribution table 1108 and an item conversion table 1109 as shown in FIG. The item distribution table 1108 shows the relationship between the item type (item contents) corresponding to each pattern and the distribution of each pattern. Here, patterns 1 to 10 correspond to item symbols, and patterns 11 to 13 correspond to points. In the item design, “TV”, “controller”, “guitar”, “banana”, and “T-shirt (blue)” of patterns 1 to 5 are relatively likely to appear. “T-shirt (green)”, “T-shirt (red)”, “T-shirt (white)”, “T-shirt (gold)”, and “window explosion” are relatively difficult to appear. On the other hand, “5 points” of pattern 11 occupies 40% of the entire item and is very easy to be given, whereas “10 points” is 2% of the whole and “20 points” is 0 of the whole. .5 percent, making it very difficult to apply.

  The item conversion table 1109 is used when the pattern selected based on the item distribution table 1108 and the item selection random number is any one of the patterns 11 to 13, that is, when a point is selected as an item to be added. It is a table. In this item conversion table 1109, whether or not points are converted into the pattern 5 (T-shirt (blue)) is distributed at a predetermined ratio corresponding to the total of points accumulated so far. For example, when the total up to now is 0 to 19 points, no conversion is performed at all, but when it is 40 to 59 points, 30 percent is converted, and when 100 points are reached, all conversion is performed. It has become so. In other words, the larger the total number of stored points, the easier it is to convert to an item image of pattern 5. In other words, it is set so that the probability that points are given becomes lower as it approaches 100 points. For this reason, it can suppress that the sum total of points reaches | attains a fixed value immediately, and the pleasure which collects points can be continued over a comparatively long term.

  By the way, by providing “0 points” as points, it is possible to control so that the total of points does not reach a certain value (100 points). However, when “0 points” is displayed, There is a possibility of giving an unpleasant feeling, and in particular, there is a concern that it may be annoying when it is continuously displayed. On the other hand, in this example, an item image is displayed instead of displaying “0 point”. For this reason, even if the given points are “0 points” and the total of the points does not change, it is possible to suppress the player's mood drop and to give visual interest by the item image Can do. In particular, as the item distribution table 1108, a table corresponding to the case where the lottery result is a win and a table corresponding to a case where the lottery is off are prepared, and the appearance rate of each item image is determined as the result of the success / failure (the lottery result). ) Depending on the situation. In other words, each item image is associated with an expected value for the lottery result, and when the item selection random number extraction unit 1106 extracts the item selection random number, the item selection random number and the item distribution table 1108 are extracted. The item image is determined based on the result of the determination. As described above, since it is possible to display an item image corresponding to the expected value of the lottery, it is possible to draw attention to the item image even when no points are displayed.

  99, the point or item image determined by the item determining unit 1107 is displayed on the lottery state display unit 998 by the item display control unit 1120. When points are awarded, the points are accumulated by the first point accumulating unit 1121 and the total is displayed on the point display unit 999. Here, the point generation permission unit 1103 corresponds to the privilege granting unit of the present invention, and the privilege grant control unit 1104 corresponds to the point generation unit of the present invention.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100, the second normal state effect control means 1200 has a slot effect execution means 1203 and a slot point generation means 1204 as functional configurations. The slot effect executing means 1203 is used when the third big hit determining means 1201 determines that the lottery result is the third big hit or when the small hit determining means 1202 determines that the lottery result is the small hit. , The execution of the slot effect (corresponding to the second normal state effect of the present invention) is started. The slot point generating means 1204 generates points in the slot effect. Prior to the slot effect, the point distribution table 1205 showing the relationship between the total of points and the distribution (appearance rate) of the given points. The point determination random number extracting means 1206 for extracting the granted point determination random number, and when the assigned point determination random number is extracted, the points are determined based on the determination random number, the total of stored points, and the point distribution table 1205 Point determining means 1207 for determining a value is provided.

  As the point distribution table 1205, a slot effect distribution table 1208 as shown in FIG. 94 is used. This slot effect distribution table 1208 shows the relationship between the contents of the effect corresponding to the pattern and the total of points currently accumulated, that is, the total of points accumulated in the normal background effect, and each numerical value is a denominator. Represents the ratio when. Here, the pattern 1 to the pattern 12 display the point value in the place slot effect, and the pattern 13 to the pattern 22 displays “to shift to the chatting time effect” in the place slot effect. In this table, “bita” means that the reel of the slot stops at the point or the destination, and “arrow” once stops at a different symbol (the symbol on the left side of the arrow) It means to shift to the true symbol (the symbol on the right side of the arrow). For example, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the state where the point just stops on the display D of the slot is “bita”, and as shown in FIG. is there. The slot effect distribution table 1208 includes a plurality of cases (for example, pattern 1 and pattern 2) having the same effect contents (those having the same effect result). Displayed variation patterns) are different from each other, and different production processes are displayed.

  By the way, when a point is given in a certain slot effect, if the total of the points may reach a certain value, it is not possible to match between the certain slot effect and the next katakana night chance effect. In other words, in the Katakata Night chance production, the production of “Accumulating points granted and shifting to the chat time production when the total of the points reaches a certain value” is performed, but before the Katakata Night chance production appears However, if the total of points reaches a certain value, the existence of the katakana night chance production itself is meaningless.

  However, according to the slot effect distribution table 1208 of this example, the area from the pattern 1 to the pattern 12, that is, the area displaying the points (hereinafter referred to as “first area”), and the area from the pattern 13 to the pattern 22 are displayed. In other words, it is divided into areas that display the transition destination (hereinafter referred to as “second area”). In the first area, a certain value is obtained even if the added points are added to the total of accumulated points. Points are assigned so that (100 points) is not reached. On the other hand, when the determined effect is included in the second area, the slot effect is shifted to the chat time effect without causing the Katakata night chance effect to appear. In other words, if a certain value is not reached even after the points to be given are added, after the points are given, a transition is made to the katakana night chance effect, whereas, if a certain value is reached, a transition is made to the chatting time effect. Note that when the transition is made directly to the chatting time effect, the point becomes unnecessary after that, so the transition destination is displayed without displaying the point. Further, in the slot effect distribution table 1208, the higher the total number of points stored (the closer to 100 points), the higher the possibility that an effect in the second area is selected. In other words, the higher the stored points, the easier it is to shift to chatting time production. In particular, when the total number of points stored in the normal background effect has reached 100 points, the process is always shifted to the chat time effect regardless of the random number for determining the granted points. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the contradiction between the effects and to realize the superiority of the effects due to reaching a certain value at a relatively early stage.

  The slot effect distribution table 1208 uses the same table regardless of whether the lottery result is a third big hit or a small hit. In other words, in the slot effect, the contents of the effect are determined using tables distributed at the same rate, so even a small hit is visually distinguished from a special hit with a probability variation state. I can't do that.

  When the point determination unit 1207 selects a pattern in the first area of the slot effect distribution table 1208, the point is output to the second point accumulation unit 1220, and the points accumulated by the first point accumulation unit 1121 are displayed. That is, it is added to the total of points accumulated in the normal background effect. Thereafter, when the first effect transition control means 1221 is operated and the pattern selected in the slot effect distribution table 1208 is included in the first area, that is, when the total of points has not reached 100 points, When the slot effect is shifted to the Katakata Night chance effect, and the selected pattern is included in the second area, the special background effect appearance means 1222 is changed so as to shift from the slot effect to the chatting time effect. Control. The special background effect appearing means 1222 displays any development effect on the effect display device 217. The special background effect appearing means 1222 is provided with a transition destination notice display means 1223, and appears. When switching the production to be performed, the transition destination is displayed in the production in the previous lottery.

  Further, the second normal state effect control means 1200 includes a route determination means 1224 and a Katata Kata derivation number setting means 1227 for use in the next effect Katakata Night chance effect. The route determination unit 1224 operates when the lottery result is a small hit and the first production transition control unit 1221 decides to shift to the katakana night chance production, and develops more than the katakana night chance production. One of the first route to return to the normal background effect without development, or the chat route time effect, and then the second route to return to the normal background effect is determined based on the total of points. That is, the route determination unit 1224 has the route distribution table 1225 shown in FIG. 93, and the distribution of the first route (1A) or the second route (1B) is accumulated by the second point accumulation unit 1220. It is set in association with the point. In the route distribution table 1225, the distribution ratio is set so that the probability that the second route (1B) is selected increases as the total of points increases. For this reason, even if there are few points awarded in the Katakata Night chance production, if the total of points accumulated in the normal background production or the slot production is large, there is a possibility of shifting to the chat time production Becomes higher.

  The Katakata derivation number setting unit 1227 sets the number of times of continuous derivation of the Katakata night chance 1003. The derivation number distribution table 1228 indicating the relationship between the route determined by the route determination unit 1224 and the number of continuation derivations, and the number determination When the random number for frequency determination is extracted and the random number for frequency determination is extracted, the number of continuous derivations is determined based on the random number for determination, the determined route, and the derivation frequency distribution table 1228. The number-of-times determining means 1240 is provided. In particular, in the derivation frequency allocation table 1228, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the continuous derivation frequency (that is, the number of games) is changed between 6 times and 10 times. Is set for each route. Here, the numerical value indicates the ratio when the denominator is 200, “Katakata 1A” is the first route, that is, the route that ends in the Katakata Night chance production, and “Katakata 1B” is the second route, that is, The route ends after the talk time production has been developed, and “Katakata 2” is the production that results in a lottery and the super chat time production. In the derivation frequency allocation table 1228 of this example, the allocation of the continuous derivation times in “katakata 1B” and “katakata 2” is the same, and the continuation derivation frequency is 9 times most frequently. On the other hand, “Katakata 1A” is set so that the number of continuous derivations is smaller than that of “Katakata 1B” and “Katakata 2”. As the number increases, the distribution rate decreases. Therefore, when shifting to the chatting time effect, it is possible to raise the feeling of expectation gradually by the Katakata Night chance effecting, which is the middle stage, and to raise the mood when shifting to the chatting time effect. On the other hand, if you do not shift to chatting time production, you can suppress the decline in motivation for not developing into chatting time production by ending the Katakata Night chance production at a relatively early stage Become.

  Here, the slot point generating means 1204 corresponds to the point generating means of the present invention, the second point accumulating means 1220 and the first effect transition control means 1221 correspond to the point accumulating means of the present invention, and the route determining means 1224 is the present. It corresponds to the route selection means of the invention, and the katakata derivation number setting means 1227 corresponds to the derivation number setting means of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the high-probability expected small effect control means 1300 has a Katakata effect execution means 1301 and a Katakata point generation means 1302 as functional configurations. The Katakata production execution unit 1301 starts the Katakata night chance production based on the output of the first production transition control unit 1221 (see FIG. 100). The Katakata point generating means 1302 gives predetermined points as a privilege during the Katakata Night chance production, and shows the relationship between the total of points accumulated by the second point accumulating means 1220 and the distribution of assigned point values. Point distribution table 1303 to be shown, point determination random number extracting means 1304 for extracting a random number for determining a given point, and a random number for determining a given point when the random number for determining a given point is extracted. A point determination unit 1305 for determining points to be given based on a total of accumulated points and a point distribution table 1303 is provided. The point distribution table 1303 is a notice effect distribution table 1306 (see FIG. 95 (b)) showing the correspondence between each pattern and the contents of the effect in the Katakata Night chance effect, and the relationship between each pattern and the total of points (distribution). ) Three types of drop point sorting tables 1307, 1308, and 1309 (see FIG. 96). In the notice effect distribution table 1306 shown in FIG. 95 (b), the patterns 3 to 6 are effects related to the points, specifically the effects of dropping the point card P on which the points are displayed, and the patterns 7 to 9 are This is an effect in which something other than the point card P falls. The effects of Pattern 7 to Pattern 9 appear as a precursor to transition to a normal background effect or a chatting time effect. Pattern 2 is an effect in which only the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are moved and the point card P does not appear.

  The fall point distribution table is divided based on the route determined by the route determining means 1224 and the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result is a small hit and the first route (katakata 1A) is selected, the drop point distribution table 1307 corresponding to the case where the lottery result is a small hit and the second route (katakata 1B) is selected. And a drop point distribution table 1309 corresponding to the case where the lottery result is the third big hit (katakata 2). The drop point distribution tables 1308 and 1309 corresponding to Katakata 1B or Katakata 2 are the same as each other, and the drop point distribution table 1307 corresponding to Katakata 1A is more than the other two distribution tables 1308 and 1309. This makes it difficult to select a pattern with a high point value. In any of the drop point allocation tables 1307, 1308, and 1309, the larger the total number of stored points, the more difficult it is to assign a large point value.

  In particular, in this example, when the point value is determined, in the case of “Katakata 1A”, even if the continuous derivation number set by the katakata derivation number setting means 1227 is performed, the total number of points is a constant value ( The point value is determined so that it does not reach (100 points). On the other hand, in the case of “katakata 1B” or “katakata 2”, when the last round or slightly previous round of katakana night chance effects are derived The point value is determined so that the total of points reaches a certain value. In other words, in the Katakata Night chance production, it appears as if it is possible to shift to the chat time production on the condition that the given points reach 100 points, but in fact, the Katakata Night chance production continues The number of derivations and the transition destination (route) of the effect are set in advance, and the points given to match the number of continuous derivations and the transition destination are determined. In other words, even if the total number of points given is a constant value, the transition to the chat time production is performed until the number of executions of the Katakata Night Chan production reaches the number of continuous derivations set by the Katakata derivation number setting means 1227. Postponed. For this reason, it can be suppressed that the katakana night chance production becomes extremely short and the content of the production cannot be fully enjoyed, or conversely becomes extremely long and tired of repetition of the production. Also, in the Katakata Night chance production, when the total of points reaches a certain value, it can be recognized that “it has been promised to develop into a chatting time production”, and to shift to the chatting time production Can increase their willingness.

  By the way, when developing into a chatting time effect, drop point distribution tables 1308 and 1309 shown in FIG. 96 (b) or (c) are used, but since each effect pattern is determined based on random numbers, Even if the set number of continuous derivations is performed, the total number of points may not reach a certain value during that time. That is, there is a possibility that the katakana night chance effect will end without reaching a certain value. Therefore, in this example, when it is decided to develop into a chatting time production, even if the final Katakata night chance production is performed, if the total of points does not reach a certain value, the chatting time production is performed. A display to the effect of transition, for example, “Large mark” of pattern 9 is displayed. This makes it possible to recognize that “the total point has not reached a certain value, but has shifted to the chatting time effect due to the remedy”, and shifts to the chatting time effect without reaching the constant value. It does not arouse mysterious feelings about doing. Note that this “main point mark” may be displayed instead of the point. In this case, even if the total of the points does not reach a certain value, the transition to the chatting time effect is ensured. That is, in the drop point distribution table 1307 shown in FIG. 96A, there is no distribution for the pattern 9, but in the drop point distribution tables 1308 and 1309 shown in FIGS. Therefore, it can appear only when shifting to the chat time production.

  As shown in FIG. 101, when a point is generated by the Katakata point generating means 1302, the point is output to the third point accumulating means 1320 and sequentially added to the total of points accumulated by the second point accumulating means 1220. Is added. The total of all points is displayed on the point display section PT (see FIG. 108) displayed at the bottom of the Katakata Night chance effect, and when the total of points reaches a certain value, that fact is displayed. It has come to be.

  Further, the high-probability expected small effect control means 1300 includes a derivation number counting means 1321 that counts the number of executions of the Katakata Night chance effect, and a continuous derivation number set by the Katakata derivation number setting means 1227. The second production transition control means 1322 is provided for transitioning from the Katakata Night chance production to the chatting time production or from the Katakata Night chance production to the normal background production.

  In addition, the high-probability expected small effect control means 1300 is provided with point erasing means 1323 for erasing a part or all of the stored points when shifting from the Katakata Night chance effect to the normal background effect. The point erasure unit 1323 includes a remaining point distribution table 1324, a remaining point determination random number extraction unit 1325 for extracting the remaining point determination random number, the extracted remaining point determination random number, and the total of the stored points (that is, the third point And a remaining point determination means 1326 for determining whether or not to leave points based on a remaining point distribution table 1324. In the remaining point distribution table 1324, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), distribution for pattern 7 (effect that leaves no points) and pattern 8 (effect that leaves 20 points) is set in correspondence with the total of points. As the total number of points increases, the rate at which the pattern 8 is selected increases. For example, if the total number of points is 20 points or less, there is no effect that leaves points, but if the total number of points is 51 points or more, the effect that leaves points and the effect that does not leave points are halved. Appears at a rate. In this way, the larger the total of points, the easier it is to leave some of them, and when they are left, after returning to the normal background effect, the accumulation is resumed from the remaining points. . Accordingly, it is possible to reduce a decrease in expectation when returning from the katakana night chance effect to the normal background effect, and it is possible to suppress the end of the game at that time.

  Here, the Katakata point generation means 1302 corresponds to the point generation means of the present invention, the point determination means 1305 corresponds to the point value determination means of the present invention, and the third point accumulation means 1320 corresponds to the point accumulation means of the present invention. The second effect transition control means 1322 corresponds to the effect transition control means and the effect transition postponement means of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the high-probability expected large effect control unit 1400 has a chatting effect execution unit 1401 and a chatting derivation number setting unit 1402 as functional configurations. The chatting effect execution means 1401 starts the chatting time effect based on the output of the first effect transition control means 1221 (see FIG. 100) or the second effect transition control means 1322 (see FIG. 101). The chatting derivation number setting means 1402 determines the derivation number for each background effect in the chatting time effect based on the lottery. More specifically, the chatting time effect has three types of background images including morning, evening, and night as background effects, and these background images are sequentially switched and displayed. Then, the chatting time effect using each background image is executed by the number of times set by the chatting derivation number setting means 1402. The chatting derivation number setting means 1402 includes a pattern distribution table 1403 indicating the relationship between the number pattern obtained by combining the derivation times of the respective background effects and the lottery result, and a random number for pattern selection before the transition to the chatting time effect. Based on the extracted pattern selection random number extraction means 1404, the extracted pattern selection random number, the lottery result (ie, the output of the third big hit determination means 1201 or the small hit determination means 1202), and the pattern distribution table 1403 And a derivation number recognizing means 1406 for recognizing the derivation number in each background effect from the determined number pattern. The pattern distribution table 1403 includes a chatting (1) table 1407 shown in FIG. 97 and a chatting (2) table 1408 shown in FIG. Here, “Talking (1)” indicates that the lottery result is the fourth result (small hit), and “Talking (2)” indicates that the lottery result is the third big hit (special hit with probability variation state). ). The number of modes (corresponding to the number of derivations) contains three types of numerical values. From the left, this indicates the number of derivations in the morning background, evening background, and night background. ing. For example, (3, 3, 24) described in the first column performs “morning background effect” three times, then “evening background effect” three times, and “night background effect” 24 times. This shows that a chat time effect is performed 30 times in total. Although omitted for the sake of convenience, a numerical value indicating the morning background and a numerical value indicating the evening background are also set to be reversed, and each is assigned at a ratio of 1: 1. For example, when the number of modes is (3, 6, 8) and the distribution ratio is 142/200014, the “morning background effect” is 3 times, the “evening background effect” is 6 times, and the “night background” There is a pattern in which “direction” is performed 8 times, and a pattern in which morning and evening are reversed, “morning background effect” is performed 6 times, “evening background effect” is performed 3 times, and “night background effect” is performed 8 times. Each of them is selected at a distribution ratio of 71/200014.

  As can be seen from the chatting (1) table 1407 and the chatting (2) table 1408, the total number of derivations in the chatting time production is a fixed number (30 in this example) in the case of chatting (1) (in the case of small hits). In the case of chat (2) (in the case of third big hit), the number is limited to a certain number. For this reason, if the transition is not made to the super chatting time production, the chatter time production is performed less than a certain number of times, and then the normal background production is resumed. It will develop after the time production. Therefore, the player wishes that the chatting time effect is continuously executed a certain number of times, and does not provoke dissatisfaction or irritation even if the relatively monotonous effect is repeated. . The certain number of times (for example, 30 times) is set to a number that is larger than the predicted number of times until the big hit, which is predicted based on the probability that the first hit or the second hit occurs in the probability variation state. For this reason, even if the number of lotteries predicted to be a big hit has elapsed, when such an advantageous gaming state is not achieved, the transition to the super chatting time effect is made. In other words, `` If the probability fluctuation state did not occur '', the super chatting time production appears to aim at the timing of starting to be aware of the end of the game, so the joy of the super chatting time production appearing further In addition to being large, it is possible to prevent the game from being ended even though the probability variation state is hidden.

  Further, in the chatting (2) table 1408, as compared with the chatting (1) table 1407, the ratio of deriving the “morning background effect” or “evening background effect” is relatively high. For example, the probability that both “morning background effect” and “evening background effect” are derived 12 times or more is 200/200014 in the case of chatting (1), but in the case of chatting (2). Is 1100/200014, which is selected at a rate of about 5.5 times. That is, when the lottery result is the third big hit, the background effect switching is set to be slower than when the lottery result is the small hit. In this way, the slower the switching of the background effect, the higher the possibility that it will be the third hit, that is, the possibility of developing into a super chatting time effect, so it becomes possible to pay attention to the switching of the background effect. .

  As shown in FIG. 102, the high-probability expected large effect control means 1400 counts the number of executions of the chatting time effect by the chatting effect count unit 1409 for counting each background effect and the chatting effect count unit 1409. The background effect switching unit 1420 that switches the background effect every time the number of executions for each background effect reaches the derivation number set by the chatting derivation number setting unit 1402, and the entire chatting time effect counted by the chatting effect number counting unit 1409 When the number of executions reaches the total number of derivations set by the chatter derivation number setting means 1402, third effect transition control means 1421 is provided for shifting to either the normal background effect or the super chatter time effect. Yes. That is, when the lottery result is a small hit, the third effect transition control means 1421 shifts the chatting time effect to the normal background effect after performing the continuous derivation number, while the lottery result is the third big hit. After the number of continuous derivations of the chatting time production, the transition to super chatting time production is made. In other words, whether or not to shift to the super chat time production, each background production is derived in turn by the number of times determined in the lottery, so it is possible to fully enjoy the content of the production and changes in the background. .

  Here, the chatting effect execution means 1401 corresponds to the effect execution means of the present invention, the chatter derivation number setting means 1402 corresponds to the derivation number determination means of the present invention, and the background effect switching means 1420 serves as the number limiting means of the present invention. The third effect transition control means 1421 corresponds to the effect transition control means of the present invention. The pattern selection random number extraction means 1404 corresponds to the derivation number random number extraction means of the present invention, the chatting (1) table 1407 corresponds to the first derivation number table of the present invention, and the chatting (2) table 1408. Corresponds to the second derivation number table of the present invention.

  Next, the flow of processing (background selection processing) in the above-described development effect will be described based on the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 74 shows background selection processing, FIG. 75 shows special background processing in the background selection processing, FIG. 76 shows Katakata 1A background processing in special background processing, and FIG. 77 shows Katakata 1B background in special background processing. FIG. 78 shows the chatter 1 background process in the special background process, and FIG. 79 shows the chatter 2 background process in the special background process.

  In the background selection process shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether or not a special background has been selected, that is, whether or not a development effect to be derived has been determined (step S1301). When the special background is selected (YES in step S1301), the lottery result is a predetermined hit pattern other than the third big hit or the small hit, that is, the first big hit or the second that shifts to the big hit state effect. It is determined whether it corresponds to a big hit or a fourth big hit that shifts to the Tokoro mega heaven mode effect (step S1302). In step S1302, if it is included in the predetermined hit pattern (YES in step S1302), the background selection process is terminated, and if it is not included in the predetermined hit pattern (in step S1302). NO), special background processing is executed (step S1303). The special background process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the special background is not selected in step S1301 (NO), it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (step S1304). It is determined whether any one of patterns 1 to 12 (that is, the first region) is selected in the effect distribution table 1208 (see FIG. 94) (step S1305). If the pattern of the first area is selected (YES in step S1305), the first route (1A) is selected in the Katakata selection table (corresponding to the route distribution table 1225 (see FIG. 93)). (Step S1306). If the first route (1A) is selected (YES), the Katakata 1A flag is set (step S1307), while if the first route is not selected, that is, the second route (1B) is selected. If so (NO in step S1306), the Katakata 1B flag is set (step S1308). Thus, after the Katakata 1A or Katakata 1B flag is set, the number of continued derivations is determined based on the stay game number distribution table (corresponding to the derivation number distribution table 1228 (see FIG. 95 (a))). The number of times is set in the stay counter (step S1309).

  On the other hand, if any of pattern 13 to pattern 22 (that is, the second region) is selected in slot effect distribution table 1208 (NO in step S1304), the chatter 1 flag is set (step S1310), Based on the chatting mode stay game number distribution table (corresponding to the chatting (1) table 1407 (see FIG. 97)), the number of derivations for each background effect in the chatting time effect is determined, and the number is set in the counter (step S1311).

  If it is determined in step S1304 that it is not a small hit (NO), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a third big hit (step S1312). If it is the third big hit (YES in step S1312), any one of the patterns 1 to 12 in the specific slot effect distribution table (equivalent to the small hit slot effect distribution table 1208) (that is, the first It is determined whether one area) is selected (step S1313). If the first area pattern is selected (YES in step S1313), the chat 2 flag is set (step S1314), and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, the chat (2) table 1408 is used as the chat mode stay game number distribution table. On the other hand, if any of pattern 13 to pattern 22 (that is, the second region) is selected in slot effect distribution table 1208 (NO in step S1313), the Katakata 2 flag is set (step S1315), and step The process moves to S1309.

  If it is not determined that the third big hit is determined in step S1312, (NO), it is determined whether the lottery result is the fourth big hit (fifth result) (step S1316). The four background flags are set (step S1317), and the background selection process ends. Also, if it is not determined that the fourth big hit (NO), it is determined whether the lottery result is the second big hit (step S1318), and if the second big hit (YES), the second background flag is set. (Step S1319), the background selection process is terminated. Furthermore, if it is not determined that the second big hit (NO), it is determined whether the lottery result is the first big hit (step S1320). If the first big hit (YES), the first background flag is set. (Step S1321), the background selection process is terminated. If it is not the first big hit, the background selection process is terminated as it is.

  In the special background process shown in step S1303, as shown in FIG. 75, first, the special background 2 is selected, that is, either the Katakata night chance effect or the chat time effect is selected as the development effect to be derived. Is determined (step S1329). If special background 2 is selected (YES in step S1329), Katakata 1A background processing (Step S1330), Katakata 1B background processing (Step S1340), Katakata 2 background processing (Step S1350), Chat 1 Background processing (step S1360) and chatter 2 background processing (step S1380) are sequentially executed, and then a display command corresponding to the special background pattern is set (step S1395).

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the Katakata 1A background process, it is determined whether or not the Katakata 1A flag is set in Step S1307 (Step S1331). If the Katakata 1A flag is set (YES), It is determined whether or not the number of stay games (the number of executions) of the production corresponds to the final game (final game) (step S1332). If it corresponds to the final game (YES in step S1332), the final effect is selected based on the final distribution table (corresponding to the remaining point distribution table 1324 (see FIG. 95C)) (step After that, the normal background shift flag is turned on (step S1334). On the other hand, if the number of stay games does not correspond to the final game (NO in step S1332), a pattern is selected in the drop point distribution table 1307 (see FIG. 96A) and the stay game counter is set to “1”. To finish the Katakata 1A background processing. If it is determined in step S1331 that the Katakata 1A flag is not set (NO), the Katakata 1A background processing is terminated as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in Katakata 1B background processing and Katakata 2 background processing (hereinafter collectively referred to as Katakata 1B (2) background processing), the Katakata 1B flag is set in Step S1308, or Katakata 1B is processed in Step S1315. 2 is set (step S1341), and if the Katakata 1B flag or Katakata 2 flag is set (YES), it is determined whether or not the stay fluctuation counter is the maximum value, that is, the last Katakata. It is determined whether it is a night chance effect (step S1342). If the counter is at the maximum value (YES in step S1342), the chatter 1 flag (in the case of Katakata 1B background processing) or the chatter 2 flag (in the case of Katakata 2 background processing) is set (Step S1343). Further, as in step S1311, the number of derivations for each background effect in the chat time effect is determined based on the chat mode stay game number distribution table, and the number of times is set in the counter (step S1344).

  On the other hand, if the stay fluctuation counter is not at the maximum value (NO in step S1342), a pattern is selected from the drop point distribution tables 1308 and 1309 (see FIGS. 96 (b) and (c)), and “1” is added to the stay game counter, and the Katakata 1B (2) background processing ends. If it is determined in step S1341 that the Katakata 1B flag or Katakata 2 flag is not set (NO), the Katakata 1B (2) background processing is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the chatter 1 background process, it is determined whether or not the chatter 1 flag is set in step S1310 or step S1343 (step S1361). If the chatter 1 flag is set (YES), It is determined whether the variation counter has reached the set mode number, that is, whether the number of derivations set for each background effect has been reached (step S1362). If the set mode number has not been reached (NO), “1” is added to the variation counter (step S 1363), and the chatter 1 background process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation counter has reached the set mode number (YES in step S1362), it is determined whether “morning background effect” is being derived (step S1364). If the “morning background effect” has been derived (YES), the evening background flag is turned on and the counter is set (step S1365), and then the counter in the “morning background effect” is reset (step S1365). S1366). If “morning background effect” has not been derived (NO in step S1364), it is determined whether “evening background effect” is being derived (step S1367). If the “evening background effect” is derived (YES), the night background flag is turned on, the counter is set (step S1368), and then the counter in the “evening background effect” is reset. (Step S1369). If the “evening background effect” has not been derived, that is, if the “night background effect” has been derived (NO in step S1367), the flag relating to the first normal state effect is turned on. (Step S1370), the counter in “Night background effect” is reset (Step S1371).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79, in the chatter 2 background process, it is determined whether the chatter 2 flag is set in step S1314 or step S1343 (step S1381), and if the chatter 2 flag is set (YES) ), Whether the variation counter has reached the set mode number, that is, whether the number of derivations set for each background effect has been reached (step S1382). If the set mode number has not been reached (NO), “1” is added to the variation counter (step S1383), and the chatter 2 background process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation counter has reached the set mode number (YES in step S1382), it is determined whether “morning background effect” is being derived (step S1384). If the “morning background effect” has been derived (YES), the evening background flag is turned on and the counter is set (step S1385), and then the counter in the “morning background effect” is reset (step S1385). S1386). If “morning background effect” has not been derived (NO in step S1384), it is determined whether “evening background effect” is being derived (step S1387). If the “evening background effect” is derived (YES), the night background flag is turned on, the counter is set (step S1388), and then the counter in the “evening background effect” is reset. (Step S1389). If the “evening background effect” is not derived, that is, if the “night background effect” is derived (NO in step S1387), the flag related to the super chatting time effect is turned on ( In step S1390), the counter in “night background effect” is reset (step S1391).

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the lottery result is the third result, that is, as the display mode that can appear when the third advantageous gaming state (big hit), the normal gaming state A normal state effect (a slot effect) showing a high probability expectation small effect (katakata night chance effect) indicating that a probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means 933c, A high probability expected large effect (talking time effect) indicating that the probability variation state is highly likely to have occurred by the three advantageous gaming state control means 933c, and a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means 933c. It has a high probability state effect (super chatting time effect) indicating that On the other hand, when the lottery result is the fourth result, that is, as a display mode that can appear in the case of the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit), the normal state effect (place slot effect) and the high probability expected small effect ( Katakata Night Chance Production) and High Probability Expectation Production (Talking Time Production). That is, in the fourth advantageous gaming state, although the high probability state effect (the effect indicating that the probability variation state has occurred) cannot appear, the other effects appear in the same manner as the third advantageous game state. It is possible.

  In addition, the high probability state production (super chatting time production) that appears only in the third advantageous gaming state is the stage of high probability expectation small production (katakata night chance production) and high probability expectation large production (chatting time production). It is a production that appears after that, and the transition from the high probability expectation small production to the high probability expectation large production requires the establishment of the first condition (the total of points exceeds a predetermined value) as a requirement, and the high probability expectation large production Since the transition from to high probability state production requires the establishment of the second condition (a predetermined number of lotteries are performed), even if the probability variation state occurs in the third advantageous gaming state, The “probability state effect” does not appear immediately. In other words, the third advantageous gaming state and the fourth advantageous gaming state cannot be distinguished for a while from when the predetermined profit is given until the “high probability state effect” appears. . For this reason, even if the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit) occurs, “may be the third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, that is, “probability fluctuation state may have entered. ", And the player's expectation can be enhanced. Therefore, the willingness to play is increased and the end of the game due to dissatisfaction can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Also, in any advantageous game state, basically, the transition from the normal state effect (place slot effect) to the high probability expectation small effect (katakata night chance effect), the high probability expectation small effect to the high probability expectation large effect Since it shifts to (Talking time production), it becomes possible to raise the expectation for high probability step by step. For this reason, the willingness to game improves and it can prevent as much as possible that a game will be complete | finished on the way. Furthermore, in the case of the third advantageous gaming state, a high-probability state effect indicating “being in a state of changing probability” will eventually appear, which gives the player a sense of security and draws lottery. It is possible to drastically increase the expectation of the user, that is, the expectation that a specific profit will be given.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the high-probability expected large effect (talking time effect) has a plurality of background effects that can be derived in a predetermined order, and the high-probability expected large effect is continuously executed. The number of times is set for each background effect. In particular, the number of times the background effect is derived is determined by lottery, and is determined before the transition to the high-probability expected large effect. When the lottery result is the fourth result, after all the high-probability expected large productions are finished, the process shifts to the normal state production. On the other hand, when the lottery result is the third result, all the high-probability expected large productions are performed. After the production ends, the process shifts to a high probability state production. That is, whether or not the transition is made to the high-probability state effect, each background effect is derived by the number determined by the lottery, so that the contents of the effect and the change of the background can be fully enjoyed. In other words, the background variation pattern becomes more complex and the change can be difficult to predict compared to a case where the number of derivations is constant. In addition, each background effect can be derived an appropriate number of times compared to the one that draws whether or not to develop each time the effect is executed. On the other hand, it can be prevented from being bored by repeated for a long time.

  In particular, the slower the background effect changes, the more likely it is the third result, that is, the higher probability state effect, so the player will pay attention to the background change. . In other words, if it is assumed that “the transition to the high-probability state effect after the same effect is derived a certain number of times”, only whether or not the effect continues to appear is noticed. However, according to the present invention, since it is hoped that the background effect does not change, the content of the effect can be noted.

  In addition, the number of derivations for each background effect is determined by lottery, but the total number of derivations obtained by accumulating all the derivation times, that is, the number of times that all high-probability expected large effects (talking time effects) are continuously executed is If the lottery result is the fourth result, the total number of derivations is limited to less than a certain number, and if the lottery number is the third result, the total number of derivations is limited to a certain number. In other words, if the transition to the high-probability state effect is not performed, the high-probability expected large-scale production less than a certain number of times is performed, and then the normal state is restored. It will develop after a high-probability expectation production is performed. Therefore, the player hopes that the high-probability expected large-scale production will be performed continuously for a certain number of times, and even if a relatively monotonous production is repeated, the player will be frustrated and frustrated. There is no. In other words, the longer the number of derivations of the high-probability expected production, the higher the sense of expectation, so that the game motivation can be increased by repeating the production. Furthermore, in this example, even if the number of lotteries predicted to be in the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state elapses, if such an advantageous gaming state is not reached, the transition to the high probability state effect is made. To do. In other words, “the probability variation state has not occurred”, the high probability state effect is caused to appear at the timing when the player starts to be aware of the end of the game. Therefore, the joy due to the appearance of the high-probability state effect can be further increased, and the game can be suppressed from being ended even though the probability fluctuation state is hidden.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the random number for pattern selection is extracted before the transition to the high-probability expected production (talking time production), and the random number for pattern selection and the lottery result (third result or The number of times pattern is determined based on the fourth result) and the pattern distribution table. Here, the number pattern is a combination of the number of times of derivation of each background effect, and is set so that the number of times of derivation in at least one background effect is different between the number of times patterns. For this reason, by grouping each derivation count as a pattern, it is possible to set the total number of high-probability expected large productions (total derivation count) to an appropriate number, and to reduce the number of derivations for each background effect. Can be changed to rules. That is, it is possible to reliably prevent the number of executions of the entire high-probability expected large effect from becoming extremely long or extremely short, while changing the number of derivations for each background effect.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the high probability expectation small production (katakata night chance production), a privilege other than valuable value is given as the game progresses, and the first condition is established based on this privilege. It is determined whether or not. When the first condition is satisfied, a high-probability expectation large effect (talking time effect) appears instead of the high-probability expectation small effect. Therefore, the player comes to pay attention to whether or not a privilege is granted while visually recognizing the high probability expectation small effect, and as a result, the interest of the high probability expectation small effect (katakata night chance effect) can be enhanced. In particular, as a privilege, a predetermined point (score) is given for each effect, and when the total of the points reaches a certain value, the high probability expected small effect shifts to the high probability expected large effect. Therefore, the player is interested in collecting points and can further increase the willingness to advance the game. In addition, since the higher the total of the points, the more advantageous it becomes, so even if the same type of high-probability expected small effects appear continuously, it is reduced that the content of the effects is bored.

  In addition, this point may be given not only in the high probability expectation small effect (katakata night chance effect) but also in the normal state effect (normal background effect and place slot effect). Accordingly, the pleasure of acquiring points in the normal state effect is increased, and the willingness to shift to the high probability expectation small effect can be further enhanced by associating the normal state effect with the high probability expectation small effect. In other words, when points that reach a certain value are given in the normal state performance, “It was promised to develop from a high-probability expected small production to a high-probability expected large production”, or “ It can be recognized as “a certainty”, and the willingness to shift to a high-probability expectation small production can be increased. In other words, from the normal gaming state before the appearance of high-probability expected small effects, it becomes possible to be involved in games played with high-probability expected small effects, and it is possible to further increase interest in these series of effects. become.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since unspecified points are generated based on random numbers, attention to the points is further increased, and sharpness can be given when points are given. In addition, since the larger the total number of points stored, the harder the point value is given, it is possible to suppress the point total from reaching a certain value immediately. That is, the pleasure of collecting points can be continued for a relatively long time. Conversely, when the total point is low, a relatively large point value can be given. For example, if a large point value is given at the beginning of the game, it becomes possible to attract the player's consciousness. In the normal state effect, the first normal state effect (normal background effect) that can appear even if the lottery result does not become the third result or the fourth result, and the third result or the fourth result appear. If the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result, the first normal state effect is changed to the second normal state effect, and then the high It shifts to the probability expectation small effect (or high probability expectation large effect). In the first normal state effect, the point value to be given is determined so as not to reach a constant value even if the point value to be given is added to the total of the stored points. That is, when the value approaches a certain value, the given points are limited to an extremely small point value, or the point value is set to “0” so as not to reach the certain value. Therefore, in the second normal state effect derived after the third result or the fourth result, it becomes possible to reach a certain value for the first time, and when it reaches a certain value, it immediately develops to the next effect. It becomes possible to make it. For this reason, the relationship between the total of accumulated points and the transition condition of the production becomes clear, and the reliability of the points can be improved.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the point value given in the first normal state effect (normal background effect) is “0”, the item image is displayed instead of the point value. ing. For this reason, even if the point value is “0” and the total does not change, the player's mood can be suppressed, and visual interest can be given by the item image. In particular, since multiple types of item images and the expected value for the lottery result of the lottery means are related to each other, it is possible to display the item image corresponding to the expected value, and eliminate the hatred of the item image. be able to.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the slot effect distribution table 1208 in the high probability expectation small effect (place slot effect) is divided into the first area and the second area, and the total of the stored points is A point group that does not reach a certain value even when a given point is added is defined as a first area, and another area, that is, a point group that reaches a certain value is defined as a second area. When the determined point value is included in the second area, the second normal state effect is shifted to the high probability expected large effect without causing the high probability expected small effect to appear. In other words, if you do not reach a certain value even if you add points, you will be transferred to a high-probability expected small effect after giving points, while if you reach a certain value, you will go to a high-probability expected large production I am trying to migrate. Therefore, in the second normal state production, when giving points, it is grasped beforehand whether or not the total of points reaches a certain value, and when it is reached, it is shifted directly to the high probability expectation large production. It is possible to prevent the contradiction between the effects due to the presence of the effects. In particular, when determining the point value in the high-probability expected small effect, the total of points given in the first normal state effect is taken into consideration, and the point value of the second region is selected as the total of points is higher Since the possibility increases, for example, the points accumulated in the first normal state production are compared to “the point value that is given so that the total of points does not reach a certain value in the high probability expectation small production”. Processing that makes use of it becomes possible.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result is the fourth result (small hit), the second normal state effect (place slot effect) is shifted to the high probability expectation small effect (katakata night chance effect). If it is decided to make the first route or the second route, it is determined by lottery, and even if a predetermined number of high-probability expected small effects are performed, the accumulated points When the total does not reach a certain value, an effect to be transferred thereafter is determined based on the lottery result and the selected route. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the production in the case of the third result from ending in the middle of a series of productions, and the transition to the high probability expected production (chat time production) is the case of the third result In addition, since there may be a fourth result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the probability variation state from being recognized until a high probability state effect is derived. In particular, since the possibility that the second route is selected increases as the total of the stored points increases, it is possible to give a higher interest to the points given in the normal state effect.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the high-probability expected production (talking time production) is not caused to appear, the high value is obtained before the first condition is satisfied, that is, before the total of points reaches a certain value. It will return from the small probability expectation production (katakata night chance production) to the first normal state production (normal background production), but in this case all or part of the accumulated points will be erased, so it is in the zero state Alternatively, the first normal state effect is started again from an extremely small state. For example, even if small hits occur continuously, it is possible to prevent the accumulated points from becoming extremely large.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the first normal state effect (normal background effect), it is possible to give points only when the second special symbol changes, and when the first special symbol changes, In order not to be granted, the frequency at which points are given can be reduced, and the sharpness between the cases where points are given and cases where points are not given can be added, and the interest in giving points can be increased. It becomes. Moreover, it becomes possible to visually distinguish the lottery based on the first special symbol and the lottery based on the second special symbol, and it is possible to easily recognize that two types of lotteries are being performed. In particular, since the second start port 332 for starting the variation of the second special symbol is easy to win when entering the specific gaming state, it further enhances the pleasure of entering the specific gaming state. Can do. In addition, since the special effect is performed in the first normal state effect (normal background effect) and only when the operation button 1102 is operated, the points can be given, so the frequency of giving points is more efficient. It can be suppressed to reach a certain value immediately. Furthermore, since the operation of the operation button 1102 is requested, it is possible to actively participate in the production and acquire points as if it were a game, rather than just a passive production just watching. In the first normal state effect, the total of stored points is always displayed. In other words, points can be awarded only when the second special symbol is changing, but the total of points is also displayed when the first special symbol is not awarded. I have to. Therefore, it becomes possible for a player who is always aware of interest in points to start playing a game, and to use information about points as information for selecting a game machine. In other words, it is possible to increase the willingness to play, that is, “I want to play on a game table in which many points have already been accumulated”.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the “third advantageous gaming state” occurs when the gaming state is not at least the probability variation state and not the short-time gaming state (that is, in the normal time), the short-time gaming state It is made to be in a probability fluctuation state without generating. For this reason, the distinction between the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state” can be made more difficult. The display mode that can appear in the case of the fifth advantageous gaming state is a high-probability short-time state effect indicating that the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 933e has generated a probability variation state and a short-time gaming state. Therefore, when winning the “fifth advantageous gaming state”, it is easily recognized that the state has become a short-time gaming state and a probability fluctuation state, and as a result, the feeling of expectation for the lottery is greatly increased and the player's mood is enhanced. It becomes possible to make it. In other words, the opening / closing operation of the attacker device 335, which is a predetermined profit, is attracting more attention, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. If a high-probability short-time game does not appear, it becomes clear that it is not the “fifth advantageous game state”, but even in such a case, there is a possibility that it is a “third advantageous game state”. Since it is left behind, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation. Further, when the “third advantageous gaming state” is generated, if the probability variation state has already been established, the short-time gaming state is generated while the probability variation state is maintained. In other words, after the probability-changing state by the “third advantageous gaming state”, the “first advantageous gaming state” or the “second advantageous gaming state” is followed by the “third advantageous game” again before the specific profit is given. When “state” is entered, a short-time gaming state is given and a high-probability short-time state effect (Tokoro's mega heaven mode effect) appears. As a result, it becomes possible to give a profit more than a predetermined profit (same profit as the fourth advantageous gaming state) as a profit by the “third advantageous gaming state” again, and further increase the expectation for the big hit. Can do. In this case, it is possible to distinguish from the “fourth advantageous game state” because the ease of winning a prize at the second start opening 332 increases and a specific effect appears. Since the control is limited to the case where the “third advantageous game state” is continuously generated, even if the high-probability time-short state effect does not appear, the player's motivation is not reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the game area 37 is provided with a first start opening 330 that can always win a prize and a second start opening 332 that allows a game ball to win when opened. When a game ball wins one of the first start port 330 and the second start port 332, the first special symbol display 390a and the second special symbol display 390a corresponding to the start ports 64 and 65 are provided. When a predetermined effect is derived in the special symbol display 390b and further in the effect display device 217, and a game ball wins both the start openings 64 and 65, two types of effects are derived in a predetermined order. . Also, if it is determined that a specific gaming state has been reached, such as a gaming state after the end of the “probability variation jackpot”, the opening / closing state of the second start port 332 is controlled, and the winning of the game ball is extremely difficult It changes to a very easy state. For this reason, when it becomes a specific gaming state, it becomes easy to win a game ball with respect to the second starting port 332, and the opportunity for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery to be performed in parallel increases. As a result, the advantage in a specific gaming state can be greatly improved.

  A gaming machine is also known that increases the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls when a specific gaming state is entered in order to frequently perform lottery in a specific gaming state. However, even if the upper limit value of the number of held balls is increased in this way, in a gaming machine in which it is difficult to win a game ball at the starting port, the frequency of the lottery cannot be increased, and the player is satisfied. I can't. On the other hand, in this example, when a specific gaming state is reached, the number of lottery means is substantially increased, and the effect display is performed in a predetermined order in parallel. In addition, it is possible to greatly increase the feeling of expectation for the lottery.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the maximum number of rounds is set to “15” in the big hit that is given a specific profit, whereas in the big hit or small hit that is given a predetermined profit, Since the number of rounds is set to “2” and the opening time is extremely short, the advantage between a specific profit and a predetermined profit can be clearly differentiated.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the second start port 332 is changed from a state of hardly opening to a state of opening frequently by changing the winning probability of the normal winning lottery. The ease of winning a game ball at the mouth 332 can be easily changed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the first decorative symbol 991 and the second decorative symbol 992, the common decorative symbol row 993 is also displayed, so that the first decorative symbol 991 or the second decorative symbol 992 It is possible to easily grasp which lottery is being performed, and it is possible to recognize the production contents and the lottery result by the change and stop of the common decorative symbol sequence 993. In other words, even if the size of the first decorative design 991 and the second decorative design 992 is relatively small, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of fluctuation, and accordingly, the display area of the common decorative design sequence 993 is increased, A powerful effect in which the shared decorative design row 993 is displayed on the entire screen is possible.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the decorative movable bodies 430 and 432 appear in front of the effect display device 217 and move based on the display mode. Can be visually recognized in combination, and it is possible to greatly enhance visual interest. In other words, the collaboration between the image and the decoration can enhance the production and further increase the player's expectation. Further, the decorative movable bodies 430 and 432 can appear and appear suddenly when a predetermined production state is reached, so that the player can be surprised and excited, and can increase the game motivation. . In particular, since the decorative movable bodies 430 and 432 appear in a high-probability expectation production with a high expectation value and a high-probability state production that can be developed thereafter, it is possible to drastically increase the expectation for high probability in the high-probability expectation production. it can. In other words, since a combination effect that could not be visually recognized in a normal state effect or a high-probability expected small effect becomes suddenly visible when the high-probability expected large effect is made, it is possible to make the player excited. .

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the character's mouth opens and closes, so an effect related to the mouth, for example, an effect of crawling or crushing an object can be effectively performed. In addition, the effect mode displayed on the effect display device 217 can be visually recognized through the mouth (opening portion), and the design of the effect screen can be enhanced. In particular, the decorative movable bodies 430 and 432 that appear in front of the effect display device 217 move in accordance with the “words” displayed on the effect display device 217, so that the character is recognized as if the character is speaking. Can do. For this reason, a sense of reality can be enhanced, and the fun of the production can be greatly enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are provided on the front side of the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432, so that, for example, it can be moved up and down. The first decoration movable body 430, the second decoration movable body 432, and the right decoration movable body 432 can be made to attract attention by moving differently from the first decoration movable body 430 and the second decoration movable body 432. It is possible to entertain the stage operation by the body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are disposed in the substantially horizontal first arrangement state, the first decorative movable body 430 is disposed on the rear side. The player is shielded from being difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to switch the effect of exposing the first decorative movable body 430 so as to be visible or shielding the first decorative movable body 430 so as to be difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to produce an effect that attracts attention and attracts the player.

  Further, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 can shield between the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 and the first decorative movable body 430 in the second arrangement state in which the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are disposed substantially vertically. . Thereby, since a connection part between a movable body and a drive unit, ie, a connection part, can be shielded, the support shaft 530 grade | etc., Can be concealed and an appearance can be improved. Further, since the connecting portion can be shielded by the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 that move differently from the first decorative movable body 430, the relationship between each drive unit and the first decorative movable body 430 can be determined. Because it is difficult to understand how the first decorative movable body 430 is moved, it is possible to produce an unexpected performance as if it is floating in the air, attracting the attention of the player , Can enhance the interest.

  Further, the right decoration movable body 234 and the left decoration movable body 235 can be moved using a separate movement (rotation) different from the vertical movement of the first decoration movable body 430 and the second decoration movable body 432. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of movement in the game area, enhance the production effect, and enhance the interest of the player.

  Of the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 having a substantially long main body 292, the same end as the side where the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 are cantilevered. By rotating about the part side, the main body part 292 extending toward the other end side is unavoidably moved to the first decoration movable body 430 and the first decoration movable in the substantially vertical second arrangement state. The space between the body drive unit 450 is shielded. As a result, the first decorative movable body 430 or the second decorative movable body 432 can be shielded from the connecting portion (the support shaft 530, etc.) between the respective drive units, so that the appearance can be improved more smoothly and skillfully. be able to.

  Further, since the end portions of the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are rotatably supported, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body are compared with the case where the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are supported near the center. The rotating means (the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 and the second decorative movable body solenoid 711) that rotates the body 235 can be easily arranged on the end side of the game area 37. Thereby, since the first decoration movable body 430, the second decoration movable body 432, or the effect display means 217 or the like is difficult to be shielded by the rotation means, it is easy to see the effect mode expressed by these, and the deterioration of the interest is prevented. be able to.

  In addition, since the left and right decorative movable bodies 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are arranged in pairs at the same height on the left and right, in other words, one decorative movable body is divided into two. The length in the left-right direction can be shortened to about half. As a result, the size of each of the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 can be reduced, so that the driving load borne by each drive unit is reduced, and the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 234 are moved at a higher speed. The decorative movable body 235 can be driven. Therefore, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 can perform a speedy and dynamic effect, and the entertainment operations of the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, two right decorative movable bodies 234 and left decorative movable bodies 235 arranged at substantially the same height on the left and right are formed as a set, that is, in a shape and pattern reminiscent of unity, so that they are substantially vertical. When transitioning from the second arrangement state to the substantially horizontal state, it is possible to produce an effect that merges into an integrated shape that causes one unified concept. For example, a decorative member that is shaped like a character is attached to each of the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 arranged on the right side and the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 arranged on the left side. When the two right decorative movable bodies 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are arranged at the same height by shifting to the arrangement state, it is possible to produce an effect that the two are combined into one continuous meaningful word. . Thus, by being able to perform an unexpected performance, it is possible to provide an interesting pachinko machine 1 that attracts the attention of the player and other spectators and has a strong ability to attract customers.

  In addition, when the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are provided inside the frame shape of the main character 213, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are rotated inside the main decorative object 213. Since the constituent members of the main character, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 do not interfere with each other, they can be rotated smoothly, which is more preferable.

  Furthermore, the main body 292 of the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 is formed in a size that does not contact the game ball supplied on the stage 256. That is, since it is arranged as a decorative movable body, there is no possibility that the rolling effect of the game ball unrolled on the stage 256 will be hindered. Thereby, in addition to the effect of the movement by the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235, the rolling effect of the game ball rolling on the stage 256 can be sufficiently provided, and the player's eyes can be enjoyed. be able to. In addition, since the movement of the game ball is not hindered, the concern of reducing the interest of the player by flowing the game ball down to a place other than the predetermined opening 254 or opening 304 by contact is also eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide an attractive pachinko machine 1 that is more interesting and lasts.

  Moreover, since the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are made decorative movable bodies capable of emitting light, the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 are between the first arrangement state and the second arrangement state. In addition to being able to move, it is also possible to emit light, so that the player can notice the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body 235 by the light emission and attract attention, and the right decorative movable body 234 and the left decorative movable body are movable. The movement of the body 235 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the first decorative movable body 430 is provided with a light emitting decoration display means having a relatively simple configuration mainly composed of the LED 456, the lens portion 452, and the light emitting substrate 457 made of a highly light-shielding member. It is possible to display various display modes (“crescent-like pattern”, “predetermined kanji”, etc.) simply by changing the color of the projected light. Further, the red portion 460 and the blue portion 461 constituting the lens portion 452 are configured such that an overlapping portion arranged on the same plane as a white portion 459 can transmit red and blue, respectively. Accordingly, it is possible to clearly display the respective display modes (“crescent-shaped pattern” and “predetermined Chinese characters”) corresponding to red and blue using a relatively simple structure.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the light-emitting decoration display means of the first decorative movable body 430 is provided with a light-shielding member made of a highly light-shielding black paint or black film on the back side of the light-emitting substrate 457. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the effect display device 217 from being projected onto the lens unit 452, and it is possible to clearly display a desired display mode at a desired display timing. In addition, since the light emitting means for emitting the three primary colors is composed of the LED 456, it is easy to reduce the wavelength components of other colors relatively easily, and the first decoration movable that makes it easy to intuitively transmit the display contents It can be a body 430. Thereby, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the player is less likely to feel stress, and can be further improved as well as not reducing the interest and attention level regarding the game content.

  On the other hand, since the post-decorating body 216 is composed of a character body, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to associate the game contents with the character body, and that is comical and friendly. In addition, since the red portion 460 and the blue portion 461 are formed on the same surface with the black portion 462 as a background, it is difficult to see the members (for example, the LED 456 and the light emitting substrate 457) on the back surface of the lens portion 452. Can do.

  Furthermore, compared with the case where a white member is used as a background, the display mode displayed by transmitting light, that is, the display mode displayed by light emission can be effectively raised, and the impact is gorgeous. A first decorative movable body 430 can be provided. In particular, the first decorative movable body 430 is provided in a part of the character body and applied to the sunglasses 453, thereby realizing an interesting and comical effect utilizing the black portion 462.

  In addition, since the first decorative movable body 430 that is a movable member is configured, it is possible to perform an effect with a high degree of freedom without being constrained by the display area in the sunglasses 453. In particular, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative movable body 430 has a relatively simple configuration mainly composed of the LED 456, the lens portion 452, and the light emitting substrate 457 made of a highly light-shielding member. In addition, a red portion 460 and a blue portion 461 are formed compactly on the same surface. Therefore, since it can be suitably arranged on the movable body, a variety of effects can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can be easily accepted by a wide age group can be provided.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the protrusions (projections) 274 are provided, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the ball guide path 270 can be changed, or a part of the kinetic energy can be absorbed. Or it is consumed and flows down to the out port 220 while being moderately decelerated. Accordingly, it is difficult to cause troubles such as jumping to a place other than the out-port 220 due to excessive momentum in the middle of the flow, or colliding with other arrangements and damaging them. Is done. Furthermore, since it is preferably guided to the out port 220, it is possible to give the player a moderate feeling of tension (such as concentrating the game ball so as not to be driven into the ball guide path 270). It is possible to make the game more thrilling.

  In addition, since it is moderately decelerated by the protrusions (projections) 274 and can be smoothly guided to the out port 220, it is concentrated on the stage 256 and other game areas so that the game balls are not received by the ball guide path 270. Thus, it is possible to drive a game ball, and to change or devise the method of driving the game ball. Therefore, using the game balls that have not been supplied to the stage 256, it is possible to produce an effect that makes it difficult to get tired of the game, attracting the player's concentration and interest, and effectively enhancing the interest.

  In addition, the game ball can roll along the outer peripheral surface 271 of the main character, and can flow down from the upper side of the game area 37 to be guided to the out port 220. Therefore, since the ball guide path 270 can be arranged without crossing the front of the main character 213 and on the front side of the game board 5 (a position visible to the player), whether or not the game ball is discharged? In addition to being thrilled, it is possible to make the player's eyes hard to be exhausted by making it easy to see, and to enhance the interest.

  Thereby, when the game ball guided by the guide rail 78 is vigorously released to the game area 37, the ball guide path 270 is arranged at a place where the game ball is more likely to flow down. It becomes easy to be guided to. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to carefully adjust the force to drive the game ball, and to concentrate and drive the game ball so that the game ball is not guided to the out port 220. Therefore, the thrilling pachinko machine 1 that does not get bored can be provided.

  Further, since the ball guide path 270 has a substantially U-shaped horizontal section, that is, a part of the ball guide path 270 is open, game balls are clogged in the ball guide path 270 or dust is attached and the flow is poor. Even in such a case, maintenance can be performed relatively easily from the front surface of the game board 5. Thereby, since the possibility of interrupting the game is low, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can continue the game comfortably without further reducing the concentration of the player.

  Further, since the outer peripheral surface 271 and the inner peripheral surface of the through hole 211 of the game board base 212 are arranged substantially in parallel, the outer peripheral surface 271 and the inner peripheral surface of the through hole 211 are sandwiched in cooperation. It is possible to guide the game ball. In other words, since the game ball can be smoothly guided from the upper side to the lower side of the game area 37, it is possible to effectively enhance the sense of tension by arranging the ball guide path 270, and to attract more interest of the player. Things will be possible.

  In addition, since the plurality of protrusions 274 are alternately formed at positions facing each other, for example, the protrusions 274 formed on the flange portion 272 can be used even when the game ball flows down along the decorative flange portion 273. It can be made to collide with the protrusion 274 on the inner wall of the decorative flange portion 273, and the game ball can be pushed to the flange portion 272. In this manner, the game balls are moderately decelerated and guided to the out-port 220 by being successively collided with the plurality of protrusions 274 arranged facing each other. In addition, the arrangement method of the ball guide path 270 is not limited to a curved shape, and even if the ball guide path 270 can be decelerated, the arrangement method of the ball guide path 270 has a degree of freedom. This is more preferable because the method of arranging 270 is not limited.

  In addition, a ball guiding path 257 is provided behind the stage 256 for flowing the game ball down to the front of the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention more than when the game ball flows down only from the front of the stage 256. Further, the ball guide path 257 includes a partition plate 233 and a protruding strip member 302 that prevent the game ball from dropping from a place other than the ball receiving portion 259, and a ball that prevents the game ball from dropping from the ball receiving portion 259. Since the guide recess 262 is further provided, the game ball can be surely returned to the game area 37, so that the eyes of the player can be enjoyed and effective. Further, since the ball guiding recess 262 is provided in the transparent partition plate 233, the position where the game ball flows down is provided at a position facing the player's line of sight. Therefore, it is preferable because the player can easily recognize the downstream position and easily attract attention.

  In addition, since the partition plate 233 and the ridge member 302 are provided, it is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping from a place other than the opening 254 and the opening 304. Further, since the ball guiding recess 262 is provided, the game ball can be reliably guided to the desired position, that is, the ball receiving portion 259 on the rear side and the lower side of the stage 256 and returned to the game area 37. . As a result, the player's eyes can be fully enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being reduced due to the drop of the game ball.

  Further, since the ball guide path 257 is provided on the transparent partition plate 233, the position where the game ball flows down is provided at a position facing the player's line of sight. Therefore, it is more preferable because the player can easily recognize the flow-down position and can focus attention on the movement of the game ball.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the edge portion 303 of the ridge member 302, that is, the boundary portion with the opening 304, jumping to the front side of the stage 256 and falling off, and in the horizontal direction of the stage 256. A good rolling effect can be promoted by guiding. Furthermore, when the edge portion 303 is formed to be inclined obliquely in the left-right direction, or when the corner portion of the edge portion 303 is rounded (so-called chamfering), stress concentration due to collision of game balls is prevented. The structure can withstand impacts. That is, the protruding member 302 can be made difficult to break, and the player's concentration can be prevented from being reduced by interrupting the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can continue the game without stress for a longer time can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the kinetic energy is imparted to the game ball supplied to the stage 256 by the inclination 284, it becomes difficult to cause clogging or stagnation of the ball, and it is possible to perform a rolling effect full of dynamism on the stage 256. In addition, the excessive rolling energy of the game ball rolling on the stage 256 is moderately attenuated by the energy damping means such as the extended rolling surface 263, so that the rolling speed becomes higher than necessary. Even in this case, the possibility that the game ball jumps off and falls off or falls at a place other than the opening 304 or the opening 254 is reduced. Accordingly, the game ball can be rolled on the stage 256 satisfactorily, which is preferable because it can entertain the eyes of the player.

  In addition, since the groove 305 is provided as a trajectory correcting means, the trajectory on which the game ball rolls is not easily deviated to the front side or the rear side of the stage 256, and the roll can be favorably rolled in the vicinity of the center of the stage 256. Can do.

  Further, since the extended rolling surface 263 is provided, the rolling distance of the game ball is extended, so that the rolling energy is effectively consumed as a frictional force, and the rolling speed is reduced. Further, since the extended rolling surface 263 is inclined toward the stage 256, the rolling speed of the game ball entering the extended rolling surface 263 away from the stage 256 can be efficiently reduced. . On the other hand, the game ball heading from the extended rolling surface 263 onto the stage 256 is accelerated by descending the inclination and pushed back onto the stage 256 with good energy. This makes it possible to make the game ball have a good rolling effect with a sense of dynamism, which is more suitable for the eyes of the player.

  Furthermore, a decorative member 301 that forms a groove in cooperation with the partition plate 233 is provided on the front surface of the extended rolling surface 263. Thereby, in addition to being able to decelerate more when the game ball collides with the groove, it is possible to push back the game ball that is likely to fall off the extended rolling surface 263 onto the extended rolling surface 263. Therefore, since the game ball can be rolled on the stage 256 more stably, the player's interest can be attracted and the attractive pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, it is preferable that the effect display means 217 is arranged behind the game board 5 so that the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 256 is not blocked and the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed more easily. . In addition, since a part of the character body 231 located in front of the extended rolling surface 263 is transparent, various effects can be achieved without blocking the rolling effect of the game ball located behind it and the effect image located further behind. Easy to enjoy and suitable. Furthermore, since the stage 256 is provided below the effect display means 217, there is little possibility of being blocked by the stage 256, and both effects can be enjoyed more easily. Therefore, since the player can easily enjoy more various effects, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that does not get bored.

  Further, a transparent plate-like partition plate 233 is provided behind the stage 256 and in front of the effect display means 217. As a result, the game ball is not dropped from the back of the stage 256, and the rolling effect can be performed better. Furthermore, since the partition plate 233 is transparent, the effect image displayed by the effect display means 217 located behind is not blocked. Therefore, it is possible to more entertain the eyes of the player, which is preferable.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the extended rolling surface 263 is provided at any place on the stage 256 or at a place other than on the stage (that is, rolls at a speed equal to or higher than a predetermined value). This is a configuration in which the game ball is formed on one end side of the stage 256, rather than being guided and decelerated). Thereby, a rolling effect can be performed without leaving the game ball that has entered the main character 213, and the player's eyes can be enjoyed. Further, since the speed at which the game ball is supplied onto the stage 256 is not limited, it is possible to roll on the stage 256 with good energy, and it is possible to enjoy the rolling state dynamically. Thereby, reduction of a player's interest can be prevented effectively.

  Further, only the mounting contact surfaces 474 and 634, which are part of the first base 475 and the second base 635, are in contact with and fixed to the game board base 212, so that the game board Even if there is a dimensional error of the base 212, the first base 475, the second base 635, etc., it is possible to reduce the influence of the error as much as possible. Even if the base 635 is attached and fixed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects such as distortion in the base 635, and the first base 475 and the second base 635 can be satisfactorily attached to the game board base 212 (game board 5). it can. Therefore, the first base 475 and the second base 635 for supporting the guide rails 471 and 631 by increasing the lengths of the guide rails 471 and 631 for guiding and guiding the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 are provided. Even if it becomes longer, the first base 475 and the second base 635 can be satisfactorily attached and fixed to the game board 5, so that the length of the guide rails 471 and 631 is increased and the first decorative movable body 430 and second The decoration movable body 432 can be moved greatly, making it easy to recognize the performance operations of the first decoration movable body 430 and the second decoration movable body 432, and the player's interest is reduced by the performance operation. Can be prevented.

  Further, the first base 475 and the second base 635 are mounted and fixed to the game board base 212 by mounting contact surfaces 474 and 634 arranged on the upper side. In other words, since the first base 475 and the second base 635 are mounted and fixed only on one side, the mounting to the game board base 212 is only required on the upper side of the first base 475 and the second base 635. For example, the first base 475 and the second base 635 are arranged from the vertical line of the mounting contact surfaces 474 and 634 by the force in the left-right direction acting on the surface of the game board 5. Even if the center of gravity of the first and second bases shifts to the left or right, the rotational moment applied to the center of gravity acts to return the center of gravity of the first base 475 and the second base 635 to the vertical line of the mounting contact surface 474,634, Since the first base 475 and the second base 635 return to their original positions, a force other than the weight applied to the first base 475 and the second base 635 acts on the mounting contact surfaces 474 and 634 and screws. The first base 475 and the second base 635 can be mounted and fixed satisfactorily, and the first base 475, the second base 635 and the like can be prevented from being deformed and causing problems. it can.

  Further, mounting holes 512 and 672 for inserting screws are formed in upper portions of the mounting contact surfaces 474 and 634 of the first base 475 and the second base 635, whereby the first base 475 and the second base 635 are formed. Therefore, the number of screws can be reduced as much as possible, the labor required for mounting can be simplified, and for the same reason as described above, the screws and the mounting contact surface 474 can be reduced. , 634 can be made as difficult as possible, and the first base 475 and the second base 635 can be satisfactorily attached and fixed to the game board base 212.

  Further, driving pulleys 478 and 638 of moving means are arranged on the same upper side as the side on which the mounting contact surfaces 474 and 634 of the first base 475 and the second base 635 are fixed to the game board base 212. ing. That is, since the first drive motor 477 and the second drive motor 637 that rotationally drive the drive pulleys 478 and 638 are supported on the upper side of the first base 475 and the second base 635 close to the mounting contact surfaces 474 and 634, the vibrations The first drive motor 477 and the second drive motor 637, which are the sources of the drive reaction force, are attached and fixed to the game board base 212 via the attachment contact surfaces 474 and 634 at positions as close as possible. Vibrations from the first drive motor 477 and the second drive motor 637 can be prevented from being transmitted to the entire first base 475 and the second base 635, and the first base 475 and the second base 635 can vibrate the first base 475 and the second base 635. Each member such as the guide rails 471 and 631 supported by the base 475 and the second base 635 vibrates and breaks due to contact with other members, or the members are loosely assembled. It is possible to prevent Dari and first elevating member 470, from becoming impossible to satisfactorily guiding the second lift member 630.

  Further, the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 holding the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 are slidably guided to the guide rails 471 and 631 via the two support bushes 532 and 692. Therefore, the contact area of the sliding portion can be reduced as much as possible, the sliding resistance can be reduced, and the first elevating member together with the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be reduced. 470, the second elevating member 630 can be guided and guided well in the vertical direction, and the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be enlarged, and the first decorative movable body 430, It is possible to make the second decorative movable body 432 more conspicuous and to have a higher production effect, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, even if the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 are increased in size, it is possible to suppress an increase in sliding resistance, so that the large first drive motor 477 having a large driving force, the second drive. The first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 holding the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be satisfactorily guided and guided without using the moving means including the motor 637 and the like. The first decoration movable body 430 and the second decoration movable body 432 having a desired size can be provided in the gaming machine, and can be more interesting.

  Further, since the sliding resistance can be reduced, less driving force is required to move the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 in a stationary state, and the first elevating member 470, The two lifting members 630 can start moving. That is, since the movement response of the 1st raising / lowering member 470 and the 2nd raising / lowering member 630 can be made high, the 1st raising / lowering member 470, the 2nd raising / lowering member 630, ie, the 1st decoration movable body 430, the 2nd decoration movable body 432 is made. It becomes possible to move quickly, the impact by the movement of the 1st decoration movable body 430 and the 2nd decoration movable body 432 can be raised more, and it can suppress that an interest falls.

  In addition, a friction reducing layer is formed on the surfaces of the guide rails 471 and 631, and the sliding resistance between the guide rails 471 and 631 and the support bushes 532 and 692 can be reduced. Thus, the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 can be guided and guided satisfactorily, and the friction at the sliding portion is reduced so that the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 are not easily worn. 692 are worn out at an early stage, and the first elevating member 470, the second elevating member 630, that is, the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

  Further, the support shafts 530 and 690 are rotatably held by the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 via the two support bushes 531 and 691, thereby the support shafts 530 and 690 are held. Compared with the case where the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 are pivotably held over the entire portion, the contact portions with the support shafts 530 and 690 are reduced as much as possible, and the support shafts 530 and 690 are reduced. It is possible to reduce the frictional resistance of the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 supported by the support shafts 530 and 690. It is possible to enhance the interest by smoothly performing the production operation.

  Further, the support bushes 532, 692, and 531, 691 are held at predetermined positions by the main body portions 534, 694 of the first lifting member 470 and the second lifting member 630 and the bush fixing members 535, 695. Thus, the support bushes 532, 692, and 531 and 691 can be easily held by the main body portions 534 and 694 and the bush fixing members 535 and 695, and can be easily assembled.

  Furthermore, the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 are moved by the rotational drive of the drive belts 480 and 640, and the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 are compared with the case where a moving means such as a screw member is used. The moving speed of the movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be moved faster, and the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 that move faster can impress the player strongly. The first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be watched and enjoyed, and the entertainment for the game can be prevented from deteriorating. In addition, it is possible to further reduce the size compared to the case where the same movement amount is moved using a solenoid or a cylinder. Even if the movement amount of the second decorative movable body 432 is increased, it can be installed in the gaming machine. Therefore, the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be moved more greatly, and the first decorative movable body can be moved. It is possible to easily recognize the production operation of the body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 and to prevent the entertainment from being lowered by the production operation.

  Further, since the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 are guided and guided by the guide rails 471 and 631, the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 are used by using the drive belts 480 and 640 which are easily bent. The first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 can be guided and guided straight by the guide rails 471 and 631, and the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630, that is, The first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be favorably moved in a desired posture.

  Furthermore, the driving belts 480 and 640 and the engaging teeth 484 and 644 of the driving pulleys 478 and 638 and the engaged teeth 485 and 645 are engaged with each other, so that the driving belts 480 and 640 are connected to the outer periphery of the driving pulleys 478 and 638. It is possible to make it difficult to slip on the surface, and it is possible to reliably transmit the rotational drive from the drive pulleys 478 and 638 to the drive belts 480 and 640 and to increase the rotational speed of the drive pulleys 478 and 638. Since no slip occurs between 478 and 638 and the drive belts 480 and 640, the drive belts 480 and 640 can be driven at a higher speed, and the first lift member 470 and the second lift member 630 can be driven. The first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be moved at a higher speed, and a more impactful movement can be achieved. Ornamental movable member 430, by the second decoration movable member 432 can be assumed to be enhanced entertaining.

  Further, since the driving pulleys 478 and 638 are disposed on the upper side and the driven pulleys 479 and 639 are disposed on the lower side, the driving belts 480 and 640 are provided with the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 fixed thereto. The force of pulling downward, that is, the direction pulling away from the drive pulleys 478 and 638, acts on the drive belts 480 and 640, and the force of winding the drive belts 480 and 640 around the drive pulleys increases. Frictional force increases between the two belts so that they can hardly slide with each other, and the drive belts 480 and 640 can be reliably driven by the drive pulleys 478 and 638, and the drive pulleys 478 and 638 and the drive belts 480 and 640 Can prevent the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 from descending, and the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member can be prevented. It is possible to cause the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 to perform desired movements via the material 630, and to cause the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 to perform a predetermined effect operation. , Can be of interest.

  In addition, since the tension springs 495 and 655 that urge the driven pulleys 479 and 639 in a direction away from the drive pulleys 478 and 638 are provided, a predetermined tension can be applied to the drive belts 480 and 640. The drive belts 480 and 640 can be driven to rotate favorably by appropriately adjusting the tension of the drive belts 480 and 640 wound around the belts 478 and 638 and the driven pulleys 479 and 639.

  Further, the driving pulleys 478 and 638 and the driven pulleys 479 and 639 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the guide rails 471 and 631 are arranged in the vertical direction so as to substantially follow the surface of the game board 5 (game board base 212). . In other words, the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 are arranged in a vertical direction that is relatively large with respect to a dimension perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 (front-rear direction). Since the movement is made in the direction along the surface of the game board, the amount of movement of the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be increased as much as possible. It is possible to make the movement of the movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 easier to recognize, to entertain the production operation, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be moved in the vertical direction, the first decorative movable body 430 and the first decorative movable body 430 and the vertical movement direction are substantially the same as the flow direction of the game balls flowing down the game area 37. The second decorative movable body 432 moves, and it is easy for the player to move the line of sight between the game ball and the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432, thereby preventing the player from getting tired early. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the first upper support member 472, the second upper support member 632, the first lower support member 473, and the second lower support member 633 made of resin are supported by the first base 475 and the second base 635 made of sheet metal. In addition, since the guide rails 471 and 631 are supported by the first upper support member 472, the second upper support member 632, the first lower support member 473, and the second lower support member 633, the size is increased. Then, it becomes possible to make the resin member that increases the distortion as small as possible. Even if the guide rails 471 and 631 are lengthened, the guide rails 471 and 631 can be accurately supported at a desired position. , 631 through the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 to guide the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 well. Therefore, the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be moved more greatly, and the rendering operation of the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be recognized. It is easy to do, and it can prevent that interest falls by the production operation.

  In addition, the first upper support member 472, the second upper support member 632, the first lower support member 473, and the second lower support member 633, the first base 475, the second base 635, the guide rails 471, 631, and Since the guide rods 491 and 651 are integrally assembled and the overall strength and rigidity are enhanced by the synergistic effect of the respective rigidity, the first base 475, the second base 635 and the guide rails 471 and 631 are lengthened. Even if the movement amounts of the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 are increased, the first base 475 and the second base are caused by reaction force and vibration generated by the movement of the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630. 635 and the guide rails 471 and 631 are prevented from being deformed, and the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable member are moved via the first lift member 470 and the second lift member 630. 432 can be moved well, and the first decoration movable body 430 and the second decoration movable body 432 are moved more greatly to recognize the rendering operation of the first decoration movable body 430 and the second decoration movable body 432. It is easy to prevent the interest from being lowered by the production operation.

  Further, when the first upper support member 472, the second upper support member 632, the first lower support member 473, the second lower support member 633, the first base 475, and the second base 635 are assembled, positioning is performed. By simply fitting the protrusions 511 and 671 into the positioning holes 510 and 670, the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473 or the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 are separated by a predetermined distance. It can be easily positioned and supported at a predetermined position, and the guide rails 471 and 631 can be easily arranged and supported at a desired position.

  Further, a rotating means such as a first decorative movable body solenoid 551 and a second decorative movable body solenoid 711 for rotating the support shafts 530 and 690 for supporting the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 is provided. Therefore, the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be rotated around the axis of the support shafts 530 and 690, and the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 are guided by the guide rail. It is possible to move not only in the vertical direction in which 471 and 631 extend, but also in the direction around the axis of the support shafts 530 and 690, and the movement of the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 is more complicated. It is possible to increase the interest by making a movement with a higher production effect.

  Further, the first decorative movable body of the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 is used as a rotating means such as the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 and the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 for rotating the support shafts 530 and 690. 430 and the side on which the second decorative movable body 432 is held are arranged on the opposite side across the guide rails 471 and 631. Thus, the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 have the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 on one side with the guide rails 471 and 631 sandwiched therebetween, and the first decorative on the other side. The rotating means such as the movable body solenoid 551 and the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 are respectively held, and a predetermined load is applied to both sides of the guide rails 471 and 631. , The uneven load applied to the second elevating member 630 is alleviated, and the occurrence of uneven friction and uneven wear between the first elevating member 470, the second elevating member 630 and the guide rails 471, 631 is suppressed. The first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 that are guided and guided to the guide rails 471 and 631 by the load are not guided smoothly and cannot be awkwardly moved or cannot be guided. It is possible to prevent the or.

  In addition, since the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 and the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 are used as the driving source of the rotating means, it is possible to make the movement faster and more responsive than when using a motor. Thus, the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can perform an effect operation with a strong impact, and can be more interesting.

  In addition, the first anti-rotation means 490 and the second anti-rotation means 650 can prevent the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 from rotating around the axis of the guide rails 471 and 631. Even if the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 are moved by the drive belts 480 and 640 having a lot of vibration, the first decorative movable body 430 and the second movable movable body 430 held by the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 are used. It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the two decorative movable bodies 432 from rotating around the axis of the guide rails 471 and 631, that is, swinging around the axis, and to suppress the unintentional shake and to surely perform a desired performance operation. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating, and it is possible to make the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 larger. Decorative movable member 430, and the second decorative movable member 432 was less pronounced, the first decorative movable body 430, it is possible to increase the performance effect according to the second decoration movable body 432.

  Furthermore, both ends of the guide rods 491 and 651 in the first rotation prevention means 490 and the second rotation prevention means 650 are connected to the first upper support member 472, the second upper support member 632, the first lower support member 473, and the second lower part. Since the support member 633 supports the guide rods 491 and 651, it is not necessary to provide a separate support member, and the structure for supporting the guide rods 491 and 651 can be simplified. , The increase in cost can be suppressed. Further, since the support accuracy of the guide rods 491 and 651 can be improved in the same manner as the guide rails 471 and 631, even if the guide rods 491 and 651 are made longer as the guide rails 471 and 631 become longer, the guide rails It becomes possible to maintain the relationship between 471, 631 and the guide rods 491, 651 in a good state, and it is possible to prevent the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 from swinging well and to move the first decoration. The body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be increased in size so that the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be enhanced.

  Further, the first base 475 and the second base 635 are attached and fixed to the rear surface side with respect to the game board base 212, and a through-hole 211 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is provided in the game board base 212. The first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 supported by the first base 475 and the second base 635 are visible from the player side. Even if the base 475 and the second base 635 are attached, the first decorative movable body 430 guided by the guide rails 471 and 631 supported by the first base 475 and the second base 635 through the through-hole 211, and the second decorative movable. The body 432 can be visually recognized by the player, and the movement of the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. It can be.

  In addition, a frame-like main character 213 having a stage 256 is disposed so as to cover the through hole 211 of the game board base 212 from the front, and the first base 475 and the second base 635 are disposed behind the game board base 212. Since the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 provided through the frame-shaped inner side of the main character 213 are visible, the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 Not only the production operation but also the movement of the game ball that rolls on the stage 256 of the main character 213 can enhance the interest of the player, and the main character 213 on the front side and the first decorative movable body 430 on the rear side. , The second decorative movable body 432 is arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 having a depth can be obtained, so that it can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and attention is paid to the player. So it can be made to be elevated more interest.

  Furthermore, since the first decoration movable body 430 and the second decoration movable body 432 are moved on the front side of the effect display device 217, the effect mode displayed on the effect display device 217 and the first decoration movable body are thereby obtained. 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 can be brought as close as possible, and the rendering mode can be easily associated with the rendering operations of the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432. It is possible to enhance the player's interest by providing an unprecedented high-impact production through collaboration between the production mode and the production operation of the first decoration movable body 430 and the second decoration movable body 432. it can.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the various tables in the first big hit lottery and the various tables in the second big hit lottery are shown as separate tables. However, the same table may be shared. However, by constructing a separate table for each lottery as in the above embodiment, not only the lottery frequency is increased, but also lotteries with different contents are added. Can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first start port 330 is constituted by a pocket-type winning port having a fixed opening degree. However, as with the second start port 332, a pair of left and right movable pieces are provided. The electric opening and closing winning device may be configured to change the ease of winning a prize to the first start port 330 based on the gaming state. However, if the opening degree of the first start port 330 is always kept constant as in the present example, it is possible to enhance the gameability by combining different types of start ports.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when a specific gaming state is reached, the winning probability in the normal lottery, that is, the rate at which the movable piece 331 is released is increased, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display 928 is shortened, whereby the second start opening Although an example of increasing the ease of winning a prize at 332 has been shown, only the winning probability in the normal lottery may be increased without changing the variation time.

  In the above embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed according to the winning order of the game balls with respect to the first starting port 330 or the second starting port 332. The special symbol may be changed before the second special symbol is changed. However, if it is made to change in order of winning as in this example, even if there is a difference in the ease of winning with respect to the two start ports 330 and 332, it will be digested in order in proportion to the ease of winning. For example, it is possible to suppress the monotonous effect due to the fact that only one of the processes is left and a display mode corresponding to the process is continuously derived.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the one that causes the peripheral board 811 to execute the decoration symbol sequence fluctuation and the development effect, that is, the one that controls the effect display based on the command transmitted from the main control board 94 is shown. However, all effect processing may be performed on the main control board 94. However, if the rendering process is shared as in the above embodiment, the processing burden on the main control board 94 can be reduced and these processes can be further diversified.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. The invention can be applied.

1 Pachinko Machine 5 Game Board 37 Game Area 92 Sub Control Board 94 Main Control Board 130 Launcher Unit (Launcher)
210 opening 211 through-hole 212 game board base 213 leading role 217 effect display device (effect display means)
234 Right decoration movable body (front decoration movable body)
235 Left decorative movable body (front decorative movable body)
236 Right decoration movable body drive unit 237 Left decoration movable body drive unit 310 Decoration movable body drive motor 330 First start port (start port)
332 Second start port (start port)
335 Attacker device (opening / closing prize winning device)
358 Second start port sensor (second winning state detection means)
390 Special symbol display 390a First special symbol display 390b Second special symbol display 416 First start port sensor (first winning state detection means)
430 First decoration movable body (decoration movable body)
432 Second decorative movable body (decorative movable body)
450 1st decorative movable body drive unit (1st drive unit)
472 First upper support member 473 First lower support member 474 Mounting contact surface 475 First base 477 First drive motor 478 Drive pulley 479 Driven pulley 480 Drive belt 481 Belt fixing portion 482 Drive gear 483 Transmission gear 484 Engaging teeth 485 Engaged teeth 490 First rotation preventing means 491 Guide rod 492 Guide member 493 Tension mechanism 495 Tension spring 509 Support surface 510 Positioning hole 511 Positioning projection 512 Mounting hole 530 Support shaft 531 Support bush 532 Support bush 533 Insertion hole 534 Main body 535 Bush fixing member 536 Stepped recess 537 Fitting recess 538 Housing portion 539 Retaining piece 540 Fitting recess 541 Housing portion 550 Plunger 551 First decorative movable body solenoid (rotating means)
553 Rotation transmission member 610 Second decorative movable body drive unit (second drive unit)
630 Second elevating member 631 Guide rail 632 Second upper support member 633 Second lower support member 634 Mounting contact surface 635 Second base 637 Second drive motor 638 Drive pulley 639 Driven pulley 640 Drive belt 641 Belt fixing portion 642 Drive gear 643 Transmission gear 644 Engagement tooth 645 Engagement tooth 650 Second rotation prevention means 651 Guide rod 652 Guide member 653 Tension mechanism 655 Tension spring 669 Support surface 670 Positioning hole 671 Positioning protrusion 672 Mounting hole 690 Support shaft 691 Support bush 692 Support Bush 693 Insertion hole 694 Main body 695 Bush fixing member 696 Stepped recess 697 Fitting recess 698 Housing portion 699 Retaining piece 700 Fitting recess 701 Housing portion 710 Plunger 711 Second decorative movable body solenoid (rotating means)
712 Link mechanism 810 Main board (main control means)
811 Peripheral board (sub control means)
831 Electric Control Board (Moving Ornament Control Unit)
911a First hit determination table 911b Second hit determination table 912a First hit symbol table 912b Second hit symbol table 913a First hit time variation time setting table 913b Second hit time variation time setting table 914a First Fluctuation time setting table 914b for one offset Second variable time setting table 916a for one offside detection First random number extracting means for determining hit (lottery means, first lottery means)
916b Second hit determination random number extraction means (lottery means, second lottery means)
917a First random number random number extracting means 917b Second random random number extracting means 918a First variation time random number extracting means (lottery means, first lottery means)
918b Second fluctuation time random number extraction means (lottery means, second lottery means)
923 Game state determination means 925 Normal success / failure determination means 929 Release control means 930a First success / failure determination means (lottery means, first lottery means)
930b Second success / failure determination means (lottery means, second lottery means)
931a First stop symbol determining means (display mode determining means, first display mode determining means)
931b Second stop symbol determining means (display mode determining means, second display mode determining means)
932a First variation time determining means (display mode determining means, first display mode determining means)
932b Second variation time determining means (display mode determining means, second display mode determining means)
933a First advantageous gaming state control means 933b Second advantageous gaming state control means 933c Third advantageous gaming state control means 933d Fourth advantageous gaming state control means 933e Fifth advantageous gaming state control means 934 Special symbol variation control means (first special Symbol variation control means, second special symbol variation control means)
935 Command transmission means 958a First effect mode determination means (display control means)
958b Second effect mode determining means (display control means)
960 decoration symbol sequence variation display means 964 jackpot display means 975a first effect display control means (display control means, common effect execution means, third unique effect execution means)
975b second effect display control means (display control means, common effect execution means, third specific effect execution means)
976a First decorative symbol variation control means 976b Second decorative symbol variation control means 981 Specific profit giving means 982 Predetermined profit giving means 993 Decorative symbol row 995 Winning state implied means 1001 Normal background effect (first normal state effect)
1002 slot effect (second normal condition effect)
1003 Katakata night chance production (high probability expectation small production)
1004 Talking time production (high probability expectation production)
1005 Super chatting time production (high probability state production)
1102 Operation buttons (operation buttons)
1103 Point generation permission means (privilege permission permission means)
1104 Benefits granting control means (point generating means)
1105 Item selection table 1106 Item selection random number extraction means 1107 Item determination means 1120 Item display control means (point display control means)
1121 First point accumulation means (point accumulation means)
1201 Third big hit judging means 1202 Small hit judging means 1204 Slot point generating means (point generating means)
1205 Point distribution table 1206 Point determination random number extraction means 1207 Point determination means 1220 Second point accumulation means (point accumulation means)
1223 Transition destination notice display means 1224 Route determination means (route selection means)
1225 Route distribution table 1227 Katata Kata derivation number setting means (Derivation number setting means)
1228 Derived number distribution table 1229 Number determination random number extracting unit 1240 Number determining unit 1302 Katakata point generating unit (point generating unit)
1303 Point distribution table 1304 Random number extraction means for point determination 1305 Point determination means 1322 Second effect transition control means (effect transition control means)
1323 Point elimination means 1324 Remaining point distribution table 1325 Remaining point determination random number extraction means 1326 Remaining point determination means 1401 Talking effect execution means (effect execution means)
1402 Chatting derivation number setting means (derivation number setting means)
1403 Pattern distribution table 1404 Pattern selection random number extraction means (derivation number random number extraction means)
1405 Pattern determining means 1406 Derivation count recognition means 1407 Talking (1) table (first derivation count table)
1408 Table for Talking (2) (Second Derivation Count Table)
1420 Background effect switching means (number limiting means)
1421 Third effect transition control means (effect transition control means)

Claims (3)

  A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
  A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
  Lottery means for performing lottery based on a specific random number acquired when the game medium is detected by the winning state detection means;
  In a gaming machine capable of giving a profit to a player when a big hit is obtained by lottery by the lottery means,
  When in the low probability state where the probability of obtaining a big hit in the lottery means is set relatively low, control to a high probability state where the probability of obtaining a big hit is set higher than this low probability state can be executed A probability changing means, and
  When the game medium is in a normal state in which it is relatively difficult to accept the game medium at the start port, the control to an advantageous state in which the game medium is relatively easier to receive into the start port than the normal state. An acceptance condition changing means for enabling
  As an operation for giving a profit to the player, a ball winning means that facilitates the reception of the game medium by the operation of a predetermined movable body,
  When the jackpot obtained by the lottery by the lottery means in the low probability state and the normal state is the first jackpot, it is easy to accept the game medium by the ball winning means by operating the movable body Both the control to the high probability state by the probability changing means and the control to the advantageous state by the acceptance condition changing means after executing the first control that enables a large amount of prize balls to be acquired by the conversion A first profit granting means for providing
  When the jackpot obtained by the lottery by the lottery means in the low probability state and the normal state is the second jackpot, despite operating the movable body by the ball winning means, Unlike the case of the first profit granting means, after executing the second control for operating the movable body so that a large amount of prize balls cannot be obtained, the probability changing means controls the high probability state. A second benefit providing means for providing only the control to the high probability state among the control to the advantageous state by the acceptance condition changing means;
  If the lottery is lost by the lottery means in the low probability state and the normal state, if a specific small hit condition is satisfied, the probability changing means by the probability changing means, Although the control to the high probability state and the control to the advantageous state by the acceptance condition changing means are not performed, the second benefit is the operation of the movable body in the ball winning means. As in the case of the granting means, a third profit giving means for executing a third control for operating the movable body so that a large amount of prize balls cannot be obtained;
  Display effect control means for controlling the effect mode in a predetermined display device;
  With
  The display effect control means includes:
  When the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the low probability state and the normal state is a first big hit, after the first control by the first profit granting means is executed, the probability changing means by the probability changing means First effect mode control means that can be controlled so that a special effect mode appears in a gaming state in which both control to a high probability state and control to the advantageous state by the acceptance condition changing means are made;
  When the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the low probability state and the normal state is a second jackpot, after the second control by the second profit granting means is executed, the probability changing means by the probability changing means A second effect mode control means that can be controlled so that a specific expected effect mode appears in a gaming state in which control to a high probability state is performed;
  When the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the low probability state and the normal state is a small hit, after the third control by the third profit giving means is executed, the high probability by the probability changing means Third effect mode control means that can be controlled so that a specific expected effect mode appears even though the game state is not controlled to a state;
  Regardless of whether the second effect mode control means or the third effect mode control means is controlled to a specific expected effect mode, a predetermined effect condition is satisfied when in a specific expected effect mode. And a fourth effect mode control means capable of executing a control for shifting to the high expectation effect effect mode in which the degree of expectation controlled to the high probability state is relatively high.
  Have
  The second profit granting means is:
  When the second big hit is obtained as a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when the specific expected effect mode appears by the third effect mode control means, the second control is executed. On the other hand, among the control to the high probability state by the probability changing means and the control to the advantageous state by the acceptance condition changing means, only the control to the high probability state is provided.
  When the second big hit is obtained as a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when the specific expected effect mode appears by the second effect mode control means, the second control is executed. And providing both the control to the high probability state by the probability changing means and the control to the advantageous state by the acceptance condition changing means,
  Even if a second jackpot is obtained as a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when the special effect mode appears by the first effect mode control means, after the second control is executed, , Providing both the control to the high probability state by the probability changing means and the control to the advantageous state by the acceptance condition changing means,
  further,
  The display effect control means includes:
  As a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when a specific expected effect mode appears by the third effect mode control means, the second effect mode control means Means for controlling so that different effects appear when the second jackpot is obtained as a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when a specific expected effect mode appears.
  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   The predetermined display device is provided as a liquid crystal display device.
  The gaming machine according to claim 1.   The predetermined display device performs variable display of symbols.
  The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.

Images